diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/15697.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/15697.txt | 8857 |
1 files changed, 8857 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/15697.txt b/old/15697.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d581ca7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/15697.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8857 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of True Stories of History and Biography +by Nathaniel Hawthorne + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net + + +Title: True Stories of History and Biography + +Author: Nathaniel Hawthorne + +Release Date: April 24, 2005 [EBook #15697] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TRUE STORIES *** + + + + +Produced by Internet Archive Children's Library, Joshua +Hutchinson, Josephine Paolucci and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + + + + + + +[Illustration] + + + + +TRUE STORIES + +FROM + +HISTORY AND BIOGRAPHY. + +BY + +NATHANIEL HAWTHORNE + +BOSTON: +TICKNOR, REED, AND FIELDS. +MDCCCLI. + +Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1850, by NATHANIEL +HAWTHORNE, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District +of Massachusetts. + +CAMBRIDGE: +PRINTED BY BOLLES AND HOUGHTON. + + + + +PREFACE. + + +In writing this ponderous tome, the author's desire has been to describe +the eminent characters and remarkable events of our annals, in such a +form and style, that the YOUNG might make acquaintance with them of +their own accord. For this purpose, while ostensibly relating the +adventures of a Chair, he has endeavored to keep a distinct and unbroken +thread of authentic history. The Chair is made to pass from one to +another of those personages, of whom he thought it most desirable for +the young reader to have vivid and familiar ideas, and whose lives and +actions would best enable him to give picturesque sketches of the times. +On its sturdy oaken legs, it trudges diligently from one scene to +another, and seems always to thrust itself in the way, with most benign +complacency, whenever a historical personage happens to be looking round +for a seat. + +There is certainly no method, by which the shadowy outlines of departed +men and women can be made to assume the hues of life more effectually, +than by connecting their images with the substantial and homely reality +of a fireside chair. It causes us to feel at once, that these characters +of history had a private and familiar existence, and were not wholly +contained within that cold array of outward action, which we are +compelled to receive as the adequate representation of their lives. If +this impression can be given, much is accomplished. + +Setting aside Grandfather and his auditors, and excepting the adventures +of the Chair, which form the machinery of the work, nothing in the +ensuing pages can be termed fictitious. The author, it is true, has +sometimes assumed the license of filling up the outline of history with +details, for which he has none but imaginative authority, but which, he +hopes, do not violate nor give a false coloring to the truth. He +believes that, in this respect, his narrative will not be found to +convey ideas and impressions, of which the reader may hereafter find it +necessary to purge his mind. + +The author's great doubt is, whether he has succeeded in writing a book +which will be readable by the class for whom he intends it. To make a +lively and entertaining narrative for children, with such unmalleable +material as is presented by the sombre, stern, and rigid characteristics +of the Puritans and their descendants, is quite as difficult an attempt, +as to manufacture delicate playthings out of the granite rocks on which +New England is founded. + + + + +THE WHOLE HISTORY + +OF + +GRANDFATHER'S CHAIR. + +COMPLETE IN THREE PARTS. + + + + +PART I. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +Grandfather had been sitting in his old arm-chair, all that pleasant +afternoon, while the children were pursuing their various sports, far +off or near at hand. Sometimes you would have said, "Grandfather is +asleep;" but still, even when his eyes were closed, his thoughts were +with the young people, playing among the flowers and shrubbery of the +garden. + +He heard the voice of Laurence, who had taken possession of a heap of +decayed branches which the gardener had lopped from the fruit trees, and +was building a little hut for his cousin Clara and himself. He heard +Clara's gladsome voice, too, as she weeded and watered the flower-bed +which had been given her for her own. He could have counted every +footstep that Charley took, as he trundled his wheelbarrow along the +gravel walk. And though Grandfather was old and gray-haired, yet his +heart leaped with joy whenever little Alice came fluttering, like a +butterfly, into the room. She had made each of the children her playmate +in turn, and now made Grandfather her playmate too, and thought him the +merriest of them all. + +At last the children grew weary of their sports; because a summer +afternoon is like a long lifetime to the young. So they came into the +room together, and clustered round Grandfather's great chair. Little +Alice, who was hardly five years old, took the privilege of the +youngest, and climbed his knee. It was a pleasant thing to behold that +fair and golden-haired child in the lap of the old man, and to think +that, different as they were, the hearts of both could be gladdened with +the same joys. + +"Grandfather," said little Alice, laying her head back upon his arm, "I +am very tired now. You must tell me a story to make me go to sleep." + +"That is not what story-tellers like," answered Grandfather, smiling. +"They are better satisfied when they can keep their auditors awake." + +"But here are Laurence, and Charley, and I," cried cousin Clara, who was +twice as old as little Alice. "We will all three keep wide awake. And +pray, Grandfather, tell us a story about this strange-looking old +chair." + +Now, the chair in which Grandfather sat was made of oak, which had grown +dark with age, but had been rubbed and polished till it shone as bright +as mahogany. It was very large and heavy, and had a back that rose high +above Grandfather's white head. This back was curiously carved in open +work, so as to represent flowers and foliage and other devices; which +the children had often gazed at, but could never understand what they +meant. On the very tiptop of the chair, over the head of Grandfather +himself, was a likeness of a lion's head, which had such a savage grin +that you would almost expect to hear it growl and snarl. + +The children had seen Grandfather sitting in this chair ever since they +could remember any thing. Perhaps the younger of them supposed that he +and the chair had come into the world together, and that both had always +been as old as they were now. At this time, however, it happened to be +the fashion for ladies to adorn their drawing-rooms with the oldest and +oddest chairs that could be found. It seemed to cousin Clara that if +these ladies could have seen Grandfather's old chair, they would have +thought it worth all the rest together. She wondered if it were not even +older than Grandfather himself, and longed to know all about its +history. + +"Do, Grandfather, talk to us about this chair," she repeated. + +"Well, child," said Grandfather, patting Clara's cheek, "I can tell you +a great many stories of my chair. Perhaps your cousin Laurence would +like to hear them too. They would teach him something about the history +and distinguished people of his country, which he has never read in any +of his school-books." + +Cousin Laurence was a boy of twelve, a bright scholar, in whom an early +thoughtfulness and sensibility began to show themselves. His young fancy +kindled at the idea of knowing all the adventures of this venerable +chair. He looked eagerly in Grandfather's face; and even Charley, a +bold, brisk, restless little fellow of nine, sat himself down on the +carpet, and resolved to be quiet for at least ten minutes, should the +story last so long. + +Meantime, little Alice was already asleep; so Grandfather, being much +pleased with such an attentive audience, began to talk about matters +that had happened long ago. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +But, before relating the adventures of the chair, Grandfather found it +necessary to speak of the circumstances that caused the first settlement +of New England. For it will soon be perceived that the story of this +remarkable chair cannot be told without telling a great deal of the +history of the country. + +So, Grandfather talked about the Puritans, as those persons were called +who thought it sinful to practise the religious forms and ceremonies +which the Church of England had borrowed from the Roman Catholics. These +Puritans suffered so much persecution in England that, in 1607, many of +them went over to Holland, and lived ten or twelve years at Amsterdam +and Leyden. But they feared that, if they continued there much longer, +they should cease to be English, and should adopt all the manners and +ideas and feelings of the Dutch. For this and other reasons, in the year +1620, they embarked on board of the ship Mayflower, and crossed the +ocean to the shores of Cape Cod. There they made a settlement, and +called it Plymouth; which, though now a part of Massachusetts, was for a +long time a colony by itself. And thus was formed the earliest +settlement of the Puritans in America. + +Meantime, those of the Puritans who remained in England continued to +suffer grievous persecution on account of their religious opinions. They +began to look around them for some spot where they might worship God, +not as the king and bishops thought fit, but according to the dictates +of their own consciences. When their brethren had gone from Holland to +America, they bethought themselves that they likewise might find refuge +from persecution there. Several gentlemen among them purchased a tract +of country on the coast of Massachusetts Bay, and obtained a charter +from King Charles, which authorized them to make laws for the settlers. +In the year 1628, they sent over a few people, with John Endicott at +their head, to commence a plantation at Salem. Peter Palfrey, Roger +Conant, and one or two more, had built houses there in 1626, and may be +considered as the first settlers of that ancient town. Many other +Puritans prepared to follow Endicott. + +"And now we come to the chair, my dear children," said Grandfather. +"This chair is supposed to have been made of an oak tree which grew in +the park of the English earl of Lincoln, between two and three centuries +ago. In its younger days it used, probably, to stand in the hall of the +earl's castle. Do not you see the coat of arms of the family of Lincoln, +carved in the open work of the back? But when his daughter, the Lady +Arbella, was married to a certain Mr. Johnson, the earl gave her this +valuable chair." + +"Who was Mr. Johnson?" inquired Clara. + +"He was a gentleman of great wealth, who agreed with the Puritans in +their religious opinions," answered Grandfather. "And as his belief was +the same as theirs, he resolved that he would live and die with them. +Accordingly, in the month of April, 1630, he left his pleasant abode and +all his comforts in England, and embarked with the Lady Arbella, on +board of a ship bound for America." + +As Grandfather was frequently impeded by the questions and observations +of his young auditors, we deem it advisable to omit all such prattle as +is not essential to the story. We have taken some pains to find out +exactly what Grandfather said, and here offer to our readers, as nearly +as possible in his own words, the story of + + +THE LADY ARBELLA. + +The ship in which Mr. Johnson and his lady embarked, taking +Grandfather's chair along with them, was called the Arbella, in honor of +the lady herself. A fleet of ten or twelve vessels, with many hundred +passengers, left England about the same time; for a multitude of people, +who were discontented with the king's government and oppressed by the +bishops, were flocking over to the new world. One of the vessels in the +fleet was that same Mayflower which had carried the Puritan pilgrims to +Plymouth. And now, my children, I would have you fancy yourselves in the +cabin of the good ship Arbella; because if you could behold the +passengers aboard that vessel, you would feel what a blessing and honor +it was for New England to have such settlers. They were the best men and +women of their day. + +Among the passengers was John Winthrop, who had sold the estate of his +forefathers, and was going to prepare a new home for his wife and +children in the wilderness. He had the king's charter in his keeping, +and was appointed the first Governor of Massachusetts. Imagine him a +person of grave and benevolent aspect, dressed in a black velvet suit, +with a broad ruff around his neck and a peaked beard upon his chin. +There was likewise a minister of the Gospel, whom the English bishops +had forbidden to preach, but who knew that he should have liberty both +to preach and pray in the forests of America. He wore a black cloak, +called a Geneva cloak, and had a black velvet cap, fitting close to his +head, as was the fashion of almost all the Puritan clergymen. In their +company came Sir Richard Saltonstall, who had been one of the five first +projectors of the new colony. He soon returned to his native country. +But his descendants still remain in New England; and the good old family +name is as much respected in our days as it was in those of Sir Richard. + +Not only these, but several other men of wealth and pious ministers, +were in the cabin of the Arbella. One had banished himself for ever from +the old hall where his ancestors had lived for hundreds of years. +Another had left his quiet parsonage, in a country town of England. +Others had come from the universities of Oxford or Cambridge, where they +had gained great fame for their learning. And here they all were, +tossing upon the uncertain and dangerous sea, and bound for a home that +was more dangerous than even the sea itself. In the cabin, likewise, sat +the Lady Arbella in her chair, with a gentle and sweet expression on her +face, but looking too pale and feeble to endure the hardships of the +wilderness. + +Every morning and evening the Lady Arbella gave up her great chair to +one of the ministers, who took his place in it and read passages from +the Bible to his companions. And thus, with prayers and pious +conversation, and frequent singing of hymns, which the breezes caught +from their lips and scattered far over the desolate waves, they +prosecuted their voyage, and sailed into the harbor of Salem in the +month of June. + +At that period there were but six or eight dwellings in the town; and +these were miserable hovels, with roofs of straw and wooden chimneys. +The passengers in the fleet either built huts with bark and branches of +trees, or erected tents of cloth till they could provide themselves with +better shelter. Many of them went to form a settlement at Charlestown. +It was thought fit that the Lady Arbella should tarry in Salem for a +time; she was probably received as a guest into the family of John +Endicott. He was the chief person in the plantation, and had the only +comfortable house which the new comers had beheld since they left +England. So now, children, you must imagine Grandfather's chair in the +midst of a new scene. + +Suppose it a hot summer's day, and the lattice-windows of a chamber in +Mr. Endicott's house thrown wide open. The Lady Arbella, looking paler +than she did on shipboard, is sitting in her chair, and thinking +mournfully of far-off England. She rises and goes to the window. There, +amid patches of garden ground and cornfield, she sees the few wretched +hovels of the settlers, with the still ruder wigwams and cloth tents of +the passengers who had arrived in the same fleet with herself. Far and +near stretches the dismal forest of pine trees, which throw their black +shadows over the whole land, and likewise over the heart of this poor +lady. + +All the inhabitants of the little village are busy. One is clearing a +spot on the verge of the forest for his homestead; another is hewing the +trunk of a fallen pine tree, in order to build himself a dwelling; a +third is hoeing in his field of Indian corn. Here comes a huntsman out +of the woods, dragging a bear which he has shot, and shouting to the +neighbors to lend him a hand. There goes a man to the sea-shore, with a +spade and a bucket, to dig a mess of clams, which were a principal +article of food with the first settlers. Scattered here and there are +two or three dusky figures, clad in mantles of fur, with ornaments of +bone hanging from their ears, and the feathers of wild birds in their +coal black hair. They have belts of shell-work slung across their +shoulders, and are armed with bows and arrows and flint-headed spears. +These are an Indian Sagamore and his attendants, who have come to gaze +at the labors of the white men. And now rises a cry, that a pack of +wolves have seized a young calf in the pasture; and every man snatches +up his gun or pike, and runs in chase of the marauding beasts. + +Poor Lady Arbella watches all these sights, and feels that this new +world is fit only for rough and hardy people. None should be here but +those who can struggle with wild beasts and wild men, and can toil in +the heat or cold, and can keep their hearts firm against all +difficulties and dangers. But she is not one of these. Her gentle and +timid spirit sinks within her; and turning away from the window she sits +down in the great chair, and wonders thereabouts in the wilderness her +friends will dig her grave. + +Mr. Johnson had gone, with Governor Winthrop and most of the other +passengers, to Boston, where he intended to build a house for Lady +Arbella and himself. Boston was then covered with wild woods, and had +fewer inhabitants even than Salem. During her husband's absence, poor +Lady Arbella felt herself growing ill, and was hardly able to stir from +the great chair. Whenever John Endicott noticed her despondency, he +doubtless addressed her with words of comfort. "Cheer up, my good +lady!" he would say. "In a little time, you will love this rude life of +the wilderness as I do." But Endicott's heart was as bold and resolute +as iron, and he could not understand why a woman's heart should not be +of iron too. + +Still, however, he spoke kindly to the lady, and then hastened forth to +till his corn-field and set out fruit trees, or to bargain with the +Indians for furs, or perchance to oversee the building of a fort. Also +being a magistrate, he had often to punish some idler or evil-doer, by +ordering him to be set in the stocks or scourged at the whipping-post. +Often, too, as was the custom of the times, he and Mr. Higginson, the +minister of Salem, held long religious talks together. Thus John +Endicott was a man of multifarious business, and had no time to look +back regretfully to his native land. He felt himself fit for the new +world, and for the work that he had to do, and set himself resolutely to +accomplish it. + +What a contrast, my dear children, between this bold, rough, active man, +and the gentle Lady Arbella, who was fading away, like a pale English +flower, in the shadow of the forest! And now the great chair was often +empty, because Lady Arbella grew too weak to arise from bed. + +Meantime, her husband had pitched upon a spot for their new home. He +returned from Boston to Salem, travelling through the woods on foot, and +leaning on his pilgrim's staff. His heart yearned within him; for he +was eager to tell his wife of the new home which he had chosen. But when +he beheld her pale and hollow cheek, and found how her strength was +wasted, he must have known that her appointed home was in a better land. +Happy for him then,--happy both for him and her,--if they remembered +that there was a path to heaven, as well from this heathen wilderness as +from the Christian land whence they had come. And so, in one short month +from her arrival, the gentle Lady Arbella faded away and died. They dug +a grave for her in the new soil, where the roots of the pine trees +impeded their spades; and when her bones had rested there nearly two +hundred years, and a city had sprung up around them, a church of stone +was built upon the spot. + + * * * * * + +Charley, almost at the commencement of the foregoing narrative, had +galloped away with a prodigious clatter, upon Grandfather's stick, and +was not yet returned. So large a boy should have been ashamed to ride +upon a stick. But Laurence and Clara had listened attentively, and were +affected by this true story of the gentle lady, who had come so far to +die so soon. Grandfather had supposed that little Alice was asleep, but, +towards the close of the story, happening to look down upon her, he saw +that her blue eyes were wide open, and fixed earnestly upon his face. +The tears had gathered in them, like dew upon a delicate flower; but +when Grandfather ceased to speak, the sunshine of her smile broke forth +again. + +"O, the lady must have been so glad to get to heaven!" exclaimed little +Alice. + +"Grandfather, what became of Mr. Johnson?" asked Clara. + +"His heart appears to have been quite broken," answered Grandfather; +"for he died at Boston within a month after the death of his wife. He +was buried in the very same tract of ground, where he had intended to +build a dwelling for Lady Arbella and himself. Where their house would +have stood there was his grave. + +"I never heard any thing so melancholy!" said Clara. + +"The people loved and respected Mr. Johnson so much," continued +Grandfather, "that it was the last request of many of them, when they +died, that they might be buried as near as possible to this good man's +grave. And so the field became the first burial-ground in Boston. When +you pass through Tremont street, along by King's Chapel, you see a +burial-ground, containing many old grave-stones and monuments. That was +Mr. Johnson's field." + +"How sad is the thought," observed Clara, "that one of the first things +which the settlers had to do, when they came to the new world, was to +set apart a burial-ground!" + +"Perhaps," said Laurence, "if they had found no need of burial-grounds +here, they would have been glad, after a few years, to go back to +England." + +Grandfather looked at Laurence, to discover whether he knew how profound +and true a thing he had said. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +Not long after Grandfather had told the story of his great chair, there +chanced to be a rainy day. Our friend Charley, after disturbing the +household with beat of drum and riotous shouts, races up and down the +staircase, overturning of chairs, and much other uproar, began to feel +the quiet and confinement within doors intolerable. But as the rain came +down in a flood, the little fellow was hopelessly a prisoner, and now +stood with sullen aspect at a window, wondering whether the sun itself +were not extinguished by so much moisture in the sky. + +Charley had already exhausted the less eager activity of the other +children; and they had betaken themselves to occupations that did not +admit of his companionship. Laurence sat in a recess near the book-case, +reading, not for the first time, the Midsummer Night's Dream. Clara was +making a rosary of beads for a little figure of a Sister of Charity, who +was to attend the Bunker Hill Fair, and lend her aid in erecting the +Monument. Little Alice sat on Grandfather's foot-stool, with a +picture-book in her hand; and, for every picture, the child was telling +Grandfather a story. She did not read from the book, (for little Alice +had not much skill in reading,) but told the story out of her own heart +and mind. + +Charley was too big a boy, of course, to care any thing about little +Alice's stories, although Grandfather appeared to listen with a good +deal of interest. Often, in a young child's ideas and fancies, there is +something which it requires the thought of a lifetime to comprehend. But +Charley was of opinion, that if a story must be told, it had better be +told by Grandfather, than little Alice. + +"Grandfather, I want to hear more about your chair," said he. + +Now Grandfather remembered that Charley had galloped away upon a stick, +in the midst of the narrative of poor Lady Arbella, and I know not +whether he would have thought it worth while to tell another story, +merely to gratify such an inattentive auditor as Charley. But Laurence +laid down his book and seconded the request. Clara drew her chair nearer +to Grandfather, and little Alice immediately closed her picture-book, +and looked up into his face. Grandfather had not the heart to disappoint +them. + +He mentioned several persons who had a share in the settlement of our +country, and who would be well worthy of remembrance, if we could find +room to tell about them all. Among the rest, Grandfather spoke of the +famous Hugh Peters, a minister of the gospel, who did much good to the +inhabitants of Salem. Mr. Peters afterwards went back to England, and +was chaplain to Oliver Cromwell; but Grandfather did not tell the +children what became of this upright and zealous man, at last. In fact, +his auditors were growing impatient to hear more about the history of +the chair. + +"After the death of Mr. Johnson," said he, "Grandfather's chair came +into the possession of Roger Williams. He was a clergyman, who arrived +at Salem, and settled there in 1631. Doubtless the good man has spent +many a studious hour in this old chair, either penning a sermon, or +reading some abstruse book of theology, till midnight came upon him +unawares. At that period, as there were few lamps or candles to be had, +people used to read or work by the light of pitchpine torches. These +supplied the place of the "midnight oil," to the learned men of New +England." + +Grandfather went on to talk about Roger Williams, and told the children +several particulars, which we have not room to repeat. One incident, +however, which was connected with his life, must be related, because it +will give the reader an idea of the opinions and feelings of the first +settlers of New England. It was as follows: + + +THE RED CROSS. + +While Roger Williams sat in Grandfather's chair, at his humble residence +in Salem, John Endicott would often come to visit him. As the clergy had +great influence in temporal concerns, the minister and magistrate would +talk over the occurrences of the day, and consult how the people might +be governed according to scriptural laws. + +One thing especially troubled them both. In the old national banner of +England, under which her soldiers have fought for hundreds of years, +there is a Red Cross, which has been there ever since the days when +England was in subjection to the Pope. The Cross, though a holy symbol, +was abhorred by the Puritans, because they considered it a relic of +Popish idolatry. Now, whenever the train-band of Salem was mustered, the +soldiers, with Endicott at their head, had no other flag to march under +than this same old papistical banner of England, with the Red Cross in +the midst of it. The banner of the Red Cross, likewise, was flying on +the walls of the fort of Salem; and a similar one was displayed in +Boston harbor, from the fortress on Castle Island. + +"I profess, brother Williams," Captain Endicott would say, after they +had been talking of this matter, "it distresses a Christian man's heart, +to see this idolatrous Cross flying over our heads. A stranger beholding +it, would think that we had undergone all our hardships and dangers, by +sea and in the wilderness, only to get new dominions for the Pope of +Rome." + +"Truly, good Mr. Endicott," Roger Williams would answer, "you speak as +an honest man and Protestant Christian should. For mine own part, were +it my business to draw a sword, I should reckon it sinful to fight under +such a banner. Neither can I, in my pulpit, ask the blessing of Heaven +upon it." + +Such, probably, was the way in which Roger Williams and John Endicott +used to talk about the banner of the Red Cross. Endicott, who was a +prompt and resolute man, soon determined that Massachusetts, if she +could not have a banner of her own, should at least be delivered from +that of the Pope of Rome. + +Not long afterwards there was a military muster at Salem. Every +able-bodied man, in the town and neighborhood, was there. All were well +armed, with steel caps upon their heads, plates of iron upon their +breasts and at their backs, and gorgets of steel around their necks. +When the sun shone upon these ranks of iron-clad men, they flashed and +blazed with a splendor that bedazzled the wild Indians, who had come out +of the woods to gaze at them. The soldiers had long pikes, swords, and +muskets, which were fired with matches, and were almost as heavy as a +small cannon. + +These men had mostly a stern and rigid aspect. To judge by their looks, +you might have supposed that there was as much iron in their hearts, as +there was upon their heads and breasts. They were all devoted Puritans, +and of the same temper as those with whom Oliver Cromwell afterwards +overthrew the throne of England. They hated all the relics of Popish +superstition as much as Endicott himself; and yet, over their heads, was +displayed the banner of the Red Cross. + +Endicott was the captain of the company. While the soldiers were +expecting his orders to begin their exercise, they saw him take the +banner in one hand, holding his drawn sword in the other. Probably he +addressed them in a speech, and explained how horrible a thing it was, +that men, who had fled from Popish idolatry into the wilderness, should +be compelled to fight under its symbols here. Perhaps he concluded his +address somewhat in the following style. + +"And now, fellow soldiers, you see this old banner of England. Some of +you, I doubt not, may think it treason for a man to lay violent hands +upon it. But whether or no it be treason to man, I have good assurance +in my conscience that it is no treason to God. Wherefore I have resolved +that we will rather be God's soldiers, than soldiers of the Pope of +Rome; and in that mind I now cut the Papal Cross out of this banner." + +And so he did. And thus, in a province belonging to the crown of +England, a captain was found bold enough to deface the King's banner +with his sword. + +When Winthrop, and the other wise men of Massachusetts, heard of it, +they were disquieted, being afraid that Endicott's act would bring great +trouble upon himself and them. An account of the matter was carried to +King Charles; but he was then so much engrossed by dissensions with his +people, that he had no leisure to punish the offender. In other times, +it might have cost Endicott his life, and Massachusetts her charter. + + * * * * * + +"I should like to know, Grandfather," said Laurence, when the story was +ended, "whether, when Endicott cut the Red Cross out of the banner, he +meant to imply that Massachusetts was independent of England?" + +"A sense of the independence of his adopted country, must have been in +that bold man's heart," answered Grandfather; "but I doubt whether he +had given the matter much consideration, except in its religious +bearing. However, it was a very remarkable affair, and a very strong +expression of Puritan character." + +Grandfather proceeded to speak further of Roger Williams, and of other +persons who sat in the great chair, as will be seen in the following +chapter. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +"Roger Williams," said Grandfather, "did not keep possession of the +chair a great while. His opinions of civil and religious matters +differed, in many respects, from those of the rulers and clergymen of +Massachusetts. Now the wise men of those days believed, that the country +could not be safe, unless all the inhabitants thought and felt alike." + +"Does any body believe so in our days Grandfather?" asked Laurence. + +"Possibly there are some who believe it," said Grandfather; "but they +have not so much power to act upon their belief, as the magistrates and +ministers had, in the days of Roger Williams. They had the power to +deprive this good man of his home, and to send him out from the midst of +them, in search of a new place of rest. He was banished in 1634, and +went first to Plymouth colony; but as the people there held the same +opinions as those of Massachusetts, he was not suffered to remain among +them. However, the wilderness was wide enough; so Roger Williams took +his staff and travelled into the forest, and made treaties with the +Indians, and began a plantation which he called Providence." + +"I have been to Providence on the railroad," said Charley. "It is but a +two hours' ride." + +"Yes, Charley," replied Grandfather; "but when Roger Williams travelled +thither, over hills and valleys, and through the tangled woods, and +across swamps and streams, it was a journey of several days. Well; his +little plantation is now grown to be a populous city; and the +inhabitants have a great veneration for Roger Williams. His name is +familiar in the mouths of all because they see it on their bank bills. +How it would have perplexed this good clergyman, if he had been told +that he should give his name to the ROGER WILLIAMS BANK!" + +"When he was driven from Massachusetts," said Laurence, "and began his +journey into the woods, he must have felt as if he were burying himself +forever from the sight and knowledge of men. Yet the whole country has +now heard of him, and will remember him forever." + +"Yes," answered Grandfather, "it often happens, that the outcasts of one +generation are those, who are reverenced as the wisest and best of men +by the next. The securest fame is that which comes after a man's death. +But let us return to our story. When Roger Williams was banished, he +appears to have given the chair to Mrs. Anne Hutchinson. At all events +it was in her possession in 1637. She was a very sharp-witted and +well-instructed lady, and was so conscious of her own wisdom and +abilities, that she thought it a pity that the world should not have the +benefit of them. She therefore used to hold lectures in Boston, once or +twice a week, at which most of the women attended. Mrs. Hutchinson +presided at these meetings, sitting, with great state and dignity, in +Grandfather's chair." + +"Grandfather, was it positively this very chair?" demanded Clara, laying +her hand upon its carved elbow. + +"Why not, my dear Clara?" said Grandfather. "Well; Mrs. Hutchinson's +lectures soon caused a great disturbance; for the ministers of Boston +did not think it safe and proper, that a woman should publicly instruct +the people in religious doctrines. Moreover, she made the matter worse, +by declaring that the Rev. Mr. Cotton was the only sincerely pious and +holy clergyman in New England. Now the clergy of those days had quite as +much share in the government of the country, though indirectly, as the +magistrates themselves; so you may imagine what a host of powerful +enemies were raised up against Mrs. Hutchinson. A synod was convened; +that is to say, an assemblage of all the ministers in Massachusetts. +They declared that there were eighty-two erroneous opinions on religious +subjects, diffused among the people, and that Mrs. Hutchinson's opinions +were of the number." + +"If they had eighty-two wrong opinions," observed Charley, "I don't see +how they could have any right ones." + +"Mrs. Hutchinson had many zealous friends and converts," continued +Grandfather. "She was favored by young Henry Vane, who had come over +from England a year or two before, and had since been chosen governor +of the colony, at the age of twenty-four. But Winthrop, and most of the +other leading men, as well as the ministers, felt an abhorrence of her +doctrines. Thus two opposite parties were formed; and so fierce were the +dissensions, that it was feared the consequence would be civil war and +bloodshed. But Winthrop and the ministers being the most powerful, they +disarmed and imprisoned Mrs. Hutchinson's adherents. She, like Roger +Williams, was banished." + +"Dear Grandfather, did they drive the poor woman into the woods?" +exclaimed little Alice, who contrived to feel a human interest even in +these discords of polemic divinity. + +"They did, my darling," replied Grandfather; "and the end of her life +was so sad, you must not hear it. At her departure, it appears from the +best authorities, that she gave the great chair to her friend, Henry +Vane. He was a young man of wonderful talents and great learning, who +had imbibed the religious opinions of the Puritans, and left England +with the intention of spending his life in Massachusetts. The people +chose him governor; but the controversy about Mrs. Hutchinson, and other +troubles, caused him to leave the country in 1637. You may read the +subsequent events of his life in the History of England." + +"Yes, Grandfather," cried Laurence; "and we may read them better in Mr. +Upham's biography of Vane. And what a beautiful death he died, long +afterwards! beautiful, though it was on a scaffold." + +"Many of the most beautiful deaths have been there," said Grandfather. +"The enemies of a great and good man can in no other way make him so +glorious, as by giving him the crown of martyrdom." + +In order that the children might fully understand the all-important +history of the chair, Grandfather now thought fit to speak of the +progress that was made in settling several colonies. The settlement of +Plymouth, in 1620, has already been mentioned. In 1635, Mr. Hooker and +Mr. Stone, two ministers, went on foot from Massachusetts to +Connecticut, through the pathless woods, taking their whole congregation +along with them. They founded the town of Hartford. In 1638, Mr. +Davenport, a very celebrated minister, went, with other people, and +began a plantation at New Haven. In the same year, some persons who had +been persecuted in Massachusetts, went to the Isle of Rhodes, since +called Rhode Island, and settled there. About this time, also, many +settlers had gone to Maine, and were living without any regular +government. There were likewise settlers near Piscataqua River, in the +region which is now called New Hampshire. + +Thus, at various points along the coast of New England, there were +communities of Englishmen. Though these communities were independent of +one another, yet they had a common dependence upon England; and, at so +vast a distance from their native home, the inhabitants must all have +felt like brethren. They were fitted to become one united people, at a +future period. Perhaps their feelings of brotherhood were the stronger, +because different nations had formed settlements to the north and to the +south. In Canada and Nova Scotia were colonies of French. On the banks +of the Hudson River was a colony of Dutch, who had taken possession of +that region many years before, and called it New Netherlands. + +Grandfather, for aught I know, might have gone on to speak of Maryland +and Virginia; for the good old gentleman really seemed to suppose, that +the whole surface of the United States was not too broad a foundation to +place the four legs of his chair upon. But, happening to glance at +Charley, he perceived that this naughty boy was growing impatient, and +meditating another ride upon a stick. So here, for the present, +Grandfather suspended the history of his chair. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +The Children had now learned to look upon the chair with an interest, +which was almost the same as if it were a conscious being, and could +remember the many famous people whom it had held within its arms. + +Even Charley, lawless as he was, seemed to feel that this venerable +chair must not be clambered upon nor overturned, although he had no +scruple in taking such liberties with every other chair in the house. +Clara treated it with still greater reverence, often taking occasion to +smooth its cushion, and to brush the dust from the carved flowers and +grotesque figures of its oaken back and arms. Laurence would sometimes +sit a whole hour, especially at twilight, gazing at the chair, and, by +the spell of his imaginations, summoning up its ancient occupants to +appear in it again. + +Little Alice evidently employed herself in a similar way; for once, when +Grandfather had gone abroad, the child was heard talking with the gentle +Lady Arbella, as if she were still sitting in the chair. So sweet a +child as little Alice may fitly talk with angels, such as the Lady +Arbella had long since become. + +Grandfather was soon importuned for more stories about the chair. He +had no difficulty in relating them; for it really seemed as if every +person, noted in our early history, had, on some occasion or other, +found repose within its comfortable arms. If Grandfather took pride in +any thing, it was in being the possessor of such an honorable and +historic elbow chair. + +"I know not precisely who next got possession of the chair, after +Governor Vane went back to England," said Grandfather. "But there is +reason to believe that President Dunster sat in it, when he held the +first commencement at Harvard College. You have often heard, children, +how careful our forefathers were, to give their young people a good +education. They had scarcely cut down trees enough to make room for +their own dwellings, before they began to think of establishing a +college. Their principal object was, to rear up pious and learned +ministers; and hence old writers call Harvard College a school of the +prophets." + +"Is the college a school of the prophets now?" asked Charley. + +"It is a long while since I took my degree, Charley. You must ask some +of the recent graduates," answered Grandfather. "As I was telling you, +President Dunster sat in Grandfather's chair in 1642, when he conferred +the degree of bachelor of arts on nine young men. They were the first in +America, who had received that honor. And now, my dear auditors, I must +confess that there are contradictory statements and some uncertainty +about the adventures of the chair, for a period of almost ten years. +Some say that it was occupied by your own ancestor, William Hawthorne, +first Speaker of the House of Representatives. I have nearly satisfied +myself, however, that, during most of this questionable period, it was +literally the Chair of State. It gives me much pleasure to imagine, that +several successive governors of Massachusetts sat in it at the council +board." + +"But, Grandfather," interposed Charley, who was a matter-of-fact little +person, "what reason have you to imagine so?" + +"Pray do imagine it, Grandfather," said Laurence. + +"With Charley's permission, I will," replied Grandfather, smiling. "Let +us consider it settled, therefore, that Winthrop, Bellingham, Dudley, +and Endicott, each of them, when chosen governor, took his seat in our +great chair on election day. In this chair, likewise, did those +excellent governors preside, while holding consultations with the chief +counsellors of the province, who were styled Assistants. The governor +sat in this chair, too, whenever messages were brought to him from the +chamber of Representatives." + +And here Grandfather took occasion to talk, rather tediously, about the +nature and forms of government that established themselves, almost +spontaneously, in Massachusetts and the other New England colonies. +Democracies were the natural growth of the new world. As to +Massachusetts, it was at first intended that the colony should be +governed by a council in London. But, in a little while, the people had +the whole power in their own hands, and chose annually the governor, the +counsellors, and the representatives. The people of old England had +never enjoyed any thing like the liberties and privileges, which the +settlers of New England now possessed. And they did not adopt these +modes of government after long study, but in simplicity, as if there +were no other way for people to be ruled. + +"But, Laurence," continued Grandfather, "when you want instruction on +these points, you must seek it in Mr. Bancroft's History. I am merely +telling the history of a chair. To proceed. The period during which the +governors sat in our chair, was not very full of striking incidents. The +province was now established on a secure foundation; but it did not +increase so rapidly as at first, because the Puritans were no longer +driven from England by persecution. However, there was still a quiet and +natural growth. The legislature incorporated towns, and made new +purchases of lands from the Indians. A very memorable event took place +in 1643. The colonies of Massachusetts, Plymouth, Connecticut, and New +Haven, formed a union, for the purpose of assisting each other in +difficulties, and for mutual defence against their enemies. They called +themselves the United Colonies of New England." + +"Were they under a government like that of the United States?" inquired +Laurence. + +"No," replied Grandfather, "the different colonies did not compose one +nation together; it was merely a confederacy among the governments. It +somewhat resembled the league of the Amphictyons, which you remember in +Grecian history. But to return to our chair. In 1644 it was highly +honored; for Governor Endicott sat in it, when he gave audience to an +ambassador from the French governor of Acadie, or Nova Scotia. A treaty +of peace, between Massachusetts and the French colony, was then signed." + +"Did England allow Massachusetts to make war and peace with foreign +countries?" asked Laurence. + +"Massachusetts, and the whole of New England, was then almost +independent of the mother country," said Grandfather. "There was now a +civil war in England; and the king, as you may well suppose, had his +hands full at home, and could pay but little attention to these remote +colonies. When the Parliament got the power into their hands, they +likewise had enough to do in keeping down the Cavaliers. Thus New +England, like a young and hardy lad, whose father and mother neglect it, +was left to take care of itself. In 1649, King Charles was beheaded. +Oliver Cromwell then became Protector of England; and as he was a +Puritan himself, and had risen by the valor of the English Puritans, he +showed himself a loving and indulgent father to the Puritan colonies in +America." + +Grandfather might have continued to talk in this dull manner, nobody +knows how long; but, suspecting that Charley would find the subject +rather dry, he looked sideways at that vivacious little fellow, and saw +him give an involuntary yawn. Whereupon, Grandfather proceeded with the +history of the chair, and related a very entertaining incident, which +will be found in the next chapter. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +"According to the most authentic records, my dear children," said +Grandfather, "the chair, about this time, had the misfortune to break +its leg. It was probably on account of this accident, that it ceased to +be the seat of the governors of Massachusetts; for, assuredly, it would +have been ominous of evil to the commonwealth, if the Chair of State had +tottered upon three legs. Being therefore sold at auction,--alas! what a +vicissitude for a chair that had figured in such high company, our +venerable friend was knocked down to a certain Captain John Hull. This +old gentleman, on carefully examining the maimed chair, discovered that +its broken leg might be clamped with iron and made as serviceable as +ever." + +"Here is the very leg that was broken!" exclaimed Charley, throwing +himself down on the floor to look at it. "And here are the iron clamps. +How well it was mended!" + +When they had all sufficiently examined the broken leg, Grandfather told +them a story about Captain John Hull and + + +THE PINE-TREE SHILLINGS. + +The Captain John Hull, aforesaid, was the mint-master of Massachusetts, +and coined all the money that was made there. This was a new line of +business: for, in the earlier days of the colony, the current coinage +consisted of gold and silver money of England, Portugal, and Spain. +These coins being scarce, the people were often forced to barter their +commodities, instead of selling them. + +For instance, if a man wanted to buy a coat, he perhaps exchanged a +bear-skin for it. If he wished for a barrel of molasses, he might +purchase it with a pile of pine boards. Musket-bullets were used instead +of farthings. The Indians had a sort of money, called wampum, which was +made of clam-shells; and this strange sort of specie was likewise taken +in payment of debts, by the English settlers. Bank-bills had never been +heard of. There was not money enough of any kind, in many parts of the +country, to pay the salaries of the ministers; so that they sometimes +had to take quintals of fish, bushels of corn, or cords of wood, instead +of silver or gold. + +As the people grew more numerous, and their trade one with another +increased, the want of current money was still more sensibly felt. To +supply the demand, the general court passed a law for establishing a +coinage of shillings, sixpences, and threepences. Captain John Hull was +appointed to manufacture this money, and was to have about one shilling +out of every twenty to pay him for the trouble of making them. + +Hereupon, all the old silver in the colony was handed over to Captain +John Hull. The battered silver cans and tankards, I suppose, and silver +buckles, and broken spoons, and silver buttons of worn-out coats, and +silver hilts of swords that had figured at court, all such curious old +articles were doubtless thrown into the melting-pot together. But by far +the greater part of the silver consisted of bullion from the mines of +South America, which the English buccaniers--(who were little better +than pirates)--had taken from the Spaniards, and brought to +Massachusetts. + +All this old and new silver being melted down and coined, the result was +an immense amount of splendid shillings, sixpences, and threepences. +Each had the date, 1652, on the one side, and the figure of a pine-tree +on the other. Hence they were called pine-tree shillings. And for every +twenty shillings that he coined, you will remember, Captain John Hull +was entitled to put one shilling into his own pocket. + +The magistrates soon began to suspect that the mint-master would have +the best of the bargain. They offered him a large sum of money, if he +would but give up that twentieth shilling, which he was continually +dropping into his own pocket. But Captain Hull declared himself +perfectly satisfied with the shilling. And well he might be; for so +diligently did he labor, that, in a few years, his pockets, his money +bags, and his strong box, were overflowing with pine-tree shillings. +This was probably the case when he came into possession of Grandfather's +chair; and, as he had worked so hard at the mint, it was certainly +proper that he should have a comfortable chair to rest himself in. + +When the mint-master had grown very rich, a young man, Samuel Sewell by +name, came a courting to his only daughter. His daughter,--whose name I +do not know, but we will call her Betsey,--was a fine hearty damsel, by +no means so slender as some young ladies of our own days. On the +contrary, having always fed heartily on pumpkin pies, doughnuts, Indian +puddings, and other Puritan dainties, she was as round and plump as a +pudding herself. With this round, rosy Miss Betsey, did Samuel Sewell +fall in love. As he was a young man of good character, industrious in +his business, and a member of the church, the mint-master very readily +gave his consent. + +"Yes--you may take her," said he, in his rough way; "and you'll find her +a heavy burden enough!" + +On the wedding day, we may suppose that honest John Hull dressed himself +in a plum-colored coat, all the buttons of which were made of pine-tree +shillings. The buttons of his waistcoat were sixpences; and the knees of +his smallclothes were buttoned with silver threepences. Thus attired, he +sat with great dignity in Grandfather's chair; and, being a portly old +gentleman, he completely filled it from elbow to elbow. On the opposite +side of the room, between her bride-maids, sat Miss Betsey. She was +blushing with all her might, and looked like a full blown paeony, or a +great red apple. + +There, too, was the bridegroom, dressed in a fine purple coat, and gold +lace waistcoat, with as much other finery as the Puritan laws and +customs would allow him to put on. His hair was cropped close to his +head, because Governor Endicott had forbidden any man to wear it below +the ears. But he was a very personable young man; and so thought the +bride-maids and Miss Betsey herself. + +The mint-master also was pleased with his new son-in-law; especially as +he had courted Miss Betsey out of pure love, and had said nothing at all +about her portion. So when the marriage ceremony was over, Captain Hull +whispered a word to two of his men-servants, who immediately went out, +and soon returned, lugging in a large pair of scales. They were such a +pair as wholesale merchants use, for weighing bulky commodities; and +quite a bulky commodity was now to be weighed in them. + +"Daughter Betsey," said the mint-master, "get into one side of these +scales." + +Miss Betsey,--or Mrs. Sewell, as we must now call her,--did as she was +bid, like a dutiful child, without any question of the why and +wherefore. But what her father could mean, unless to make her husband +pay for her by the pound, (in which case she would have been a dear +bargain,) she had not the least idea. + +"And now," said honest John Hull to the servants, "bring that box +hither." + +The box, to which the mint-master pointed, was a huge, square, iron +bound, oaken chest; it was big enough, my children, for all four of you +to play at hide-and-seek in. The servants tugged with might and main, +but could not lift this enormous receptacle, and were finally obliged to +drag it across the floor. Captain Hull then took a key from his girdle, +unlocked the chest, and lifted its ponderous lid. Behold! it was full to +the brim of bright pine-tree shillings, fresh from the mint; and Samuel +Sewell began to think that his father-in-law had got possession of all +the money in the Massachusetts treasury. But it was only the +mint-master's honest share of the coinage. + +Then the servants, at Captain Hull's command, heaped double handfulls of +shillings into one side of the scales, while Betsey remained in the +other. Jingle, jingle, went the shillings, as handful after handful was +thrown in, till, plump and ponderous as she was, they fairly weighed the +young lady from the floor. + +"There, son Sewell!" cried the honest mint-master, resuming his seat in +Grandfather's chair. "Take these shillings for my daughter's portion. +Use her kindly, and thank Heaven for her. It is not every wife that's +worth her weight in silver!" + + * * * * * + +The children laughed heartily at this legend, and would hardly be +convinced but that Grandfather had made it out of his own head. He +assured them faithfully, however, that he had found it in the pages of +a grave historian, and had merely tried to tell it in a somewhat funnier +style. As for Samuel Sewell, he afterwards became Chief Justice of +Massachusetts. + +"Well, Grandfather," remarked Clara, "if wedding portions now-a-days +were paid as Miss Betsey's was, young ladies would not pride themselves +upon an airy figure as many of them do." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +When his little audience next assembled round the chair, Grandfather +gave them a doleful history of the Quaker persecution, which began in +1656, and raged for about three years in Massachusetts. + +He told them how, in the first place, twelve of the converts of George +Fox, the first Quaker in the world, had come over from England. They +seemed to be impelled by an earnest love for the souls of men, and a +pure desire to make known what they considered a revelation from Heaven. +But the rulers looked upon them as plotting the downfall of all +government and religion. They were banished from the colony. In a little +while, however, not only the first twelve had returned, but a multitude +of other Quakers had come to rebuke the rulers, and to preach against +the priests and steeple-houses. + +Grandfather described the hatred and scorn with which these enthusiasts +were received. They were thrown into dungeons; they were beaten with +many stripes, women as well as men; they were driven forth into the +wilderness, and left to the tender mercies of wild beasts and Indians. +The children were amazed to hear, that, the more the Quakers were +scourged, and imprisoned, and banished, the more did the sect increase, +both by the influx of strangers, and by converts from among the +Puritans. But Grandfather told them, that God had put something into the +soul of man, which always turned the cruelties of the persecutor to +nought. + +He went on to relate, that, in 1659, two Quakers, named William Robinson +and Marmaduke Stephenson, were hanged at Boston. A woman had been +sentenced to die with them, but was reprieved, on condition of her +leaving the colony. Her name was Mary Dyer. In the year 1660 she +returned to Boston, although she knew death awaited her there; and, if +Grandfather had been correctly informed, an incident had then taken +place, which connects her with our story. This Mary Dyer had entered the +mint-master's dwelling, clothed in sackcloth and ashes, and seated +herself in our great chair, with a sort of dignity and state. Then she +proceeded to deliver what she called a message from Heaven; but in the +midst of it, they dragged her to prison. + +"And was she executed?" asked Laurence. + +"She was," said Grandfather. + +"Grandfather," cried Charley, clenching his fist, "I would have fought +for that poor Quaker woman!" + +"Ah! but if a sword had been drawn for her," said Laurence, "it would +have taken away all the beauty of her death." + +It seemed as if hardly any of the preceding stories had thrown such an +interest around Grandfather's chair, as did the fact, that the poor, +persecuted, wandering Quaker woman had rested in it for a moment. The +children were so much excited, that Grandfather found it necessary to +bring his account of the persecution to a close. + +"In 1660, the same year in which Mary Dyer was executed," said he, +"Charles the Second was restored to the throne of his fathers. This king +had many vices; but he would not permit blood to be shed, under pretence +of religion, in any part of his dominions. The Quakers in England told +him what had been done to their brethren in Massachusetts; and he sent +orders to Governor Endicott to forbear all such proceedings in future. +And so ended the Quaker persecution,--one of the most mournful passages +in the history of our forefathers." + +Grandfather then told his auditors, that, shortly after the above +incident, the great chair had been given by the mint-master to the Rev. +Mr. John Eliot. He was the first minister of Roxbury. But besides +attending to his pastoral duties there, he learned the language of the +red men, and often went into the woods to preach to them. So earnestly +did he labor for their conversion, that he has always been called the +apostle to the Indians. The mention of this holy man suggested to +Grandfather the propriety of giving a brief sketch of the history of the +Indians, so far as they were connected with the English colonists. + +A short period before the arrival of the first Pilgrims at Plymouth, +there had been a very grievous plague among the red men; and the sages +and ministers of that day were inclined to the opinion, that Providence +had sent this mortality, in order to make room for the settlement of the +English. But I know not why we should suppose that an Indian's life is +less precious, in the eye of Heaven, than that of a white man. Be that +as it may, death had certainly been very busy with the savage tribes. + +In many places the English found the wigwams deserted, and the +corn-fields growing to waste, with none to harvest the grain. There were +heaps of earth also, which, being dug open, proved to be Indian graves, +containing bows and flint-headed spears and arrows; for the Indians +buried the dead warrior's weapons along with him. In some spots, there +were skulls and other human bones, lying unburied. In 1633, and the year +afterwards, the smallpox broke out among the Massachusetts Indians, +multitudes of whom died by this terrible disease of the old world. These +misfortunes made them far less powerful than they had formerly been. + +For nearly half a century after the arrival of the English, the red men +showed themselves generally inclined to peace and amity. They often made +submission, when they might have made successful war. The Plymouth +settlers, led by the famous Captain Miles Standish, slew some of them in +1623, without any very evident necessity for so doing. In 1636, and the +following year, there was the most dreadful war that had yet occurred +between the Indians and the English. The Connecticut settlers, assisted +by a celebrated Indian chief, named Uncas, bore the brunt of this war, +with but little aid from Massachusetts. Many hundreds of the hostile +Indians were slain, or burnt in their wigwams. Sassacus, their sachem, +fled to another tribe, after his own people were defeated; but he was +murdered by them, and his head was sent to his English enemies. + +From that period, down to the time of King Philip's war, which will be +mentioned hereafter, there was not much trouble with the Indians. But +the colonists were always on their guard, and kept their weapons ready +for the conflict. + +"I have sometimes doubted," said Grandfather, when he had told these +things to the children, "I have sometimes doubted whether there was more +than a single man, among our forefathers, who realized that an Indian +possesses a mind and a heart, and an immortal soul. That single man was +John Eliot. All the rest of the early settlers seemed to think that the +Indians were an inferior race of beings, whom the Creator had merely +allowed to keep possession of this beautiful country, till the white men +should be in want of it. + +"Did the pious men of those days never try to make Christians of them?" +asked Laurence. + +"Sometimes, it is true," answered Grandfather, "the magistrates and +ministers would talk about civilizing and converting the red people. +But, at the bottom of their hearts, they would have had almost as much +expectation of civilizing a wild bear of the woods, and making him fit +for paradise. They felt no faith in the success of any such attempts, +because they had no love for the poor Indians. Now Eliot was full of +love for them, and therefore so full of faith and hope, that he spent +the labor of a lifetime in their behalf." + +"I would have conquered them first, and then converted them," said +Charley. + +"Ah, Charley, there spoke the very spirit of our forefathers!" replied +Grandfather. "But Mr. Eliot had a better spirit. He looked upon them as +his brethren. He persuaded as many of them as he could, to leave off +their idle and wandering habits, and to build houses, and cultivate the +earth, as the English did. He established schools among them, and taught +many of the Indians how to read. He taught them, likewise, how to pray. +Hence they were called 'praying Indians.' Finally, having spent the best +years of his life for their good, Mr. Eliot resolved to spend the +remainder in doing them a yet greater benefit." + +"I know what that was!" cried Laurence. + +"He sat down in his study," continued Grandfather, "and began a +translation of the Bible into the Indian tongue. It was while he was +engaged in this pious work, that the mint-master gave him our great +chair. His toil needed it, and deserved it." + +"O, Grandfather, tell us all about that Indian Bible!" exclaimed +Laurence. "I have seen it in the library of the Athenaeum; and the tears +came into my eyes, to think that there were no Indians left to read it." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + + +As Grandfather was a great admirer of the Apostle Eliot, he was glad to +comply with the earnest request which Laurence had made, at the close of +the last chapter. So he proceeded to describe how good Mr. Eliot +labored, while he was at work upon + + +THE INDIAN BIBLE + +My dear children, what a task would you think it, even with a long +lifetime before you, were you bidden to copy every chapter and verse, +and word, in yonder great family Bible! Would not this be a heavy toil? +But if the task were, not to write off the English Bible, but to learn a +language, utterly unlike all other tongues,--a language which hitherto +had never been learned, except by the Indians themselves, from their +mothers' lips,--a language never written, and the strange words of which +seemed inexpressible by letters;--if the task were, first, to learn this +new variety of speech, and then to translate the Bible into it, and to +do it so carefully, that not one idea throughout the holy book should be +changed,--what would induce you to undertake this toil? Yet this was +what the Apostle Eliot did. + +It was a mighty work for a man, now growing old, to take upon himself. +And what earthly reward could he expect from it? None; no reward on +earth. But he believed that the red men were the descendants of those +lost tribes of Israel of whom history has been able to tell us nothing, +for thousands of years. He hoped that God had sent the English across +the ocean, Gentiles as they were, to enlighten this benighted portion of +his once chosen race. And when he should be summoned hence, he trusted +to meet blessed spirits in another world, whose bliss would have been +earned by his patient toil, in translating the Word of God. This hope +and trust were far dearer to him, than any thing that earth could offer. + +Sometimes, while thus at work, he was visited by learned men, who +desired to know what literary undertaking Mr. Elliot had in hand. They, +like himself, had been bred in the studious cloisters of a university, +and were supposed to possess all the erudition which mankind has hoarded +up from age to age. Greek and Latin were as familiar to them as the +babble of their childhood. Hebrew was like their mother tongue. They had +grown gray in study; their eyes were bleared with poring over print and +manuscript by the light of the midnight lamp. + +And yet, how much had they left unlearned! Mr. Eliot would put into +their hands some of the pages, which he had been writing; and behold! +the gray-headed men stammered over the long, strange words, like a +little child in his first attempts to read. Then would the apostle call +to him an Indian boy, one of his scholars, and show him the manuscript, +which had so puzzled the learned Englishmen. + +"Read this, my child," said he, "these are some brethren of mine, who +would fain hear the sound of thy native tongue." + +Then would the Indian boy cast his eyes over the mysterious page, and +read it so skilfully, that it sounded like wild music. It seemed as if +the forest leaves were singing in the ears of his auditors, and as if +the roar of distant streams were poured through the young Indian's +voice. Such were the sounds amid which the language of the red man had +been formed; and they were still heard to echo in it. + +The lesson being over, Mr. Eliot would give the Indian boy an apple or a +cake, and bid him leap forth into the open air, which his free nature +loved. The apostle was kind to children, and even shared in their +sports, sometimes. And when his visitors had bidden him farewell, the +good man turned patiently to his toil again. + +No other Englishman had ever understood the Indian character so well, +nor possessed so great an influence over the New England tribes, as the +apostle did. His advice and assistance must often have been valuable to +his countrymen, in their transactions with the Indians. Occasionally, +perhaps, the governor and some of the counsellors came to visit Mr. +Eliot. Perchance they were seeking some method to circumvent the forest +people. They inquired, it may be, how they could obtain possession of +such and such a tract of their rich land. Or they talked of making the +Indians their servants, as if God had destined them for perpetual +bondage to the more powerful white man. + +Perhaps, too, some warlike captain, dressed in his buff-coat, with a +corslet beneath it, accompanied the governor and counsellors. Laying his +hand upon his sword hilt, he would declare, that the only method of +dealing with the red men was to meet them with the sword drawn, and the +musket presented. + +But the apostle resisted both the craft of the politician, and the +fierceness of the warrior. + +"Treat these sons of the forest as men and brethren," he would say, "and +let us endeavor to make them Christians. Their forefathers were of that +chosen race, whom God delivered from Egyptian bondage. Perchance he has +destined us to deliver the children from the more cruel bondage of +ignorance and idolatry. Chiefly for this end, it may be, we were +directed across the ocean." + +When these other visitors were gone, Mr. Eliot bent himself again over +the half written page. He dared hardly relax a moment from his toil. He +felt that, in the book which he was translating, there was a deep human, +as well as heavenly wisdom, which would of itself suffice to civilize +and refine the savage tribes. Let the Bible be diffused among them, and +all earthly good would follow. But how slight a consideration was this, +when he reflected that the eternal welfare of a whole race of men +depended upon his accomplishment of the task which he had set himself! +What if his hands should be palsied? What if his mind should lose its +vigor? What if death should come upon him, ere the work were done? Then +must the red man wander in the dark wilderness of heathenism for ever. + +Impelled by such thoughts as these, he sat writing in the great chair, +when the pleasant summer breeze came in through his open casement; and +also when the fire of forest logs sent up its blaze and smoke, through +the broad stone chimney, into the wintry air. Before the earliest bird +sang, in the morning, the apostle's lamp was kindled; and, at midnight, +his weary head was not yet upon its pillow. And at length, leaning back +in the great chair, he could say to himself, with a holy triumph,--"The +work is finished!" + +It was finished. Here was a Bible for the Indians. Those long lost +descendants of the ten tribes of Israel would now learn the history of +their forefathers. That grace, which the ancient Israelites had +forfeited, was offered anew to their children. + +There is no impiety in believing that, when his long life was over, the +apostle of the Indians was welcomed to the celestial abodes by the +prophets of ancient days, and by those earliest apostles and +evangelists, who had drawn their inspiration from the immediate presence +of the Saviour. They first had preached truth and salvation to the +world. And Eliot, separated from them by many centuries, yet full of the +same spirit, had borne the like message to the new world of the West. +Since the first days of Christianity, there has been no man more worthy +to be numbered in the brotherhood of the apostles, than Eliot. + + * * * * * + +"My heart is not satisfied to think," observed Laurence, "that Mr. +Eliot's labors have done no good, except to a few Indians of his own +time. Doubtless, he would not have regretted his toil, if it were the +means of saving but a single soul. But it is a grievous thing to me, +that he should have toiled so hard to translate the Bible, and now the +language and the people are gone! The Indian Bible itself is almost the +only relic of both." + +"Laurence," said his Grandfather, "if ever you should doubt that man is +capable of disinterested zeal for his brother's good, then remember how +the apostle Eliot toiled. And if you should feel your own self-interest +pressing upon your heart too closely, then think of Eliot's Indian +Bible. It is good for the world that such a man has lived, and left this +emblem of his life." + +The tears gushed into the eyes of Laurence, and he acknowledged that +Eliot had not toiled in vain. Little Alice put up her arms to +Grandfather, and drew down his white head beside her own golden locks. + +"Grandfather," whispered she, "I want to kiss good Mr. Eliot!" + +And, doubtless, good Mr. Eliot would gladly receive the kiss of so sweet +a child as little Alice, and would think it a portion of his reward in +heaven. + +Grandfather now observed, that Dr. Francis had written a very beautiful +Life of Eliot, which he advised Laurence to peruse. He then spoke of +King Philip's war, which began in 1675, and terminated with the death of +King Philip, in the following year. Philip was a proud, fierce Indian, +whom Mr. Eliot had vainly endeavored to convert to the Christian faith. + +"It must have been a great anguish to the apostle," continued +Grandfather, "to hear of mutual slaughter and outrage between his own +countrymen, and those for whom he felt the affection of a father. A few +of the praying Indians joined the followers of King Philip. A greater +number fought on the side of the English. In the course of the war, the +little community of red people whom Mr. Eliot had begun to civilize, was +scattered, and probably never was restored to a flourishing condition. +But his zeal did not grow cold; and only about five years before his +death he took great pains in preparing a new edition of the Indian +Bible." + +"I do wish Grandfather," cried Charley, "you would tell us all about the +battles in King Philip's war." + +"O, no!" exclaimed Clara. "Who wants to hear about tomahawks and +scalping knives!" + +"No, Charley," replied Grandfather, "I have no time to spare in talking +about battles. You must be content with knowing that it was the +bloodiest war that the Indians had ever waged against the white men; and +that, at its close, the English set King Philip's head upon a pole." + +"Who was the captain of the English?" asked Charley. + +"Their most noted captain was Benjamin Church,--a very famous warrior," +said Grandfather. "But I assure you, Charley, that neither Captain +Church, nor any of the officers and soldiers who fought in King Philip's +war, did any thing a thousandth part so glorious, as Mr. Eliot did, when +he translated the Bible for the Indians." + +"Let Laurence be the apostle," said Charley to himself, "and I will be +the captain." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +The children were now accustomed to assemble round Grandfather's chair, +at all their unoccupied moments; and often it was a striking picture to +behold the white-headed old sire, with this flowery wreath of young +people around him. When he talked to them, it was the past speaking to +the present,--or rather to the future, for the children were of a +generation which had not become actual. Their part in life, thus far, +was only to be happy, and to draw knowledge from a thousand sources. As +yet, it was not their time to do. + +Sometimes, as Grandfather gazed at their fair, unworldly countenances, a +mist of tears bedimmed his spectacles. He almost regretted that it was +necessary for them to know any thing of the past, or to provide aught +for the future. He could have wished that they might be always the +happy, youthful creatures, who had hitherto sported around his chair, +without inquiring whether it had a history. It grieved him to think that +his little Alice, who was a flower-bud fresh from paradise, must open +her leaves to the rough breezes of the world, or ever open them in any +clime. So sweet a child she was, that it seemed fit her infancy should +be immortal! + +But such repinings were merely flitting shadows across the old man's +heart. He had faith enough to believe, and wisdom enough to know, that +the bloom of the flower would be even holier and happier than its bud. +Even within himself,--though Grandfather was now at that period of life, +when the veil of mortality is apt to hang heavily over the soul,--still, +in his inmost being, he was conscious of something that he would not +have exchanged for the best happiness of childhood. It was a bliss to +which every sort of earthly experience,--all that he had enjoyed or +suffered, or seen, or heard, or acted, with the broodings of his soul +upon the whole,--had contributed somewhat. In the same manner must a +bliss, of which now they could have no conception, grow up within these +children, and form a part of their sustenance for immortality. + +So Grandfather, with renewed cheerfulness, continued his history of the +chair, trusting that a profounder wisdom than his own would extract, +from these flowers and weeds of Time, a fragrance that might last beyond +all time. + +At this period of the story, Grandfather threw a glance backward, as far +as the year 1660. He spoke of the ill-concealed reluctance with which +the Puritans in America had acknowledged the sway of Charles the Second, +on his restoration to his father's throne. When death had stricken +Oliver Cromwell, that mighty protector had no sincerer mourners than in +New England. The new king had been more than a year upon the throne +before his accession was proclaimed in Boston; although the neglect to +perform the ceremony might have subjected the rulers to the charge of +treason. + +During the reign of Charles the Second, however, the American colonies +had but little reason to complain of harsh or tyrannical treatment. But +when Charles died, in 1685, and was succeeded by his brother James, the +patriarchs of New England began to tremble. King James was a bigoted +Roman Catholic, and was known to be of an arbitrary temper. It was +feared by all Protestants, and chiefly by the Puritians, that he would +assume despotic power, and attempt to establish Popery throughout his +dominions. Our forefathers felt that they had no security either for +their religion or their liberties. + +The result proved that they had reason for their apprehensions. King +James caused the charters of all the American colonies to be taken away. +The old charter of Massachusetts, which the people regarded as a holy +thing, and as the foundation of all their liberties, was declared void. +The colonists were now no longer freemen; they were entirely dependent +on the king's pleasure. At first, in 1685, King James appointed Joseph +Dudley, a native of Massachusetts, to be president of New England. But +soon afterwards, Sir Edmund Andros, an officer of the English army, +arrived, with a commission to be governor-general of New England and New +York. + +The king had given such powers to Sir Edmund Andros, that there was now +no liberty, nor scarcely any law, in the colonies over which he ruled. +The inhabitants were not allowed to choose representatives, and +consequently had no voice whatever in the government, nor control over +the measures that were adopted. The counsellors, with whom the governor +consulted on matters of state, were appointed by himself. This sort of +government was no better than an absolute despotism. + +"The people suffered much wrong, while Sir Edmund Andros ruled over +them," continued Grandfather, "and they were apprehensive of much more. +He had brought some soldiers with him from England, who took possession +of the old fortress on Castle Island, and of the fortification on Fort +Hill. Sometimes it was rumored that a general massacre of the +inhabitants was to be perpetrated by these soldiers. There were reports, +too, that all the ministers were to be slain or imprisoned." + +"For what?" inquired Charley. + +"Because they were the leaders of the people, Charley," said +Grandfather. "A minister was a more formidable man than a general, in +those days. Well; while these things were going on in America, King +James had so misgoverned the people of England, that they sent over to +Holland for the Prince of Orange. He had married the king's daughter, +and was therefore considered to have a claim to the crown. On his +arrival in England, the Prince of Orange was proclaimed king, by the +name of William the Third. Poor old King James made his escape to +France." + +Grandfather told how, at the first intelligence of the landing of the +Prince of Orange in England, the people of Massachusetts rose in their +strength, and overthrew the government of Sir Edmund Andros. He, with +Joseph Dudley, Edmund Randolph, and his other principal adherents, were +thrown into prison. Old Simon Bradstreet, who had been governor, when +King James took away the charter, was called by the people to govern +them again. + +"Governor Bradstreet was a venerable old man, nearly ninety years of +age," said Grandfather. "He came over with the first settlers, and had +been the intimate companion of all those excellent and famous men who +laid the foundation of our country. They were all gone before him to the +grave; and Bradstreet was the last of the Puritans." + +Grandfather paused a moment, and smiled, as if he had something very +interesting to tell his auditors. He then proceeded: + +"And now, Laurence,--now, Clara,--now, Charley,--now, my dear little +Alice,--what chair do you think had been placed in the council chamber, +for old Governor Bradstreet to take his seat in? Would you believe that +it was this very chair in which grandfather now sits, and of which he is +telling you the history?" + +"I am glad to hear it, with all my heart!" cried Charley, after a shout +of delight. "I thought Grandfather had quite forgotten the chair." + +"It was a solemn and affecting sight," said Grandfather, "when this +venerable patriarch, with his white beard flowing down upon his breast, +took his seat in his Chair of State. Within his remembrance, and even +since his mature age, the site where now stood the populous town, had +been a wild and forest-covered peninsula. The province, now so fertile, +and spotted with thriving villages, had been a desert wilderness. He was +surrounded by a shouting multitude, most of whom had been born in the +country which he had helped to found. They were of one generation, and +he of another. As the old man looked upon them, and beheld new faces +everywhere, he must have felt that it was now time for him to go, +whither his brethren had gone before him." + +"Were the former governors all dead and gone?" asked Laurence. + +"All of them," replied Grandfather. "Winthrop had been dead forty years. +Endicott died, a very old man, in 1665. Sir Henry Vane was beheaded in +London, at the beginning of the reign of Charles the Second. And Haynes, +Dudley, Bellingham and Leverett, who had all been governors of +Massachusetts, were now likewise in their graves. Old Simon Bradstreet +was the sole representative of that departed brotherhood. There was no +other public man remaining to connect the ancient system of government +and manners with the new system, which was about to take its place. The +era of the Puritans was now completed." + +"I am sorry for it," observed Laurence; "for, though they were so stern, +yet it seems to me that there was something warm and real about them. I +think, Grandfather, that each of these old governors should have his +statue set up in our State House, sculptured out of the hardest of New +England granite." + +"It would not be amiss, Laurence," said Grandfather; "but perhaps clay, +or some other perishable material, might suffice for some of their +successors. But let us go back to our chair. It was occupied by Governor +Bradstreet from April, 1689, until May, 1692. Sir William Phips then +arrived in Boston, with a new charter from King William, and a +commission to be governor." + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + +"And what became of the chair," inquired Clara. + +"The outward aspect of our chair," replied Grandfather, "was now +somewhat the worse for its long and arduous services. It was considered +hardly magnificent enough to be allowed to keep its place in the council +chamber of Massachusetts. In fact, it was banished as an article of +useless lumber. But Sir William Phips happened to see it and being much +pleased with its construction, resolved to take the good old chair into +his private mansion. Accordingly, with his own gubernatorial hands, he +repaired one of its arms, which had been slightly damaged". + +"Why, Grandfather, here is the very arm!" interrupted Charley, in great +wonderment. "And did Sir William Phips put in these screws with his own +hands? I am sure, he did it beautifully! But how came a governor to know +how to mend a chair?" + +"I will tell you a story about the early life of Sir William Phips," +said Grandfather. "You will then perceive, that he well knew how to use +his hands." + +So Grandfather related the wonderful and true tale of + + +THE SUNKEN TREASURE. + +Picture to yourselves, my dear children, a handsome, old-fashioned room, +with a large, open cupboard at one end, in which is displayed a +magnificent gold cup, with some other splendid articles of gold and +silver plate. In another part of the room, opposite to a tall +looking-glass, stands our beloved chair, newly polished, and adorned +with a gorgeous cushion of crimson velvet tufted with gold. + +In the chair sits a man of strong and sturdy frame, whose face has been +roughened by northern tempests, and blackened by the burning sun of the +West Indies. He wears an immense periwig, flowing down over his +shoulders. His coat has a wide embroidery of golden foliage; and his +waistcoat, likewise, is all flowered over and bedizened with gold. His +red, rough hands, which have done many a good day's work with the hammer +and adze, are half covered by the delicate lace ruffles at his wrists. +On a table lies his silver-hilted sword, and in a corner of the room +stands his gold-headed cane, made of a beautifully polished West Indian +wood. + +Somewhat such an aspect as this, did Sir William Phips present, when he +sat in Grandfather's chair, after the king had appointed him governor of +Massachusetts. Truly, there was need that the old chair should be +varnished, and decorated with a crimson cushion, in order to make it +suitable for such a magnificent looking personage. + +But Sir William Phips had not always worn a gold embroidered coat, nor +always sat so much at his ease as he did in Grandfather's chair. He was +a poor man's son, and was born in the province of Maine, where he used +to tend sheep upon the hills, in his boyhood and youth. Until he had +grown to be a man, he did not even know how to read and write. Tired of +tending sheep, he next apprenticed himself to a ship-carpenter, and +spent about four years in hewing the crooked limbs of oak trees into +knees for vessels. + +In 1673, when he was twenty-two years old, he came to Boston, and soon +afterwards was married to a widow lady, who had property enough to set +him up in business. It was not long, however, before he lost all the +money that he had acquired by his marriage, and became a poor man again. +Still, he was not discouraged. He often told his wife that, some time or +other, he should be very rich, and would build a "fair brick house" in +the Green Lane of Boston. + +Do not suppose, children, that he had been to a fortune-teller to +inquire his destiny. It was his own energy and spirit of enterprise, and +his resolution to lead an industrious life, that made him look forward +with so much confidence to better days. + +Several years passed away; and William Phips had not yet gained the +riches which he promised to himself. During this time he had begun to +follow the sea for a living. In the year 1684, he happened to hear of a +Spanish ship, which had been cast away near the Bahama Islands, and +which was supposed to contain a great deal of gold and silver. Phips +went to the place in a small vessel, hoping that he should be able to +recover some of the treasure from the wreck. He did not succeed, +however, in fishing up gold and silver enough to pay the expenses of his +voyage. + +But, before he returned, he was told of another Spanish ship or galleon, +which had been cast away near Porto de la Plata. She had now lain as +much as fifty years beneath the waves. This old ship had been laden with +immense wealth; and, hitherto, nobody had thought of the possibility of +recovering any part of it from the deep sea, which was rolling and +tossing it about. But though it was now an old story, and the most aged +people had almost forgotten that such a vessel had been wrecked. William +Phips resolved that the sunken treasure should again be brought to +light. + +He went to London, and obtained admittance to King James, who had not +yet been driven from his throne. He told the king of the vast wealth +that was lying at the bottom of the sea. King James listened with +attention, and thought this a fine opportunity to fill his treasury with +Spanish gold. He appointed William Phips to be captain of a vessel, +called the Rose Algier, carrying eighteen guns and ninety-five men. So +now he was Captain Phips of the English navy. + +Captain Phips sailed from England in the Rose Algier, and cruised for +nearly two years in the West Indies, endeavoring to find the wreck of +the Spanish ship. But the sea is so wide and deep, that it is no easy +matter to discover the exact spot where a sunken vessel lies. The +prospect of success seemed very small; and most people would have +thought that Captain Phips was as far from having money enough to build +a "fair brick house," as he was while he tended sheep. + +The seamen of the Rose Algier became discouraged, and gave up all hope +of making their fortunes by discovering the Spanish wreck. They wanted +to compel Captain Phips to turn pirate. There was a much better +prospect, they thought, of growing rich by plundering vessels, which +still sailed the sea, than by seeking for a ship that had lain beneath +the waves full half a century. They broke out in open mutiny, but were +finally mastered by Phips, and compelled to obey his orders. It would +have been dangerous, however, to continue much longer at sea with such a +crew of mutinous sailors; and, besides, the Rose Algier was leaky and +unseaworthy. So Captain Phips judged it best to return to England. + +Before leaving the West Indies, he met with a Spaniard, an old man, who +remembered the wreck of the Spanish ship, and gave him directions how to +find the very spot. It was on a reef of rocks a few leagues from Porto +de la Plata. + +On his arrival in England, therefore, Captain Phips solicited the king +to let him have another vessel, and send him back again to the West +Indies. But King James, who had probably expected that the Rose Algier +would return laden with gold, refused to have any thing more to do with +the affair. Phips might never have been able to renew the search, if the +Duke of Albemarle, and some other noblemen had not lent their +assistance. They fitted out a ship and gave the command to Captain +Phips. He sailed from England, and arrived safely at Porto de la Plata, +where he took an adze and assisted his men to build a large boat. + +The boat was intended for the purpose of going closer to the reef of +rocks than a large vessel could safely venture. When it was finished, +the Captain sent several men in it, to examine the spot where the +Spanish ship was said to have been wrecked. They were accompanied by +some Indians, who were skilful divers, and could go down a great way +into the depths of the sea. + +The boat's crew proceeded to the reef of rocks, and rowed round and +round it, a great many times. They gazed down into the water, which was +so transparent that it seemed as if they could have seen the gold and +silver at the bottom, had there been any of those precious metals there. +Nothing, however, could they see; nothing more valuable than a curious +sea shrub, which was growing beneath the water, in a crevice of the +reef of rocks. It flaunted to and fro with the swell and reflux of the +waves, and looked as bright and beautiful as if its leaves were gold. + +"We won't go back empty-handed," cried an English sailor; and then he +spoke to one of the Indian divers. "Dive down and bring me that pretty +sea shrub there. That's the only treasure we shall find!" + +Down plunged the diver, and soon rose dripping from the water, holding +the sea shrub in his hand. But he had learnt some news at the bottom of +the sea. + +"There are some ship's guns," said he, the moment he had drawn breath, +"some great cannon among the rocks, near where the shrub was growing." + +No sooner had he spoken, than the English sailors knew that they had +found the very spot where the Spanish galleon had been wrecked so many +years before. The other Indian divers immediately plunged over the +boat's side, and swam headlong down, groping among the rocks and sunken +cannon. In a few moments one of them rose above the water, with a heavy +lump of silver in his arms. That single lump was worth more than a +thousand dollars. The sailors took it into the boat, and then rowed back +as speedily as they could, being in haste to inform Captain Phips of +their good luck. + +But, confidently as the Captain had hoped to find the Spanish wreck, +yet now that it was really found, the news seemed too good to be true. +He could not believe it till the sailors showed him the lump of silver. + +"Thanks be to God!" then cries Captain Phips. "We shall every man of us +make our fortunes!" + +Hereupon the Captain and all the crew set to work, with iron rakes and +great hooks and lines, fishing for gold and silver at the bottom of the +sea. Up came the treasure in abundance. Now they beheld a table of solid +silver, once the property of an old Spanish Grandee. Now they found a +sacramental vessel, which had been destined as a gift to some Catholic +church. Now they drew up a golden cup, fit for the king of Spain to +drink his wine out of. Perhaps the bony hand of its former owner had +been grasping the precious cup, and was drawn up along with it. Now +their rakes or fishing lines were loaded with masses of silver bullion. +There were also precious stones among the treasure, glittering and +sparkling, so that it is a wonder how their radiance could have been +concealed. + +There is something sad and terrible in the idea of snatching all this +wealth from the devouring ocean, which had possessed it for such a +length of years. It seems as if men had no right to make themselves rich +with it. It ought to have been left with the skeletons of the ancient +Spaniards, who had been drowned when the ship was wrecked, and whose +bones were now scattered among the gold and silver. + +But Captain Phips and his crew were troubled with no such thoughts as +these. After a day or two they lighted on another part of the wreck, +where they found a great many bags of silver dollars. But nobody could +have guessed that these were money-bags. By remaining so long in the +salt-water, they had become covered over with a crust which had the +appearance of stone, so that it was necessary to break them in pieces +with hammers and axes. When this was done, a stream of silver dollars +gushed out upon the deck of the vessel. + +The whole value of the recovered treasure, plate, bullion, precious +stones, and all, was estimated at more than two millions of dollars. It +was dangerous even to look at such a vast amount of wealth. A sea +captain, who had assisted Phips in the enterprise, utterly lost his +reason at the sight of it. He died two years afterwards, still raving +about the treasures that lie at the bottom of the sea. It would have +been better for this man, if he had left the skeletons of the +shipwrecked Spaniards in quiet possession of their wealth. + +Captain Phips and his men continued to fish up plate, bullion, and +dollars, as plentifully as ever, till their provisions grew short. Then, +as they could not feed upon gold and silver any more than old King Midas +could, they found it necessary to go in search of better sustenance. +Phips resolved to return to England. He arrived there in 1687, and was +received with great joy by the Duke of Albemarle and the other English +lords, who had fitted out the vessel. Well they might rejoice; for they +took by far the greater part of the treasure to themselves. + +The Captain's share, however, was enough to make him comfortable for the +rest of his days. It also enabled him to fulfil his promise to his wife, +by building a "fair brick house," in the Green Lane of Boston. The Duke +of Albemarle sent Mrs. Phips a magnificent gold cup, worth at least five +thousand dollars. Before Captain Phips left London, King James made him +a knight; so that, instead of the obscure ship-carpenter who had +formerly dwelt among them, the inhabitants of Boston welcomed him on his +return, as the rich and famous Sir William Phips. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + +"Sir William Phips," continued Grandfather, "was too active and +adventurous a man to sit still in the quiet enjoyment of his good +fortune. In the year 1690, he went on a military expedition against the +French colonies in America, conquered the whole province of Acadie, and +returned to Boston with a great deal of plunder." + +"Why, grandfather, he was the greatest man that ever sat in the chair!" +cried Charley. + +"Ask Laurence what he thinks," replied Grandfather with a smile. "Well; +in the same year, Sir William took command of an expedition against +Quebec, but did not succeed in capturing the city. In 1692, being then +in London, King William the Third appointed him governor of +Massachusetts. And now, my dear children, having followed Sir William +Phips through all his adventures and hardships, till we find him +comfortably seated in Grandfather's chair, we will here bid him +farewell. May he be as happy in ruling a people, as he was while he +tended sheep!" + +Charley, whose fancy had been greatly taken by the adventurous +disposition of Sir William Phips, was eager to know how he had acted, +and what happened to him while he held the office of governor. But +Grandfather had made up his mind to tell no more stories for the +present. + +"Possibly, one of these days, I may go on with the adventures of the +chair," said he. "But its history becomes very obscure just at this +point; and I must search into some old books and manuscripts, before +proceeding further. Besides, it is now a good time to pause in our +narrative; because the new charter, which Sir William Phips brought over +from England, formed a very important epoch in the history of the +province." + +"Really, Grandfather," observed Laurence, "this seems to be the most +remarkable chair in the world. Its history cannot be told without +intertwining it with the lives of distinguished men, and the great +events that have befallen the country." + +"True, Laurence," replied Grandfather, smiling, "We must write a book, +with some such title as this,--MEMOIRS OF MY OWN TIMES, BY GRANDFATHER'S +CHAIR." + +"That would be beautiful!" exclaimed Laurence, clapping his hands. + +"But, after all," continued Grandfather, "any other old chair, if it +possessed memory, and a hand to write its recollections, could record +stranger stories than any that I have told you. From generation to +generation, a chair sits familiarly in the midst of human interests, and +is witness to the most secret and confidential intercourse, that mortal +man can hold with his fellow. The human heart may best be read in the +fireside chair. And as to external events, Grief and Joy keep a +continual vicissitude around it and within it. Now we see the glad face +and glowing form of Joy, sitting merrily in the old chair, and throwing +a warm fire-light radiance over all the household. Now, while we thought +not of it, the dark clad mourner, Grief, has stolen into the place of +Joy, but not to retain it long. The imagination can hardly grasp so wide +a subject, as is embraced in the experience of a family chair." + +"It makes my breath flutter,--my heart thrill,--to think of it," said +Laurence. "Yes; a family chair must have a deeper history than a Chair +of State." + +"O, yes!" cried Clara, expressing a woman's feeling on the point in +question, "The history of a country is not nearly so interesting as that +of a single family would be." + +"But the history of a country is more easily told," said Grandfather. +"So, if we proceed with our narrative of the chair, I shall still +confine myself to its connection with public events." + +Good old Grandfather now rose and quitted the room, while the children +remained gazing at the chair. Laurence, so vivid was his conception of +past times, would hardly have deemed it strange, if its former +occupants, one after another, had resumed the seat which they had each +left vacant, such a dim length of years ago. + +First, the gentle and lovely lady Arbella would have been seen in the +old chair, almost sinking out of its arms, for very weakness; then Roger +Williams, in his cloak and band, earnest, energetic, and benevolent; +then the figure of Anne Hutchinson, with the like gesture as when she +presided at the assemblages of women; then the dark, intellectual face +of Vane, "young in years, but in sage counsel old." Next would have +appeared the successive governors, Winthrop, Dudley, Bellingham, and +Endicott, who sat in the chair, while it was a Chair of State. Then its +ample seat would have been pressed by the comfortable, rotund +corporation of the honest mint-master. Then the half-frenzied shape of +Mary Dyer, the persecuted Quaker woman, clad in sackcloth and ashes, +would have rested in it for a moment. Then the holy apostolic form of +Eliot would have sanctified it. Then would have arisen, like the shade +of departed Puritanism, the venerable dignity of the white-bearded +Governor Bradstreet. Lastly, on the gorgeous crimson cushion of +Grandfather's chair, would have shone the purple and golden magnificence +of Sir William Phips. + +But, all these, with the other historic personages, in the midst of whom +the chair had so often stood, had passed, both in substance and shadow, +from the scene of ages. Yet here stood the chair, with the old Lincoln +coat of arms, and the oaken flowers and foliage, and the fierce lion's +head at the summit, the whole, apparently, in as perfect preservation as +when it had first been placed in the Earl of Lincoln's Hall. And what +vast changes of society and of nations had been wrought by sudden +convulsions or by slow degrees, since that era! + +"This chair has stood firm when the thrones of kings were overturned!" +thought Laurence. "Its oaken frame has proved stronger than many frames +of government!" + +More the thoughtful and imaginative boy might have mused; but now a +large yellow cat, a great favorite with all the children, leaped in at +the open window. Perceiving that Grandfather's chair was empty, and +having often before experienced its comforts, puss laid herself quietly +down upon the cushion. Laurence, Clara, Charley, and little Alice, all +laughed at the idea of such a successor to the worthies of old times. + +"Pussy," said little Alice, putting out her hand, into which the cat +laid a velvet paw, "you look very wise. Do tell us a story about +GRANDFATHER'S CHAIR!" + + + + +PART II. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +"O Grandfather," dear Grandfather, cried little Alice, "pray tell us +some more stories about your chair!" + +How long a time had fled, since the children had felt any curiosity to +hear the sequel of this venerable chair's adventures! Summer was now +past and gone, and the better part of Autumn likewise. Dreary, chill +November was howling, out of doors, and vexing the atmosphere with +sudden showers of wintry rain, or sometimes with gusts of snow, that +rattled like small pebbles against the windows. + +When the weather began to grow cool, Grandfather's chair had been +removed from the summer parlor into a smaller and snugger room. It now +stood by the side of a bright blazing wood-fire. Grandfather loved a +wood-fire, far better than a grate of glowing anthracite, or than the +dull heat of an invisible furnace, which seems to think that it has done +its duty in merely warming the house. But the wood-fire is a kindly, +cheerful, sociable spirit, sympathizing with mankind, and knowing that +to create warmth is but one of the good offices which are expected from +it. Therefore it dances on the hearth, and laughs broadly through the +room, and plays a thousand antics, and throws a joyous glow over all the +faces that encircle it. + +In the twilight of the evening, the fire grew brighter and more +cheerful. And thus, perhaps, there was something in Grandfather's heart, +that cheered him most with its warmth and comfort in the gathering +twilight of old age. He had been gazing at the red embers, as intently +as if his past life were all pictured there, or as if it were a prospect +of the future world, when little Alice's voice aroused him. + +"Dear Grandfather," repeated the little girl, more earnestly, "do talk +to us again about your chair." + +Laurence, and Clara, and Charley, and little Alice, had been attracted +to other objects, for two or three months past. They had sported in the +gladsome sunshine of the present, and so had forgotten the shadowy +region of the past, in the midst of which stood Grandfather's chair. But +now, in the autumnal twilight, illuminated by the flickering blaze of +the wood-fire, they looked at the old chair and thought that it had +never before worn such an interesting aspect. There it stood, in the +venerable majesty of more than two hundred years. The light from the +hearth quivered upon the flowers and foliage, that were wrought into its +oaken back; and the lion's head at the summit seemed almost to move its +jaws and shake its mane. + +"Does little Alice speak for all of you?" asked Grandfather. "Do you +wish me to go on with the adventures of the chair?" + +"Oh, yes, yes, Grandfather!" cried Clara. "The dear old chair! How +strange that we should have forgotten it so long!" + +"Oh, pray begin, Grandfather," said Laurence; "for I think, when we talk +about old times, it should be in the early evening before the candles +are lighted. The shapes of the famous persons, who once sat in the +chair, will be more apt to come back, and be seen among us, in this +glimmer and pleasant gloom, than they would in the vulgar daylight. And, +besides, we can make pictures of all that you tell us, among the glowing +embers and white ashes." + +Our friend Charley, too, thought the evening the best time to hear +Grandfather's stories, because he could not then be playing out of +doors. So, finding his young auditors unanimous in their petition, the +good old gentleman took up the narrative of the historic chair, at the +point where he had dropt it. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +"You recollect, my dear children," said Grandfather, "that we took leave +of the chair in 1692, while it was occupied by Sir William Phips. This +fortunate treasure-seeker, you will remember, had come over from +England, with King William's commission to be Governor of Massachusetts. +Within the limits of this province were now included the old colony of +Plymouth, and the territories of Maine and Nova Scotia. Sir William +Phips had likewise brought a new charter from the king, which served +instead of a constitution, and set forth the method in which the +province was to be governed." + +"Did the new charter allow the people all their former liberties?" +inquired Laurence. + +"No," replied Grandfather. "Under the first charter, the people had been +the source of all power. Winthrop, Endicott, Bradstreet, and the rest of +them, had been governors by the choice of the people, without any +interference of the king. But henceforth the governor was to hold his +station solely by the king's appointment, and during his pleasure; and +the same was the case with the lieutenant-governor, and some other high +officers. The people, however, were still allowed to choose +representatives; and the governor's council was chosen by the general +court." + +"Would the inhabitants have elected Sir William Phips," asked Laurence, +"if the choice of governor had been left to them?" + +"He might probably have been a successful candidate," answered +Grandfather; "for his adventures and military enterprises had gained him +a sort of renown, which always goes a great way with the people. And he +had many popular characteristics, being a kind, warm-hearted man, not +ashamed of his low origin, nor haughty in his present elevation. Soon +after his arrival, he proved that he did not blush to recognize his +former associates." + +"How was that?" inquired Charley. + +"He made a grand festival at his new brick house," said Grandfather, +"and invited all the ship-carpenters of Boston to be his guests. At the +head of the table, in our great chair, sat Sir William Phips himself, +treating these hard handed men as his brethren, cracking jokes with +them, and talking familiarly about old times. I know not whether he wore +his embroidered dress, but I rather choose to imagine that he had on a +suit of rough clothes, such as he used to labor in, while he was Phips +the ship-carpenter." + +"An aristocrat need not be ashamed of the trade," observed Laurence; +"for the czar Peter the Great once served an apprenticeship to it." + +"Did Sir William Phips make as good a governor as he was a +ship-carpenter?" asked Charley. + +"History says but little about his merits as a ship-carpenter," +answered Grandfather; "but, as a governor, a great deal of fault was +found with him. Almost as soon as he assumed the government, he became +engaged in a very frightful business, which might have perplexed a wiser +and better cultivated head than his. This was the witchcraft delusion." + +And here Grandfather gave his auditors such details of this melancholy +affair, as he thought it fit for them to know. They shuddered to hear +that a frenzy, which led to the death of many innocent persons, had +originated in the wicked arts of a few children. They belonged to the +Rev. Mr. Parris, minister of Salem. These children complained of being +pinched, and pricked with pins, and otherwise tormented by the shapes of +men and women, who were supposed to have power to haunt them invisibly, +both in darkness and daylight. Often, in the midst of their family and +friends, the children would pretend to be seized with strange +convulsions, and would cry out that the witches were afflicting them. + +These stories spread abroad, and caused great tumult and alarm. From the +foundation of New England, it had been the custom of the inhabitants, in +all matters of doubt and difficulty, to look to their ministers for +council. So they did now; but, unfortunately, the ministers and wise men +were more deluded than the illiterate people. Cotton Mather, a very +learned and eminent clergyman, believed that the whole country was full +of witches and wizards, who had given up their hopes of heaven, and +signed a covenant with the Evil One. + +Nobody could be certain that his nearest neighbor, or most intimate +friend, was not guilty of this imaginary crime. The number of those who +pretended to be afflicted by witchcraft, grew daily more numerous; and +they bore testimony against many of the best and worthiest people. A +minister, named George Burroughs, was among the accused. In the months +of August and September, 1692, he, and nineteen other innocent men and +women, were put to death. The place of execution was a high hill, on the +outskirts of Salem; so that many of the sufferers, as they stood beneath +the gallows, could discern their own habitations in the town. + +The martyrdom of these guiltless persons seemed only to increase the +madness. The afflicted now grew bolder in their accusations. Many people +of rank and wealth were either thrown into prison, or compelled to flee +for their lives. Among these were two sons of old Simon Bradstreet, the +last of the Puritan governors. Mr. Willard, a pious minister of Boston, +was cried out upon as a wizard, in open court. Mrs. Hale, the wife of +the minister of Beverly, was likewise accused. Philip English, a rich +merchant of Salem, found it necessary to take flight, leaving his +property and business in confusion. But a short time afterwards, the +Salem people were glad to invite him back. + +"The boldest thing that the accusers did," continued Grandfather, "was +to cry out against the governor's own beloved wife. Yes; the lady of Sir +William Phips was accused of being a witch, and of flying through the +air to attend witch meetings. When the governor heard this, he probably +trembled, so that our great chair shook beneath him." + +"Dear Grandfather," cried little Alice, clinging closer to his knee, "is +it true that witches ever come in the night-time to frighten little +children?" + +"No, no, dear little Alice," replied Grandfather. "Even if there were +any witches, they would flee away from the presence of a pure-hearted +child. But there are none; and our forefathers soon became convinced, +that they had been led into a terrible delusion. All the prisoners on +account of witchcraft were set free. But the innocent dead could not be +restored to life; and the hill where they were executed, will always +remind people of the saddest and most humiliating passage in our +history." + +Grandfather then said, that the next remarkable event, while Sir William +Phips remained in the chair, was the arrival at Boston of an English +fleet, in 1693. It brought an army, which was intended for the conquest +of Canada. But a malignant disease, more fatal than the small-pox, broke +out among the soldiers and sailors, and destroyed the greater part of +them. The infection spread into the town of Boston, and made much havoc +there. This dreadful sickness caused the governor, and Sir Francis +Wheeler, who was commander of the British forces, to give up all +thoughts of attacking Canada. + +"Soon after this," said Grandfather, "Sir William Phips quarrelled with +the captain of an English frigate, and also with the Collector of +Boston. Being a man of violent temper, he gave each of them a sound +beating with his cane." + +"He was a bold fellow," observed Charley, who was himself somewhat +addicted to a similar mode of settling disputes. + +"More bold than wise," replied Grandfather; "for complaints were carried +to the king, and Sir William Phips was summoned to England, to make the +best answer he could. Accordingly he went to London, where, in 1695, he +was seized with a malignant fever, of which he died. Had he lived +longer, he would probably have gone again in search of sunken treasure. +He had heard of a Spanish ship, which was cast away in 1502, during the +lifetime of Columbus. Bovadilla, Roldan, and many other Spaniards, were +lost in her, together with the immense wealth of which they had robbed +the South American kings." + +"Why, Grandfather," exclaimed Laurence, "what magnificent ideas the +governor had! Only think of recovering all that old treasure, which had +lain almost two centuries under the sea! Me thinks Sir William Phips +ought to have been buried in the ocean, when he died; so that he might +have gone down among the sunken ships, and cargoes of treasure, which he +was always dreaming about in his lifetime." + +"He was buried in one of the crowded cemeteries of London," said +Grandfather. "As he left no children, his estate was inherited by his +nephew, from whom is descended the present Marquis of Normandy. The +noble Marquis is not aware, perhaps, that the prosperity of his family +originated in the successful enterprise of a New England ship +carpenter." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +"At the death of Sir William Phips," proceeded Grandfather, "our chair +was bequeathed to Mr. Ezekiel Cheever, a famous school-master in Boston. +This old gentleman came from London in 1637, and had been teaching +school ever since; so that there were now aged men, grandfathers like +myself, to whom Master Cheever had taught their alphabet. He was a +person of venerable aspect, and wore a long white beard. + +"Was the chair placed in his school?" asked Charley. + +"Yes, in his school," answered Grandfather; "and we may safely say that +it had never before been regarded with such awful reverence--no, not +even when the old governors of Massachusetts sat in it. Even you, +Charley, my boy, would have felt some respect for the chair, if you had +seen it occupied by this famous school-master." + +And here Grandfather endeavored to give his auditors an idea how matters +were managed in schools above a hundred years ago. As this will probably +be an interesting subject to our readers, we shall make a separate +sketch of it, and call it + + +THE OLD-FASHIONED SCHOOL. + +Now imagine yourselves, my children, in Master Ezekiel Cheever's +school-room. It is a large, dingy room, with a sanded floor, and is +lighted by windows that turn on hinges, and have little diamond shaped +panes of glass. The scholars sit on long benches, with desks before +them. At one end of the room is a great fire-place, so very spacious, +that there is room enough for three or four boys to stand in each of the +chimney corners. This was the good old fashion of fire-places, when +there was wood enough in the forests to keep people warm, without their +digging into the bowels of the earth for coal. + +It is a winter's day when we take our peep into the school-room. See +what great logs of wood have been rolled into the fire-place, and what a +broad, bright blaze goes leaping up the chimney! And every few moments, +a vast cloud of smoke is puffed into the room, which sails slowly over +the heads of the scholars, until it gradually settles upon the walls and +ceiling. They are blackened with the smoke of many years already. + +[Illustration] + +Next, look at our old historic chair! It is placed, you perceive, in the +most comfortable part of the room, where the generous glow of the fire +is sufficiently felt, without being too intensely hot. How stately the +old chair looks, as if it remembered its many famous occupants, but yet +were conscious that a greater man is sitting in it now! Do you see the +venerable school-master, severe in aspect, with a black scull-cap on his +head, like an ancient Puritan, and the snow of his white beard drifting +down to his very girdle? What boy would dare to play, or whisper, or +even glance aside from his book, while Master Cheever is on the +look-out, behind his spectacles! For such offenders, if any such there +be, a rod of birch is hanging over the fire-place, and a heavy ferule +lies on the master's desk. + +And now school is begun. What a murmur of multitudinous tongues, like +the whispering leaves of a wind-stirred oak, as the scholars con over +their various tasks! Buz, buz, buz! Amid just such a murmur has Master +Cheever spent above sixty years: and long habit has made it as pleasant +to him as the hum of a bee-hive, when the insects are busy in the +sunshine. + +Now a class in Latin is called to recite. Forth steps a row of +queer-looking little fellows, wearing square-skirted coats, and small +clothes, with buttons at the knee. They look like so many grandfathers +in their second childhood. These lads are to be sent to Cambridge, and +educated for the learned professions. Old Master Cheever has lived so +long, and seen so many generations of school-boys grow up to be men, +that now he can almost prophesy what sort of a man each boy will be. One +urchin shall hereafter be a doctor, and administer pills and potions, +and stalk gravely through life, perfumed with assafoetida. Another +shall wrangle at the bar, and fight his way to wealth and honors, and in +his declining age, shall be a worshipful member of his Majesty's +council. A third--and he is the Master's favorite--shall be a worthy +successor to the old Puritan ministers, now in their graves; he shall +preach with great unction and effect, and leave volumes of sermons, in +print and manuscript, for the benefit of future generations. + +But, as they are merely school-boys now, their business is to construe +Virgil. Poor Virgil, whose verses, which he took so much pains to +polish, have been mis-scanned, and mis-parsed, and mis-interpreted, by +so many generations of idle school-boys! There, sit down, ye Latinists. +Two or three of you, I fear, are doomed to feel the master's ferule. + +Next comes a class in Arithmetic. These boys are to be the merchants, +shop-keepers, and mechanics, of a future period. Hitherto, they have +traded only in marbles and apples. Hereafter, some will send vessels to +England for broadcloths and all sorts of manufactured wares, and to the +West Indies for sugar, and rum, and coffee. Others will stand behind +counters, and measure tape, and ribbon, and cambric, by the yard. Others +will upheave the blacksmith's hammer, or drive the plane over the +carpenter's bench, or take the lapstone and the awl, and learn the trade +of shoe-making. Many will follow the sea, and become bold, rough +sea-captains. + +This class of boys, in short, must supply the world with those active, +skilful hands, and clear, sagacious heads, without which the affairs of +life would be thrown into confusion, by the theories of studious and +visionary men. Wherefore, teach them their multiplication table, good +Master Cheever, and whip them well, when they deserve it; for much of +the country's welfare depends on these boys! + +But, alas! while we have been thinking of other matters, Master +Cheever's watchful eye has caught two boys at play. Now we shall see +awful times! The two malefactors are summoned before the master's chair, +wherein he sits, with the terror of a judge upon his brow. Our old chair +is now a judgment-seat. Ah, Master Cheever has taken down that terrible +birch-rod! Short is the trial--the sentence quickly passed--and now the +judge prepares to execute it in person. Thwack! thwack! thwack! In those +good old times, a school-master's blows were well laid on. + +See! the birch-rod has lost several of its twigs, and will hardly serve +for another execution. Mercy on us, what a bellowing the urchins make! +My ears are almost deafened, though the clamor comes through the far +length of a hundred and fifty years. There, go to your seats, poor boys; +and do not cry, sweet little Alice; for they have ceased to feel the +pain, a long time since. + +And thus the forenoon passes away. Now it is twelve o'clock. The master +looks at his great silver watch, and then with tiresome deliberation, +puts the ferule into his desk. The little multitude await the word of +dismissal, with almost irrepressible impatience. + +"You are dismissed," says Master Cheever. + +The boys retire, treading softly until they have passed the threshold; +but, fairly out of the school-room, lo, what a joyous shout!--what a +scampering and trampling of feet!--what a sense of recovered freedom, +expressed in the merry uproar of all their voices! What care they for +the ferule and birch-rod now? Were boys created merely to study Latin +and Arithmetic? No; the better purposes of their being are to sport, to +leap, to run, to shout, to slide upon the ice, to snow-ball! + +Happy boys! Enjoy your play-time now, and come again to study, and to +feel the birch-rod and the ferule, to-morrow; not till to-morrow, for +to-day is Thursday-lecture; and ever since the settlement of +Massachusetts, there has been no school on Thursday afternoons. +Therefore, sport, boys, while you may; for the morrow cometh, with the +birch-rod and the ferule; and after that, another Morrow, with troubles +of its own. + +Now the master has set every thing to rights, and is ready to go home to +dinner. Yet he goes reluctantly. The old man has spent so much of his +life in the smoky, noisy, buzzing school-room, that, when he has a +holiday, he feels as if his place were lost, and himself a stranger in +the world. But, forth he goes; and there stands our old chair, vacant +and solitary, till good Master Cheever resumes his seat in it to-morrow +morning. + + * * * * * + +"Grandfather," said Charley, "I wonder whether the boys did not use to +upset the old chair, when the school-master was out?" + +"There is a tradition," replied Grandfather, "that one of its arms was +dislocated, in some such manner. But I cannot believe that any +school-boy would behave so naughtily." + +As it was now later than little Alice's usual bedtime, Grandfather broke +off his narrative, promising to talk more about Master Cheever and his +scholars, some other evening. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +Accordingly the next evening, Grandfather resumed the history of his +beloved chair. + +"Master Ezekiel Cheever," said he, "died in 1707, after having taught +school about seventy years. It would require a pretty good scholar in +arithmetic to tell how many stripes he had inflicted, and how many +birch-rods he had worn out, during all that time, in his fatherly +tenderness for his pupils. Almost all the great men of that period, and +for many years back, had been whipt into eminence by Master Cheever. +Moreover, he had written a Latin Accidence, which was used in schools +more than half a century after his death; so that the good old man, even +in his grave, was still the cause of trouble and stripes to idle +school-boys." + +Grandfather proceeded to say, that, when Master Cheever died, he +bequeathed the chair to the most learned man that was educated at his +school, or that had ever been born in America. This was the renowned +Cotton Mather, minister of the Old North Church in Boston. + +"And author of the Magnalia, Grandfather, which we sometimes see you +reading," said Laurence. + +"Yes, Laurence," replied Grandfather. "The Magnalia is a strange, +pedantic history, in which true events and real personages move before +the reader, with the dreamy aspect which they wore in Cotton Mather's +singular mind. This huge volume, however, was written and published +before our chair came into his possession. But, as he was the author of +more books than there are days in the year, we may conclude that he +wrote a great deal, while sitting in this chair." + +"I am tired of these school-masters and learned men," said Charley. "I +wish some stirring man, that knew how to do something in the world, like +Sir William Phips, would set in the chair." + +"Such men seldom have leisure to sit quietly in a chair," said +Grandfather. "We must make the best of such people as we have." + +As Cotton Mather was a very distinguished man, Grandfather took some +pains to give the children a lively conception of his character. Over +the door of his library were painted these words--BE SHORT--as a warning +to visitors that they must not do the world so much harm, as needlessly +to interrupt this great man's wonderful labors. On entering the room you +would probably behold it crowded, and piled, and heaped with books. +There were huge, ponderous folios and quartos, and little duodecimos, in +English, Latin, Greek, Hebrew, Chaldaic, and all other languages, that +either originated at the confusion of Babel, or have since come into +use. + +All these books, no doubt, were tossed about in confusion, thus forming +a visible emblem of the manner in which their contents were crowded +into Cotton Mather's brain. And in the middle of the room stood a table, +on which, besides printed volumes, were strewn manuscript sermons, +historical tracts, and political pamphlets, all written in such a queer, +blind, crabbed, fantastical hand, that a writing-master would have gone +raving mad at the sight of them. By this table stood Grandfather's +chair, which seemed already to have contracted an air of deep erudition, +as if its cushion were stuffed with Latin, Greek, and Hebrew, and other +hard matters. + +In this chair, from one year's end to another, sat that prodigious +book-worm, Cotton Mather, sometimes devouring a great book, and +sometimes scribbling one as big. In Grandfather's younger days, there +used to be a wax figure of him in one of the Boston museums, +representing a solemn, dark-visaged person, in a minister's black gown, +and with a black-letter volume before him. + +"It is difficult, my children," observed Grandfather, "to make you +understand such a character as Cotton Mather's, in whom there was so +much good, and yet so many failings and frailties. Undoubtedly, he was a +pious man. Often he kept fasts; and once, for three whole days, he +allowed himself not a morsel of food, but spent the time in prayer and +religious meditation. Many a live-long night did he watch and pray. +These fasts and vigils made him meagre and haggard, and probably caused +him to appear as if he hardly belonged to the world." + +"Was not the witchcraft delusion partly caused by Cotton Mather?" +inquired Laurence. + +"He was the chief agent of the mischief," answered Grandfather; "but we +will not suppose that he acted otherwise than conscientiously. He +believed that there were evil spirits all about the world. Doubtless he +imagined that they were hidden in the corners and crevices of his +library, and that they peeped out from among the leaves of many of his +books, as he turned them over, at midnight. He supposed that these +unlovely demons were everywhere, in the sunshine as well as in the +darkness, and that they were hidden in men's hearts, and stole into +their most secret thoughts." + +Here Grandfather was interrupted by little Alice, who hid her face in +his lap, and murmured a wish that he would not talk any more about +Cotton Mather and the evil spirits. Grandfather kissed her, and told her +that angels were the only spirits whom she had any thing to do with. He +then spoke of the public affairs of the period. + +A new war between France and England had broken out in 1702, and had +been raging ever since. In the course of it, New England suffered much +injury from the French and Indians, who often came through the woods +from Canada, and assaulted the frontier towns. Villages were sometimes +burnt, and the inhabitants slaughtered, within a day's ride of Boston. +The people of New England had a bitter hatred against the French, not +only for the mischief which they did with their own hands, but because +they incited the Indians to hostility. + +The New Englanders knew that they could never dwell in security, until +the provinces of France should be subdued, and brought under the English +government. They frequently, in time of war, undertook military +expeditions against Acadia and Canada, and sometimes besieged the +fortresses, by which those territories were defended. But the most +earnest wish of their hearts was, to take Quebec, and so get possession +of the whole province of Canada. Sir William Phips had once attempted +it, but without success. + +Fleets and soldiers were often sent from England, to assist the +colonists in their warlike undertakings. In 1710, Port Royal, a fortress +of Acadia, was taken by the English. The next year, in the month of +June, a fleet, commanded by Admiral Sir Hovenden Walker, arrived in +Boston Harbor. On board of this fleet was the English General Hill, with +seven regiments of soldiers, who had been fighting under the Duke of +Marlborough, in Flanders. The government of Massachusetts was called +upon to find provisions for the army and fleet, and to raise more men to +assist in taking Canada. + +What with recruiting and drilling of soldiers, there was now nothing but +warlike bustle in the streets of Boston. The drum and fife, the rattle +of arms, and the shouts of boys, were heard from morning till night. In +about a month, the fleet set sail, carrying four regiments from New +England and New York, besides the English soldiers. The whole army +amounted to at least seven thousand men. They steered for the mouth of +the river St. Lawrence. + +"Cotton Mather prayed most fervently for their success," continued +Grandfather, "both in his pulpit, and when he kneeled down in the +solitude of his library, resting his face on our old chair. But +Providence ordered the result otherwise. In a few weeks, tidings were +received, that eight or nine of the vessels had been wrecked in the St. +Lawrence, and that above a thousand drowned soldiers had been washed +ashore, on the banks of that mighty river. After this misfortune, Sir +Hovenden Walker set sail for England; and many pious people began to +think it a sin, even to wish for the conquest of Canada." + +"I would never give it up so," cried Charley. + +"Nor did they, as we shall see," replied Grandfather. "However, no more +attempts were made during this war, which came to a close in 1713. The +people of New England were probably glad of some repose; for their young +men had been made soldiers, till many of them were fit for nothing else. +And those, who remained at home, had been heavily taxed to pay for the +arms, ammunition, fortifications, and all the other endless expenses of +a war. There was great need of the prayers of Cotton Mather, and of all +pious men, not only on account of the sufferings of the people, but +because the old moral and religious character of New England was in +danger of being utterly lost." + +"How glorious it would have been," remarked Laurence, "if our +forefathers could have kept the country unspotted with blood." + +"Yes," said Grandfather; "but there was a stern warlike spirit in them, +from the beginning. They seem never to have thought of questioning +either the morality or piety of war." + +The next event, which Grandfather spoke of, was one that Cotton Mather, +as well as most of the other inhabitants of New England, heartily +rejoiced at. This was the accession of the Elector of Hanover to the +throne of England, in 1714, on the death of Queen Anne. Hitherto, the +people had been in continual dread that the male line of the Stuarts, +who were descended from the beheaded King Charles and the banished King +James, would be restored to the throne. In that case, as the Stuart +family were Roman Catholics, it was supposed that they would attempt to +establish their own religion throughout the British dominions. But the +Elector of Hanover, and all his race, were Protestants; so that now the +descendants of the old Puritans were relieved from many fears and +disquietudes. + +"The importance of this event," observed Grandfather, "was a thousand +times greater than that of a Presidential Election, in our own days. If +the people dislike their president, they may get rid of him in four +years; whereas, a dynasty of kings may wear the crown for an unlimited +period." + +The German elector was proclaimed king from the balcony of the +town-house, in Boston, by the title of George the First, while the +trumpets sounded, and the people cried Amen. That night, the town was +illuminated; and Cotton Mather threw aside book and pen, and left +Grandfather's chair vacant, while he walked hither and thither to +witness the rejoicings. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +"Cotton Mather," continued Grandfather, "was a bitter enemy to Governor +Dudley; and nobody exulted more than he, when that crafty politician was +removed from the government, and succeeded by Colonel Shute. This took +place in 1716. The new governor had been an officer in the renowned Duke +of Marlborough's army, and had fought in some of the great battles in +Flanders." + +"Now, I hope," said Charley, "we shall hear of his doing great things." + +"I am afraid you will be disappointed, Charley," answered Grandfather. +"It is true, that Colonel Shute had probably never led so unquiet a life +while fighting the French, as he did now, while governing this province +of Massachusetts Bay. But his troubles consisted almost entirely of +dissensions with the legislature. The king had ordered him to lay claim +to a fixed salary; but the representatives of the people insisted upon +paying him only such sums, from year to year, as they saw fit." + +Grandfather here explained some of the circumstances, that made the +situation of a colonial governor so difficult and irksome. There was not +the same feeling towards the chief magistrate, now, that had existed, +while he was chosen by the free suffrages of the people. It was felt, +that, as the king appointed the governor, and as he held his office +during the king's pleasure, it would be his great object to please the +king. But the people thought, that a governor ought to have nothing in +view, but the best interests of those whom he governed. + +"The governor," remarked Grandfather, "had two masters to serve--the +king, who appointed him, and the people, on whom he depended for his +pay. Few men, in this position, would have ingenuity enough to satisfy +either party. Colonel Shute, though a good-natured, well-meaning man, +succeeded so ill with the people, that in 1722, he suddenly went away to +England, and made complaint to King George. In the mean time, +Lieutenant-Governor Dummer directed the affairs of the province, and +carried on a long and bloody war with the Indians." + +"But where was our chair, all this time?" asked Clara. + +"It still remained in Cotton Mather's library," replied Grandfather; +"and I must not omit to tell you an incident, which is very much to the +honor of this celebrated man. It is the more proper, too, that you +should hear it, because it will show you what a terrible calamity the +small pox was to our forefathers. The history of the province, (and, of +course, the history of our chair,) would be incomplete, without +particular mention of it." Accordingly, Grandfather told the children a +story, to which, for want of a better title, we shall give that of + + +THE REJECTED BLESSING. + +One day, in 1721, Doctor Cotton Mather sat in his library, reading a +book that had been published by the Royal Society of London. But, every +few moments, he laid the book upon the table, and leaned back in +Grandfather's chair, with an aspect of deep care and disquietude. There +were certain things which troubled him exceedingly, so that he could +hardly fix his thoughts upon what he read. + +It was now a gloomy time in Boston. That terrible disease, the small +pox, had recently made its appearance in the town. Ever since the first +settlement of the country, this awful pestilence had come, at intervals, +and swept away multitudes of the inhabitants. Whenever it commenced its +ravages, nothing seemed to stay its progress, until there were no more +victims for it to seize upon. Oftentimes, hundreds of people, at once, +lay groaning with its agony; and when it departed, its deep footsteps +were always to be traced in many graves. + +The people never felt secure from this calamity. Sometimes, perhaps, it +was brought into the country by a poor sailor, who had caught the +infection in foreign parts, and came hither to die, and to be the cause +of many deaths. Sometimes, no doubt, it followed in the train of the +pompous governors, when they came over from England. Sometimes, the +disease lay hidden in the cargoes of ships, among silks and brocades, +and other costly merchandise, which was imported for the rich people to +wear. And, sometimes, it started up, seemingly of its own accord; and +nobody could tell whence it came. The physician, being called to attend +the sick person, would look at him, and say,--"It is the small pox! let +the patient be carried to the hospital." + +And now, this dreadful sickness had shown itself again in Boston. Cotton +Mather was greatly afflicted, for the sake of the whole province. He had +children, too, who were exposed to the danger. At that very moment, he +heard the voice of his youngest son, for whom his heart was moved with +apprehension. + +"Alas! I fear for that poor child," said Cotton Mather to himself. "What +shall I do for my son Samuel?" + +Again, he attempted to drive away these thoughts, by taking up the book +which he had been reading. And now, all of a sudden, his attention +became fixed. The book contained a printed letter that an Italian +physician had written upon the very subject, about which Cotton Mather +was so anxiously meditating. He ran his eye eagerly over the pages; and, +behold! a method was disclosed to him, by which the small pox might be +robbed of its worst terrors. Such a method was known in Greece. The +physicians of Turkey, too, those long-bearded Eastern sages, had been +acquainted with it for many years. The negroes of Africa, ignorant as +they were, had likewise practised it, and thus had shown themselves +wiser than the white men. + +"Of a truth," ejaculated Cotton Mather, clasping his hands and looking +up to Heaven, "it was a merciful Providence that brought this book under +mine eye! I will procure a consultation of physicians, and see whether +this wondrous Inoculation may not stay the progress of the Destroyer." + +So he arose from Grandfather's chair, and went out of the library. Near +the door he met his son Samuel, who seemed downcast and out of spirits. +The boy had heard, probably, that some of his playmates were taken ill +with the small pox. But, as his father looked cheerfully at him, Samuel +took courage, trusting that either the wisdom of so learned a minister +would find some remedy for the danger, or else that his prayers would +secure protection from on high. + +Meanwhile, Cotton Mather took his staff and three-cornered hat, and +walked about the streets, calling at the houses of all the physicians in +Boston. They were a very wise fraternity; and their huge wigs, and black +dresses, and solemn visages, made their wisdom appear even profounder +than it was. One after another, he acquainted them with the discovery +which he had hit upon. + +But these grave and sagacious personages would scarcely listen to him. +The oldest doctor in town contented himself with remarking, that no such +thing as inoculation was mentioned by Galen or Hippocrates, and it was +impossible that modern physicians should be wiser than those old sages. +A second held up his hands in dumb astonishment and horror, at the +madness of what Cotton Mather proposed to do. A third told him, in +pretty plain terms, that he knew not what he was talking about. A fourth +requested, in the name of the whole medical fraternity, that Cotton +Mather would confine his attention to people's souls, and leave the +physicians to take care of their bodies. + +In short, there was but a single doctor among them all, who would grant +the poor minister so much as a patient hearing. This was Doctor Zabdiel +Boylston. He looked into the matter like a man of sense, and finding, +beyond a doubt, that inoculation had rescued many from death, he +resolved to try the experiment in his own family. + +And so he did. But, when the other physicians heard of it, they arose in +great fury, and began a war of words, written, printed, and spoken, +against Cotton Mather and Doctor Boylston. To hear them talk, you would +have supposed that these two harmless and benevolent men had plotted the +ruin of the country. + +The people, also, took the alarm. Many, who thought themselves more +pious than their neighbors, contended, that, if Providence had ordained +them to die of the small pox, it was sinful to aim at preventing it. +The strangest reports were in circulation. Some said, that Doctor +Boylston had contrived a method for conveying the gout, rheumatism, sick +headache, asthma, and all other diseases, from one person to another, +and diffusing them through the whole community. Others flatly affirmed +that the Evil One had got possession of Cotton Mather, and was at the +bottom of the whole business. + +You must observe, children, that Cotton Mather's fellow citizens were +generally inclined to doubt the wisdom of any measure, which he might +propose to them. They recollected how he had led them astray in the old +witchcraft delusion; and now, if he thought and acted ever so wisely, it +was difficult for him to get the credit of it. + +The people's wrath grew so hot at his attempt to guard them from the +small pox, that he could not walk the streets in peace. Whenever the +venerable form of the old minister, meagre and haggard with fasts and +vigils, was seen approaching, hisses were heard, and shouts of derision, +and scornful and bitter laughter. The women snatched away their children +from his path, lest he should do them a mischief. Still, however, +bending his head meekly, and perhaps stretching out his hands to bless +those who reviled him, he pursued his way. But the tears came into his +eyes, to think how blindly the people rejected the means of safety, that +were offered them. + +Indeed, there were melancholy sights enough in the streets of Boston, to +draw forth the tears of a compassionate man. Over the door of almost +every dwelling, a red flag was fluttering in the air. This was the +signal that the small pox had entered the house, and attacked some +member of the family; or perhaps the whole family, old and young, were +struggling at once with the pestilence. Friends and relatives, when they +met one another in the streets, would hurry onward without a grasp of +the hand, or scarcely a word of greeting, lest they should catch or +communicate the contagion. And, often a coffin was borne hastily along. + +"Alas, alas!" said Cotton Mather to himself. "What shall be done for +this poor, misguided people? Oh, that Providence would open their eyes, +and enable them to discern good from evil!" + +So furious, however, were the people, that they threatened vengeance +against any person who should dare to practise inoculation, though it +were only in his own family. This was a hard case for Cotton Mather, who +saw no other way to rescue his poor child Samuel from the disease. But +he resolved to save him, even if his house should be burnt over his +head. + +"I will not be turned aside," said he. "My townsmen shall see that I +have faith in this thing, when I make the experiment on my beloved son, +whose life is dearer to me than my own. And when I have saved Samuel, +peradventure they will be persuaded to save themselves." + +Accordingly, Samuel was inoculated; and so was Mr. Walter, a son-in-law +of Cotton Mather. Doctor Boylston, likewise, inoculated many persons; +and while hundreds died, who had caught the contagion from the garments +of the sick, almost all were preserved, who followed the wise +physician's advice. + +But the people were not yet convinced of their mistake. One night, a +destructive little instrument, called a hand-grenade, was thrown into +Cotton Mather's window, and rolled under Grandfather's chair. It was +supposed to be filled with gunpowder, the explosion of which would have +blown the poor minister to atoms. But the best-informed historians are +of opinion, that the grenade contained only brimstone and assafoetida, +and was meant to plague Cotton Mather with a very evil perfume. + +This is no strange thing in human experience. Men, who attempt to do the +world more good, than the world is able entirely to comprehend, are +almost invariably held in bad odor. But yet, if the wise and good man +can wait awhile, either the present generation or posterity, will do him +justice. So it proved, in the case which we have been speaking of. In +after years, when inoculation was universally practised, and thousands +were saved from death by it, the people remembered old Cotton Mather, +then sleeping in his grave. They acknowledged that the very thing, for +which they had so reviled and persecuted him, was the best and wisest +thing he ever did. + + * * * * * + +"Grandfather, this is not an agreeable story," observed Clara. + +"No, Clara," replied Grandfather. "But it is right that you should know +what a dark shadow this disease threw over the times of our forefathers. +And now, if you wish to learn more about Cotton Mather, you must read +his biography, written by Mr. Peabody, of Springfield. You will find it +very entertaining and instructive; but perhaps the writer is somewhat +too harsh in his judgment of this singular man. He estimates him fairly, +indeed, and understands him well; but he unriddles his character rather +by acuteness than by sympathy. Now, his life should have been written by +one, who, knowing all his faults, would nevertheless love him." + +So Grandfather made an end of Cotton Mather, telling his auditors that +he died in 1728, at the age of sixty-five, and bequeathed the chair to +Elisha Cooke. This gentleman was a famous advocate of the people's +rights. + +The same year, William Burnet, a son of the celebrated Bishop Burnet, +arrived in Boston, with the commission of governor. He was the first +that had been appointed since the departure of Colonel Shute. Governor +Burnet took up his residence with Mr. Cooke, while the Province House +was undergoing repairs. During this period, he was always complimented +with a seat in Grandfather's chair; and so comfortable did he find it, +that on removing to the Province House, he could not bear to leave it +behind him. Mr. Cooke, therefore, requested his acceptance of it. + +"I should think," said Laurence, "that the people would have petitioned +the king always to appoint a native-born New Englander to govern them." + +"Undoubtedly it was a grievance," answered Grandfather, "to see men +placed in this station, who perhaps had neither talents nor virtues to +fit them for it, and who certainly could have no natural affection for +the country. The king generally bestowed the governorships of the +American colonies upon needy noblemen, or hangers-on at court, or +disbanded officers. The people knew that such persons would be very +likely to make the good of the country subservient to the wishes of the +king. The legislature, therefore, endeavored to keep as much power as +possible in their own hands, by refusing to settle a fixed salary upon +the governors. It was thought better to pay them according to their +deserts." + +"Did Governor Burnet work well for his money?" asked Charley. + +Grandfather could not help smiling at the simplicity of Charley's +question. Nevertheless, it put the matter in a very plain point of +view. + +He then described the character of Governor Burnet, representing him as +a good scholar, possessed of much ability, and likewise of unspotted +integrity. His story affords a striking example, how unfortunate it is +for a man, who is placed as ruler over a country, to be compelled to aim +at any thing but the good of the people. Governor Burnet was so chained +down by his instructions from the king, that he could not act as he +might otherwise have wished. Consequently, his whole term of office was +wasted in quarrels with the legislature. + +"I am afraid, children," said Grandfather, "that Governor Burnet found +but little rest or comfort in our old chair. Here he used to sit, +dressed in a coat which was made of rough, shaggy cloth outside, but of +smooth velvet within. It was said that his own character resembled that +coat, for his outward manner was rough, but his inward disposition soft +and kind. It is a pity that such a man could not have been kept free +from trouble. But so harassing were his disputes with the +representatives of the people, that he fell into a fever, of which he +died, in 1720. The legislature had refused him a salary, while alive; +but they appropriated money enough to give him a splendid and pompous +funeral." + +And now Grandfather perceived that little Alice had fallen fast asleep, +with her head upon his footstool. Indeed, as Clara observed, she had +been sleeping from the time of Sir Hovenden Walker's expedition against +Quebec, until the death of Governor Burnet--a period of about eighteen +years. And yet, after so long a nap, sweet little Alice was a +golden-haired child, of scarcely five years old. + +"It puts me in mind," said Laurence, "of the story of the enchanted +princess, who slept many a hundred years, and awoke as young and +beautiful as ever." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +A few evenings afterwards, cousin Clara happened to inquire of +Grandfather, whether the old chair had never been present at a ball. At +the same time, little Alice brought forward a doll, with whom she had +been holding a long conversation. + +"See, Grandfather," cried she. "Did such a pretty lady as this ever sit +in your great chair?" + +These questions led Grandfather to talk about the fashions and manners, +which now began to be introduced from England into the provinces. The +simplicity of the good old Puritan times was fast disappearing. This was +partly owing to the increasing number and wealth of the inhabitants, and +to the additions which they continually received, by the arrival and +settlement of people from beyond the sea. + +Another cause of a pompous and artificial mode of life, among those who +could afford it, was, that the example was set by the royal governors. +Under the old charter, the governors were the representatives of the +people, and therefore their way of living had probably been marked by a +popular simplicity. But now, as they represented the person of the king, +they thought it necessary to preserve the dignity of their station, by +the practice of high and gorgeous ceremonials. And, besides, the +profitable offices under the government were filled by men who had lived +in London, and had there contracted fashionable and luxurious habits of +living, which they would not now lay aside. The wealthy people of the +province imitated them; and thus began a general change in social life. + +"So, my dear Clara," said Grandfather, "after our chair had entered the +Province House, it must often have been present at balls and festivals, +though I cannot give you a description of any particular one. But I +doubt not that they were very magnificent; and slaves in gorgeous +liveries waited on the guests, and offered them wine in goblets of +massive silver." + +"Were there slaves in those days?" exclaimed Clara. + +"Yes; black slaves and white," replied Grandfather. "Our ancestors not +only bought negroes from Africa, but Indians from South America, and +white people from Ireland. These last were sold, not for life, but for a +certain number of years, in order to pay the expenses of their voyage +across the Atlantic. Nothing was more common than to see a lot of likely +Irish girls, advertised for sale in the newspapers. As for the little +negro babies, they were offered to be given away, like young kittens." + +"Perhaps Alice would have liked one to play with, instead of her doll," +said Charley, laughing. + +But little Alice clasped the waxen doll closer to her bosom. + +"Now, as for this pretty doll, my little Alice," said Grandfather, "I +wish you could have seen what splendid dresses the ladies wore in those +times. They had silks, and satins, and damasks, and brocades, and high +head-dresses, and all sorts of fine things. And they used to wear +hooped-petticoats, of such enormous size that it was quite a journey to +walk round them." + +"And how did the gentlemen dress?" asked Charley. + +"With full as much magnificence as the ladies," answered Grandfather. +"For their holiday suits, they had coats of figured velvet, crimson, +green, blue, and all other gay colors, embroidered with gold or silver +lace. Their waistcoats, which were five times as large as modern ones, +were very splendid. Sometimes, the whole waistcoat, which came down +almost to the knees, was made of gold brocade." + +"Why, the wearer must have shone like a golden image!" said Clara. + +"And, then," continued Grandfather, "they wore various sorts of +periwigs, such as the Tie, the Spencer, the Brigadier, the Major, the +Albemarle, the Ramilies, the Feather-top, and the Full-bottom! Their +three-cornered hats were laced with gold or silver. They had shining +buckles at the knees of their small clothes, and buckles likewise in +their shoes. They wore swords, with beautiful hilts, either of silver, +or sometimes of polished steel, inlaid with gold." + +"Oh, I should like to wear a sword!" cried Charley. + +"And an embroidered crimson velvet coat," said Clara, laughing, "and a +gold brocade waistcoat down to your knees!" + +"And knee-buckles and shoe-buckles," said Laurence, laughing also. + +"And a periwig," added little Alice, soberly, not knowing what was the +article of dress, which she recommended to our friend Charley. + +Grandfather smiled at the idea of Charley's sturdy little figure in such +a grotesque caparison. He then went on with the history of the chair, +and told the children, that, in 1730, King George the Second appointed +Jonathan Belcher to be governor of Massachusetts, in place of the +deceased Governor Burnet. Mr. Belcher was a native of the province, but +had spent much of his life in Europe. + +The new governor found Grandfather's chair in the Province House, he was +struck with its noble and stately aspect, but was of opinion, that age +and hard services had made it scarcely so fit for courtly company, as +when it stood in the Earl of Lincoln's hall. Wherefore, as Governor +Belcher was fond of splendor, he employed a skilful artist to beautify +the chair. This was done by polishing and varnishing it, and by gilding +the carved work of the elbows, and likewise the oaken flowers of the +back. The lion's head now shone like a veritable lump of gold. Finally, +Governor Belcher gave the chair a cushion of blue damask, with a rich +golden fringe. + +"Our good old chair being thus glorified," proceeded Grandfather, "it +glittered with a great deal more splendor than it had exhibited just a +century before, when the Lady Arbella brought it over from England. Most +people mistook it for a chair of the latest London fashion. And this may +serve for an example, that there is almost always an old and time-worn +substance under all the glittering show of new invention." + +"Grandfather, I cannot see any of the gilding," remarked Charley, who +had been examining the chair very minutely. + +"You will not wonder that it has been rubbed off," replied Grandfather, +"when you hear all the adventures that have since befallen the chair. +Gilded it was; and the handsomest room in the Province House was adorned +by it." + +There was not much to interest the children, in what happened during the +years that Governor Belcher remained in the chair. At first, like +Colonel Shute and Governor Burnet, he was engaged in disputing with the +legislature about his salary. But, as he found it impossible to get a +fixed sum, he finally obtained the king's leave to accept whatever the +legislature chose to give him. And thus the people triumphed, after this +long contest for the privilege of expending their own money as they saw +fit. + +The remainder of Governor Belcher's term of office was principally taken +up in endeavoring to settle the currency. Honest John Hull's pine-tree +shillings had long ago been worn out, or lost, or melted down again, and +their place was supplied by bills of paper or parchment, which were +nominally valued at three pence and upwards. The value of these bills +kept continually sinking, because the real hard money could not be +obtained for them. They were a great deal worse than the old Indian +currency of clam-shells. These disorders of the circulating medium were +a source of endless plague and perplexity to the rulers and legislators, +not only in Governor Belcher's days, but for many years before and +afterwards. + +Finally, the people suspected that Governor Belcher was secretly +endeavoring to establish the Episcopal mode of worship in the provinces. +There was enough of the old Puritan spirit remaining, to cause most of +the true sons of New England to look with horror upon such an attempt. +Great exertions were made, to induce the king to remove the governor. +Accordingly, in 1740, he was compelled to resign his office, and +Grandfather's chair into the bargain, to Mr. Shirley. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + + +"William Shirley," said Grandfather, "had come from England a few years +before, and begun to practise law in Boston. You will think, perhaps, +that, as he had been a lawyer, the new governor used to sit in our great +chair, reading heavy law-books from morning till night. On the contrary, +he was as stirring and active a governor as Massachusetts ever had. Even +Sir William Phips hardly equalled him. The first year or two of his +administration was spent in trying to regulate the currency. But, in +1744, after a peace of more than thirty years, war broke out between +France and England." + +"And I suppose," said Charley, "the governor went to take Canada." + +"Not exactly, Charley," said Grandfather, "though you have made a pretty +shrewd conjecture. He planned, in 1745, an expedition against +Louisbourg. This was a fortified city, on the Island of Cape Breton, +near Nova Scotia. Its walls were of immense height and strength, and +were defended by hundreds of heavy cannon. It was the strongest fortress +which the French possessed in America; and if the king of France had +guessed Governor Shirley's intentions, he would have sent all the ships +he could muster, to protect it." + +As the siege of Louisbourg was one of the most remarkable events that +ever the inhabitants of New England were engaged in, Grandfather +endeavored to give his auditors a lively idea of the spirit with which +they set about it. We shall call his description + + +THE PROVINCIAL MUSTER. + +The expedition against Louisbourg first began to be thought of in the +month of January. From that time, the governor's chair was continually +surrounded by counsellors, representatives, clergymen, captains, pilots, +and all manner of people, with whom he consulted about this wonderful +project. + +First of all, it was necessary to provide men and arms. The legislature +immediately sent out a huge quantity of paper money, with which, as if +by magic spell, the governor hoped to get possession of all the old +cannon, powder and balls, rusty swords and muskets, and every thing else +that would be serviceable in killing Frenchmen. Drums were beaten in all +the villages of Massachusetts, to enlist soldiers for the service. +Messages were sent to the other governors of New England, and to New +York and Pennsylvania, entreating them to unite in this crusade against +the French. All these provinces agreed to give what assistance they +could. + +But there was one very important thing to be decided. Who shall be the +General of this great army? Peace had continued such an unusual length +of time, that there was now less military experience among the +colonists, than at any former period. The old Puritans had always kept +their weapons bright, and were never destitute of warlike captains, who +were skilful in assault or defence. But the swords of their descendants +had grown rusty by disuse. There was nobody in New England that knew any +thing about sieges, or any other regular fighting. The only persons, at +all acquainted with warlike business, were a few elderly men, who had +hunted Indians through the underbrush of the forest, in old Governor +Dummer's war. + +In this dilemma, Governor Shirley fixed upon a wealthy merchant, named +William Pepperell, who was pretty well known and liked among the people. +As to military skill, he had no more of it than his neighbors. But, as +the governor urged him very pressingly, Mr. Pepperell consented to shut +up his leger, gird on a sword, and assume the title of General. + +Meantime, what a hubbub was raised by this scheme! Rub-a-dub-dub! +Rub-a-dub-dub! The rattle of drums, beaten out of all manner of time, +was heard above every other sound. + +Nothing now was so valuable as arms, of whatever style and fashion they +might be. The bellows blew, and the hammer clanged continually upon the +anvil, while the blacksmiths were repairing the broken weapons of other +wars. Doubtless, some of the soldiers lugged out those enormous, heavy +muskets, which used to be fired with rests, in the time of the early +Puritans. Great horse-pistols, too, were found, which would go off with +a bang like a cannon. Old cannon, with touch-holes almost as big as +their muzzles, were looked upon as inestimable treasures. Pikes, which +perhaps, had been handled by Miles Standish's soldiers, now made their +appearance again. Many a young man ransacked the garret, and brought +forth his great-grandfather's sword, corroded with rust, and stained +with the blood of King Philip's war. + +Never had there been seen such an arming as this, when a people, so long +peaceful, rose to the war, with the best weapons that they could lay +their hands upon. And still the drums were heard--Rub-a-dub-dub! +Rub-a-dub-dub!--in all the towns and villages; and louder and more +numerous grew the trampling footsteps of the recruits that marched +behind. + +And now the army began to gather into Boston. Tall, lanky, awkward, +fellows, came in squads, and companies, and regiments, swaggering along, +dressed in their brown homespun clothes and blue yarn stockings. They +stooped, as if they still had hold of the plough-handles, and marched +without any time or tune. Hither they came, from the corn-fields, from +the clearing in the forest, from the blacksmith's forge, from the +carpenter's workshop, and from the shoemaker's seat. They were an army +of rough faces and sturdy frames. A trained officer of Europe would have +laughed at them, till his sides had ached. But there was a spirit in +their bosoms, which is more essential to soldiership than to wear red +coats, and march in stately ranks to the sound of regular music. + +Still was heard the beat of the drum--rub-a-dub-dub!--and now a host of +three or four thousand men had found their way to Boston. Little quiet +was there then! Forth scampered the school-boys, shouting behind the +drums. The whole town--the whole land--was on fire with war. + +After the arrival of the troops, they were probably reviewed upon the +Common. We may imagine Governor Shirley and General Pepperell riding +slowly along the line, while the drummers beat strange old tunes, like +psalm-tunes, and all the officers and soldiers put on their most warlike +looks. It would have been a terrible sight for the Frenchmen, could they +but have witnessed it! + +At length, on the twenty-fourth of March, 1745, the army gave a parting +shout, and set sail from Boston in ten or twelve vessels, which had been +hired by the governor. A few days afterwards, an English fleet, +commanded by Commodore Peter Warren, sailed also for Louisbourg, to +assist the provincial army. So, now, after all this bustle of +preparation, the town and province were left in stillness and repose. + +But, stillness and repose, at such a time of anxious expectation, are +hard to bear. The hearts of the old people and women sunk within them, +when they reflected what perils they had sent their sons, and husbands, +and brothers, to encounter. The boys loitered heavily to school, missing +the rub-a-dub-dub, and the trampling march, in the rear of which they +had so lately run and shouted. All the ministers prayed earnestly, in +their pulpits, for a blessing on the army of New England. In every +family, when the good man lifted up his heart in domestic worship, the +burthen of his petition was for the safety of those dear ones, who were +fighting under the walls of Louisbourg. + +Governor Shirley, all this time, was probably in an ecstasy of +impatience. He could not sit still a moment. He found no quiet, not even +in Grandfather's chair, but hurried to-and-fro, and up and down the +staircase of the Province House. Now, he mounted to the cupola, and +looked sea-ward, straining his eyes to discover if there were a sail +upon the horizon. Now, he hastened down the stairs, and stood beneath +the portal, on the red freestone steps, to receive some mud-bespattered +courtier, from whom he hoped to hear tidings of the army. + +A few weeks after the departure of the troops, Commodore Warren sent a +small vessel to Boston, with two French prisoners. One of them was +Monsieur Bouladrie, who had been commander of a battery, outside of the +walls of Louisbourg. The other was the Marquis de la Maison Forte, +captain of a French frigate, which had been taken by Commodore Warren's +fleet. These prisoners assured Governor Shirley, that the fortifications +of Louisbourg were far too strong ever to be stormed by the provincial +army. + +Day after day, and week after week, went on. The people grew almost +heart-sick with anxiety; for the flower of the country was at peril in +this adventurous expedition. It was now day-break, on the morning of the +third of July. + +But, hark! what sound is this? The hurried clang of a bell! There is the +Old North, pealing suddenly out!--there, the Old South strikes in!--now, +the peal comes from the church in Brattle street!--the bells of nine or +ten steeples are all flinging their iron voices, at once, upon the +morning breeze! Is it joy or alarm? There goes the roar of a cannon, +too! A royal salute is thundered forth. And, now, we hear the loud +exulting shout of a multitude, assembled in the street. Huzza, Huzza! +Louisbourg has surrendered! Huzza! + + * * * * * + +"O Grandfather, how glad I should have been to live in those times!" +cried Charley. "And what reward did the king give to General Pepperell +and Governor Shirley?" + +"He made Pepperell a baronet; so that he was now to be called Sir +William Pepperell," replied Grandfather. "He likewise appointed both +Pepperell and Shirley to be colonels in the royal army. These rewards, +and higher ones, were well deserved; for this was the greatest triumph +that the English met with, in the whole course of that war. General +Pepperell became a man of great fame. I have seen a full length portrait +of him, representing him in a splendid scarlet uniform, standing before +the walls of Louisbourg, while several bombs are falling through the +air." + +"But, did the country gain any real good by the conquest of Louisbourg?" +asked Laurence. "Or was all the benefit reaped by Pepperell and +Shirley?" + +"The English Parliament," said Grandfather, "agreed to pay the colonists +for all the expenses of the siege. Accordingly, in 1749, two hundred and +fifteen chests of Spanish dollars, and one hundred casks of copper coin, +were brought from England to Boston. The whole amount was about a +million of dollars. Twenty-seven carts and trucks carried this money +from the wharf to the provincial treasury. Was not this a pretty liberal +reward?" + +"The mothers of the young men, who were killed at the siege of +Louisbourg, would not have thought it so," said Laurence. + +"No, Laurence," rejoined Grandfather; "and every warlike achievement +involves an amount of physical and moral evil, for which all the gold in +the Spanish mines would not be the slightest recompense. But, we are to +consider that this siege was one of the occasions, on which the +colonists tested their ability for war, and thus were prepared for the +great contest of the Revolution. In that point of view, the valor of our +forefathers was its own reward." + +Grandfather went on to say, that the success of the expedition against +Louisbourg, induced Shirley and Pepperell to form a scheme for +conquering Canada. This plan, however, was not carried into execution. + +In the year 1746, great terror was excited by the arrival of a +formidable French fleet upon the coast. It was commanded by the Duke +d'Anville, and consisted of forty ships of war, besides vessels with +soldiers on board. With this force, the French intended to retake +Louisbourg, and afterwards to ravage the whole of New England. Many +people were ready to give up the country for lost. + +But the hostile fleet met with so many disasters and losses, by storm +and shipwreck, that the Duke d'Anville is said to have poisoned himself +in despair. The officer next in command threw himself upon his sword and +perished. Thus deprived of their commanders, the remainder of the ships +returned to France. This was as great a deliverance for New England, as +that which old England had experienced in the days of Queen Elizabeth, +when the Spanish Armada was wrecked upon her coast. + +"In 1747," proceeded Grandfather, "Governor Shirley was driven from the +Province House, not by a hostile fleet and army, but by a mob of the +Boston people. They were so incensed at the conduct of the British +Commodore Knowles, who had impressed some of their fellow-citizens, that +several thousands of them surrounded the council-chamber, and threw +stones and brick-bats into the windows. The governor attempted to pacify +them; but, not succeeding, he thought it necessary to leave the town, +and take refuge within the walls of Castle William. Quiet was not +restored, until Commodore Knowles had sent back the impressed men. This +affair was a flash of spirit, that might have warned the English not to +venture upon any oppressive measures against their colonial brethren." + +Peace being declared between France and England in 1748, the governor +had now an opportunity to sit at his ease in Grandfather's chair. Such +repose, however, appears not to have suited his disposition; for, in the +following year, he went to England, and thence was dispatched to France, +on public business. Meanwhile, as Shirley had not resigned his office, +Lieutenant-Governor Phips acted as chief magistrate in his stead. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +In the early twilight of Thanksgiving eve, came Laurence, and Clara, and +Charley, and little Alice, hand in hand, and stood in a semi-circle +round Grandfather's chair. They had been joyous, throughout that day of +festivity, mingling together in all kinds of play, so that the house had +echoed with their airy mirth. + +Grandfather, too, had been happy, though not mirthful. He felt that this +was to be set down as one of the good Thanksgivings of his life. In +truth, all his former Thanksgivings had borne their part in the present +one; for, his years of infancy, and youth, and manhood with their +blessings and their griefs, had flitted before him, while he sat +silently in the great chair. Vanished scenes had been pictured in the +air. The forms of departed friends had visited him. Voices, to be heard +no more on earth, had sent an echo from the infinite and the eternal. +These shadows, if such they were, seemed almost as real to him, as what +was actually present--as the merry shouts and laughter of the +children--as their figures, dancing like sunshine before his eyes. + +He felt that the past was not taken from him. The happiness of former +days was a possession forever. And there was something in the mingled +sorrow of his lifetime, that became akin to happiness, after being long +treasured in the depths of his heart. There it underwent a change, and +grew more precious than pure gold. + +And now came the children, somewhat aweary with their wild play, and +sought the quiet enjoyment of Grandfather's talk. The good old gentleman +rubbed his eyes, and smiled round upon them all. He was glad, as most +aged people are, to find that he was yet of consequence, and could give +pleasure to the world. After being so merry, all day long, did these +children desire to hear his sober talk? Oh, then, old Grandfather had +yet a place to fill among living men,--or at least among boys and girls! + +"Begin quick, Grandfather," cried little Alice; "for Pussy wants to hear +you." + +And, truly, our yellow friend, the cat, lay upon the hearth rug, basking +in the warmth of the fire, pricking up her ears, and turning her head +from the children to Grandfather, and from Grandfather to the children, +as if she felt herself very sympathetic with them all. A loud purr, like +the singing of a tea-kettle, or the hum of a spinning-wheel, testified +that she was as comfortable and happy as a cat could be. For Puss had +feasted, and therefore, like Grandfather and the children, had kept a +good Thanksgiving. + +"Does Pussy want to hear me?" said Grandfather, smiling. "Well; we must +please Pussy, if we can!" + +And so he took up the history of the chair, from the epoch of the peace +of 1748. By one of the provisions of the treaty, Louisbourg, which the +New Englanders had been at so much pains to take, was restored to the +king of France. + +The French were afraid, that, unless their colonies should be better +defended than heretofore, another war might deprive them of the whole. +Almost as soon as peace was declared, therefore, they began to build +strong fortifications in the interior of North America. It was strange +to behold these warlike castles, on the banks of solitary lakes, and far +in the midst of woods. The Indian, paddling his birch-canoe on Lake +Champlain, looked up at the high ramparts of Ticonderoga, stone piled on +stone, bristling with cannon, and the white flag of France floating +above. There were similar fortifications on Lake Ontario, and near the +great Falls of Niagara, and at the sources of the Ohio River. And all +around these forts and castles lay the eternal forest; and the roll of +the drum died away in those deep solitudes. + +The truth was, that the French intended to build forts, all the way from +Canada to Louisiana. They would then have had a wall of military +strength, at the back of the English settlements, so as completely to +hem them in. The king of England considered the building of these forts +as a sufficient cause of war, which was accordingly commenced in 1754. + +"Governor Shirley," said Grandfather, "had returned to Boston in 1753. +While in Paris, he had married a second wife, a young French girl, and +now brought her to the Province House. But, when war was breaking out, +it was impossible for such a bustling man to stay quietly at home, +sitting in our old chair, with his wife and children round about him. He +therefore obtained a command in the English forces." + +"And what did Sir William Pepperell do?" asked Charley. + +"He staid at home," said Grandfather, "and was general of the militia. +The veteran regiments of the English army, which were now sent across +the Atlantic, would have scorned to fight under the orders of an old +American merchant. And now began what aged people call the Old French +War. It would be going too far astray from the history of our chair, to +tell you one half of the battles that were fought. I cannot even allow +myself to describe the bloody defeat of General Braddock, near the +sources of the Ohio River, in 1755. But, I must not omit to mention, +that when the English general was mortally wounded, and his army routed, +the remains of it were preserved by the skill and valor of GEORGE +WASHINGTON." + +At the mention of this illustrious name, the children started, as if a +sudden sunlight had gleamed upon the history of their country, now that +the great Deliverer had arisen above the horizon. + +Among all the events of the Old French War, Grandfather thought that +there was none more interesting than the removal of the inhabitants of +Acadia. From the first settlement of this ancient province of the +French, in 1604, until the present time, its people could scarcely ever +know what kingdom held dominion over them. They were a peaceful race, +taking no delight in warfare, and caring nothing for military renown. +And yet, in every war, their region was infested with iron-hearted +soldiers, both French and English, who fought one another for the +privilege of ill treating these poor harmless Acadians. Sometimes the +treaty of peace made them subjects of one king, sometimes of another. + +At the peace of 1748, Acadia had been ceded to England. But the French +still claimed a large portion of it, and built forts for its defence. In +1755, these forts were taken, and the whole of Acadia was conquered, by +three thousand men from Massachusetts, under the command of General +Winslow. The inhabitants were accused of supplying the French with +provisions, and of doing other things that violated their neutrality. + +"These accusations were probably true," observed Grandfather; "for the +Acadians were descended from the French, and had the same friendly +feelings towards them, that the people of Massachusetts had for the +English. But their punishment was severe. The English determined to tear +these poor people from their native homes and scatter them abroad." + +The Acadians were about seven thousand in number. A considerable part of +them were made prisoners, and transported to the English colonies. All +their dwellings and churches were burnt, their cattle were killed, and +the whole country was laid waste, so that none of them might find +shelter or food in their old homes, after the departure of the English. +One thousand of the prisoners were sent to Massachusetts; and +Grandfather allowed his fancy to follow them thither, and tried to give +his auditors an idea of their situation. + +We shall call this passage the story of + + +THE ACADIAN EXILES. + +A sad day it was for the poor Acadians, when the armed soldiers drove +them, at the point of the bayonet, down to the sea-shore. Very sad were +they, likewise, while tossing upon the ocean, in the crowded transport +vessels. But, methinks, it must have been sadder still, when they were +landed on the Long Wharf, in Boston, and left to themselves, on a +foreign strand. + +Then, probably, they huddled together, and looked into one another's +faces for the comfort which was not there. Hitherto, they had been +confined on board of separate vessels, so that they could not tell +whether their relatives and friends were prisoners along with them. But, +now, at least, they could tell that many had been left behind, or +transported to other regions. + +Now, a desolate wife might be heard calling for her husband. He, alas! +had gone, she knew not whither, or perhaps had fled into the woods of +Acadia, and had now returned to weep over the ashes of their dwelling. +An aged widow was crying out, in a querulous, lamentable tone, for her +son, whose affectionate toil had supported her for many a year. He was +not in the crowd of exiles; and what could this aged widow do but sink +down and die? Young men and maidens, whose hearts had been torn asunder +by separation, had hoped, during the voyage, to meet their beloved ones +at its close. Now, they began to feel that they were separated forever. +And, perhaps, a lonesome little girl, a golden-haired child of five +years old, the very picture of our little Alice, was weeping and wailing +for her mother, and found not a soul to give her a kind word. + +Oh, how many broken bonds of affection were here! Country lost!--friends +lost!--their rural wealth of cottage, field, and herds, all lost +together! Every tie between these poor exiles and the world seemed to be +cut off at once. They must have regretted that they had not died before +their exile; for even the English would not have been so pitiless as to +deny them graves in their native soil. The dead were happy; for they +were not exiles! + +While they thus stood upon the wharf, the curiosity and inquisitiveness +of the New England people would naturally lead them into the midst of +the poor Acadians. Prying busy-bodies thrust their heads into the +circle, wherever two or three of the exiles were conversing together. +How puzzled did they look, at the outlandish sound of the French tongue! +There were seen the New England women, too. They had just come out of +their warm, safe homes, where every thing was regular and comfortable, +and where their husbands and children would be with them at night-fall. +Surely, they could pity the wretched wives and mothers of Acadia! Or, +did the sign of the cross, which the Acadians continually made upon +their breasts, and which was abhorred by the descendants of the +Puritans--did that sign exclude all pity? + +Among the spectators, too, was the noisy brood of Boston school-boys, +who came running, with laughter and shouts, to gaze at this crowd of +oddly dressed foreigners. At first they danced and capered around them, +full of merriment and mischief. But the despair of the Acadians soon had +its effect upon these thoughtless lads, and melted them into tearful +sympathy. + +At a little distance from the throng, might be seen the wealthy and +pompous merchants, whose warehouses stood on Long Wharf. It was +difficult to touch these rich men's hearts; for they had all the +comforts of the world at their command; and when they walked abroad, +their feelings were seldom moved, except by the roughness of the +pavement, irritating their gouty toes. Leaning upon their gold-headed +canes, they watched the scene with an aspect of composure. But, let us +hope, they distributed some of their superfluous coin among these +hapless exiles, to purchase food and a night's lodging. + +After standing a long time at the end of the wharf, gazing seaward, as +if to catch a glimpse of their lost Acadia, the strangers began to stray +into the town. + +They went, we will suppose, in parties and groups, here a hundred, there +a score, there ten, there three or four, who possessed some bond of +unity among themselves. Here and there was one, who, utterly desolate, +stole away by himself, seeking no companionship. + +Whither did they go? I imagine them wandering about the streets, telling +the town's-people, in outlandish, unintelligible words, that no earthly +affliction ever equalled what had befallen them. Man's brotherhood with +man was sufficient to make the New Englanders understand this language. +The strangers wanted food. Some of them sought hospitality at the doors +of the stately mansions, which then stood in the vicinity of Hanover +Street and the North Square. Others were applicants at the humble wooden +tenements, where dwelt the petty shop-keepers and mechanics. Pray +Heaven, that no family in Boston turned one of these poor exiles from +their door! It would be a reproach upon New England--a crime worthy of +heavy retribution--if the aged women and children, or even the strong +men, were allowed to feel the pinch of hunger. + +Perhaps some of the Acadians, in their aimless wanderings through the +town, found themselves near a large brick edifice, which was fenced in +from the street by an iron railing, wrought with fantastic figures. They +saw a flight of red freestone steps, ascending to a portal, above which +was a balcony and balustrade. Misery and desolation give men the right +of free passage everywhere. Let us suppose, then, that they mounted the +flight of steps, and passed into the Province House. Making their way +into one of the apartments, they beheld a richly clad gentleman, seated +in a stately chair, with gilding upon the carved work of its back, and a +gilded lion's head at the summit. This was Governor Shirley, meditating +upon matters of war and state, in Grandfather's chair! + +If such an incident did happen, Shirley, reflecting what a ruin of +peaceful and humble hopes had been wrought by the cold policy of the +statesman, and the iron hand of the warrior, might have drawn a deep +moral from it. It should have taught him that the poor man's hearth is +sacred, and that armies and nations have no right to violate it. It +should have made him feel, that England's triumph, and increased +dominion, could not compensate to mankind, nor atone to Heaven, for the +ashes of a single Acadian cottage. But it is not thus that statesmen and +warriors moralize. + +"Grandfather," cried Laurence, with emotion trembling in his voice, "did +iron-hearted War itself ever do so hard and cruel a thing as this +before?" + +"You have rend in history, Laurence, of whole regions wantonly laid +waste," said Grandfather. "In the removal of the Acadians, the troops +were guilty of no cruelty or outrage, except what was inseparable from +the measure." + +Little Alice, whose eyes had, all along, been brimming full of tears, +now burst forth a-sobbing; for Grandfather had touched her sympathies +more than he intended. + +"To think of a whole people, homeless in the world!" said Clara, with +moistened eyes. "There never was any thing so sad!" + +"It was their own fault," cried Charley, energetically. "Why did not +they fight for the country where they were born? Then, if the worst had +happened to them they could only have been killed and buried there. They +would not have been exiles then!" + +"Certainly, their lot was as hard as death," said Grandfather. "All that +could be done for them, in the English provinces, was to send them to +the alms-houses, or bind them out to task-masters. And this was the fate +of persons, who had possessed a comfortable property in their native +country. Some of them found means to embark for France; but though it +was the land of their forefathers, it must have been a foreign land to +them. Those, who remained behind, always cherished a belief, that the +king of France would never make peace with England, till his poor +Acadians were restored their country and their homes." + +"And did he?" inquired Clara. + +"Alas, my dear Clara," said Grandfather, "it is improbable that the +slightest whisper of the woes of Acadia ever reached the ears of Louis +the Fifteenth. The exiles grew old in the British provinces, and never +saw Acadia again. Their descendants remain among us, to this day. They +have forgotten the language of their ancestors, and probably retain no +tradition of their misfortunes. But, methinks, if I were an American +poet, I would choose Acadia for the subject of my song." + +Since Grandfather first spoke these words, the most famous of American +poets has drawn sweet tears from all of us, by his beautiful poem of +Evangeline. + +And now, having thrown a gentle gloom around the Thanksgiving fire-side, +by a story that made the children feel the blessing of a secure and +peaceful hearth, Grandfather put off the other events of the Old French +War till the next evening. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + +In the twilight of the succeeding eve, when the red beams of the fire +were dancing upon the wall, the children besought Grandfather to tell +them what had next happened to the old chair. + +"Our chair," said Grandfather, "stood all this time in the Province +House. But, Governor Shirley had seldom an opportunity to repose within +its arms. He was loading his troops through the forest, or sailing in a +flat-boat on Lake Ontario, or sleeping in his tent, while the awful +cataract of Niagara sent its roar through his dreams. At one period, in +the early part of the war, Shirley had the chief command of all the +king's forces in America." + +"Did his young wife go with him to the war?" asked Clara. + +"I rather imagine," replied Grandfather, "that she remained in Boston. +This lady, I suppose, had our chair all to herself, and used to sit in +it, during those brief intervals when a young French woman can be quiet +enough to sit in a chair. The people of Massachusetts were never fond of +Governor Shirley's young French wife. They had a suspicion that she +betrayed the military plans of the English to the generals of the French +armies." + +"And was it true?" inquired Clara. + +"Probably not," said Grandfather. "But the mere suspicion did Shirley a +great deal of harm. Partly, perhaps, for this reason, but much more on +account of his inefficiency as a general, he was deprived of his +command, in 1756, and recalled to England. He never afterwards made any +figure in public life." + +As Grandfather's chair had no locomotive properties, and did not even +run on castors, it cannot be supposed to have marched in person to the +Old French War. But Grandfather delayed its momentous history, while he +touched briefly upon some of the bloody battles, sieges, and onslaughts, +the tidings of which kept continually coming to the ears of the old +inhabitants of Boston. The woods of the north were populous with +fighting men. All the Indian tribes uplifted their tomahawks, and took +part either with the French or English. The rattle of musketry and roar +of cannon disturbed the ancient quiet of the forest, and actually drove +the bears and other wild beasts to the more cultivated portion of the +country in the vicinity of the sea-ports. The children felt as if they +were transported back to those forgotten times, and that the couriers +from the army, with the news of a battle lost or won, might even now be +heard galloping through the streets. Grandfather told them about the +battle of Lake George, in 1755, when the gallant Colonel Williams, a +Massachusetts officer, was slain, with many of his countrymen. But +General Johnson and General Lyman, with their army, drove back the +enemy, and mortally wounded the French leader, who was called the Baron +Dieskau. A gold watch, pilfered from the poor Baron, is still in +existence, and still marks each moment of time, without complaining of +weariness, although its hands have been in motion ever since the hour of +battle. + +In the first years of the war, there were many disasters on the English +side. Among these was the loss of Fort Oswego, in 1756, and of Fort +William Henry, in the following year. But the greatest misfortune that +befell the English, during the whole war, was the repulse of General +Abercrombie, with his army, from the ramparts of Ticonderoga, in 1758. +He attempted to storm the walls; but a terrible conflict ensued, in +which more than two thousand Englishmen and New Englanders were killed +or wounded. The slain soldiers now lie buried around that ancient +fortress. When the plough passes over the soil, it turns up here and +there a mouldering bone. + +Up to this period, none of the English generals had shown any military +talent. Shirley, the Earl of Loudon, and General Abercrombie, had each +held the chief command, at different times; but not one of them had won +a single important triumph for the British arms. This ill success was +not owing to the want of means; for, in 1758, General Abercrombie had +fifty thousand soldiers under his command. But the French general, the +famous Marquis de Montcalm, possessed a great genius for war, and had +something within him, that taught him how battles were to be won. + +At length, in 1759, Sir Jeffrey Amherst was appointed commander-in-chief +of all the British forces in America. He was a man of ability, and a +skilful soldier. A plan was now formed for accomplishing that object, +which had so long been the darling wish of the New Englanders, and which +their fathers had so many times attempted. This was the conquest of +Canada. + +Three separate armies were to enter Canada, from different quarters. One +of the three, commanded by General Prideaux, was to embark on Lake +Ontario, and proceed to Montreal. The second, at the head of which was +Sir Jeffrey Amherst himself, was destined to reach the River St. +Lawrence, by the way of Lake Champlain, and then go down the river to +meet the third army. This last, led by General Wolfe, was to enter the +St. Lawrence from the sea, and ascend the river to Quebec. It is to +Wolfe and his army that England owes one of the most splendid triumphs, +ever written in her history. + +Grandfather described the siege of Quebec, and told how Wolfe led his +soldiers up a rugged and lofty precipice, that rose from the shore of +the river to the plain on which the city stood. This bold adventure was +achieved in the darkness of night. At day-break, tidings were carried to +the Marquis de Montcalm, that the English army was waiting to give him +battle on the plains of Abraham. This brave French general ordered his +drums to strike up, and immediately marched to encounter Wolfe. + +He marched to his own death. The battle was the most fierce and +terrible, that had ever been fought in America. General Wolfe was at the +head of his soldiers, and while encouraging them onward, received a +mortal wound. He reclined against a stone, in the agonies of death; but +it seemed as if his spirit could not pass away, while the fight yet +raged so doubtfully. Suddenly, a shout came pealing across the +battle-field--"They flee! they flee!" and, for a moment, Wolfe lifted +his languid head. "Who flee?" he inquired. "The French," replied an +officer. "Then I die satisfied!" said Wolfe, and expired in the arms of +victory. + +"If ever a warrior's death were glorious, Wolfe's was so!" said +Grandfather; and his eye kindled, though he was a man of peaceful +thoughts, and gentle spirit. "His life-blood streamed to baptize the +soil which he had added to the dominion of Britain! His dying breath was +mingled with his army's shout of victory!" + +"Oh, it was a good death to die!" cried Charley, with glistening eyes. +"Was it not a good death, Laurence?" + +Laurence made no reply; for his heart burned within him, as the picture +of Wolfe, dying on the blood-stained field of victory, arose to his +imagination; and yet, he had a deep inward consciousness, that, after +all, there was a truer glory than could thus be won. + +"There were other battles in Canada, after Wolfe's victory," resumed +Grandfather; "but we may consider the Old French War as having +terminated with this great event. The treaty of peace, however, was not +signed until 1763. The terms of the treaty were very disadvantageous to +the French; for all Canada, and all Acadia, and the island of Cape +Breton, in short, all the territories that France and England had been +fighting about, for nearly a hundred years--were surrendered to the +English." + +"So, now, at last," said Laurence, "New England had gained her wish. +Canada was taken!" + +"And now there was nobody to fight with, but the Indians," said Charley. + +Grandfather mentioned two other important events. The first was the +great fire of Boston, in 1700, when the glare from nearly three hundred +buildings, all in flames at once, shone through the windows of the +Province House, and threw a fierce lustre upon the gilded foliage and +lion's head of our old chair. The second event was the proclamation, in +the same year, of George the Third as king of Great Britain. The blast +of the trumpet sounded from the balcony of the Town House, and awoke the +echoes far and wide, as if to challenge all mankind to dispute King +George's title. + +Seven times, as the successive monarchs of Britain ascended the throne, +the trumpet-peal of proclamation had been heard by those who sat in our +venerable chair. But, when the next king put on his father's crown, no +trumpet-peal proclaimed it to New England! Long before that day, America +had shaken off the royal government. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + +Now that Grandfather had fought through the Old French War, in which our +chair made no very distinguished figure, he thought it high time to tell +the children some of the more private history of that praiseworthy old +piece of furniture. + +"In 1757," said Grandfather, "after Shirley had been summoned to +England, Thomas Pownall was appointed governor of Massachusetts. He was +a gay and fashionable English gentleman, who had spent much of his life +in London, but had a considerable acquaintance with America. The new +governor appears to have taken no active part in the war that was going +on; although, at one period, he talked of marching against the enemy, at +the head of his company of cadets. But, on the whole, he probably +concluded that it was more befitting a governor to remain quietly in our +chair, reading the newspapers and official documents." + +"Did the people like Pownall?" asked Charley. + +"They found no fault with him," replied Grandfather. "It was no time to +quarrel with the governor, when the utmost harmony was required, in +order to defend the country against the French. But Pownall did not +remain long in Massachusetts. In 1759, he was sent to be governor of +South Carolina. In thus exchanging one government for another, I +suppose he felt no regret, except at the necessity of leaving +Grandfather's chair behind him." + +"He might have taken it to South Carolina," observed Clara. + +"It appears to me," said Laurence, giving the rein to his fancy, "that +the fate of this ancient chair was, somehow or other, mysteriously +connected with the fortunes of old Massachusetts. If Governor Pownall +had put it aboard the vessel in which he sailed for South Carolina, she +would probably have lain wind-bound in Boston harbor. It was ordained +that the chair should not be taken away. Don't you think so, +Grandfather?" + +"It was kept here for Grandfather and me to sit in together," said +little Alice, "and for Grandfather to tell stories about." + +"And Grandfather is very glad of such a companion, and such a theme," +said the old gentleman, with a smile. "Well, Laurence, if our oaken +chair, like the wooden Palladium of Troy, was connected with the +country's fate, yet there appears to have been no supernatural obstacle +to its removal from the Province House. In 1760, Sir Francis Bernard, +who had been governor of New Jersey, was appointed to the same office in +Massachusetts. He looked at the old chair, and thought it quite too +shabby to keep company with a new set of mahogany chairs, and an +aristocratic sofa, which had just arrived from London. He therefore +ordered it to be put away in the garret." + +The children were loud in their exclamations against this irreverent +conduct of Sir Francis Bernard. But Grandfather defended him, as well as +he could. He observed, that it was then thirty years since the chair had +been beautified by Governor Belcher. Most of the gilding was worn off by +the frequent scourings which it had undergone, beneath the hands of a +black slave. The damask cushion, once so splendid, was now squeezed out +of all shape, and absolutely in tatters, so many were the ponderous +gentlemen who had deposited their weight upon it, during these thirty +years. + +Moreover, at a council held by the Earl of Loudon with the governors of +New England, in 1757, his lordship, in a moment of passion, had kicked +over the chair with his military boot. By this unprovoked and +unjustifiable act, our venerable friend had suffered a fracture of one +of its rungs. + +"But," said Grandfather, "our chair, after all, was not destined to +spend the remainder of its days in the inglorious obscurity of a garret. +Thomas Hutchinson, lieutenant-governor of the province, was told of Sir +Francis Bernard's design. This gentleman was more familiar with the +history of New England than any other man alive. He knew all the +adventures and vicissitudes through which the old chair had passed, and +could have told, as accurately as your own Grandfather, who were the +personages that had occupied it. Often, while visiting at the Province +House, he had eyed the chair with admiration, and felt a longing desire +to become the possessor of it. He now waited upon Sir Francis Bernard, +and easily obtained leave to carry it home." + +"And I hope," said Clara, "he had it varnished and gilded anew." + +"No," answered Grandfather. "What Mr. Hutchinson desired was to restore +the chair, as much as possible, to its original aspect, such as it had +appeared, when it was first made out of the Earl of Lincoln's oak-tree. +For this purpose he ordered it to be well scoured with soap and sand and +polished with wax, and then provided it with a substantial leather +cushion. When all was completed to his mind, he sat down in the old +chair, and began to write his History of Massachusetts." + +"Oh, that was a bright thought in Mr. Hutchinson!" exclaimed Laurence. +"And, no doubt, the dim figures of the former possessors of the chair +flitted around him, as he wrote, and inspired him with a knowledge of +all that they had done and suffered while on earth." + +"Why, my dear Laurence," replied Grandfather, smiling, "if Mr. +Hutchinson was favored with any such extraordinary inspiration, he made +but a poor use of it in his History; for a duller piece of composition +never came from any man's pen. However, he was accurate, at least, +though far from possessing the brilliancy or philosophy of Mr. +Bancroft." + +"But, if Hutchinson knew the history of the chair," rejoined Laurence, +"his heart must have been stirred by it." + +"It must, indeed," said Grandfather. "It would be entertaining and +instructive, at the present day, to imagine what were Mr. Hutchinson's +thoughts, as he looked back upon the long vista of events with which +this chair was so remarkably connected." + +And Grandfather allowed his fancy to shape out an image of +Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson, sitting in an evening reverie by his +fireside, and meditating on the changes that had slowly passed around +the chair. + +A devoted monarchist, Hutchinson would heave no sigh for the subversion +of the original republican government, the purest that the world had +seen, with which the colony began its existence. While reverencing the +grim and stern old Puritans as the founders of his native land, he would +not wish to recall them from their graves, nor to awaken again that +king-resisting spirit, which he imagined to be laid asleep with them +forever. Winthrop, Dudley, Bellingham, Endicott, Leverett, and +Bradstreet! All these had had their day. Ages might come and go, but +never again would the people's suffrages place a republican governor in +their ancient Chair of State! + +Coming down to the epoch of the second charter, Hutchinson thought of +the ship-carpenter Phips, springing from the lowest of the people, and +attaining to the loftiest station in the land. But, he smiled to +perceive that this governor's example would awaken no turbulent ambition +in the lower orders, for it was a king's gracious boon alone that made +the ship-carpenter a ruler. Hutchinson rejoiced to mark the gradual +growth of an aristocratic class, to whom the common people, as in duty +bound, were learning humbly to resign the honors, emoluments, and +authority of state. He saw,--or else deceived himself--that, throughout +this epoch, the people's disposition to self-government had been growing +weaker, through long disuse, and now existed only as a faint +traditionary feeling. + +The Lieutenant-Governor's reverie had now come down to the period at +which he himself was sitting in the historic chair. He endeavored to +throw his glance forward, over the coming years. There, probably, he saw +visions of hereditary rank, for himself and other aristocratic +colonists. He saw the fertile fields of New England, portioned out among +a few great landholders, and descending by entail from generation to +generation. He saw the people a race of tenantry, dependent on their +lords. He saw stars, garters, coronets, and castles. + +"But," added Grandfather, turning to Laurence, "the +Lieutenant-Governor's castles were built nowhere but among the red +embers of the fire, before which he was sitting. And, just as he had +constructed a baronial residence for himself and his posterity, the fire +rolled down upon the hearth, and crumbled it to ashes!" + +Grandfather now looked at his watch, which hung within a beautiful +little ebony Temple, supported by four Ionic columns. He then laid his +hand on the golden locks of little Alice, whose head had sunk down upon +the arm of our illustrious chair. + +"To bed, to bed, dear child!" said he. "Grandfather has put you to +sleep, already, by his stories about these FAMOUS OLD PEOPLE!" + + + + +PART III. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +On the evening of New Year's day, Grandfather was walking to and fro, +across the carpet, listening to the rain which beat hard against the +curtained windows. The riotous blast shook the casement, as if a strong +man were striving to force his entrance into the comfortable room. With +every puff of the wind, the fire leaped upward from the hearth, laughing +and rejoicing at the shrieks of the wintry storm. + +Meanwhile, Grandfather's chair stood in its customary place by the +fireside. The bright blaze gleamed upon the fantastic figures of its +oaken back, and shone through the open-work, so that a complete pattern +was thrown upon the opposite side of the room. Sometimes, for a moment +or two, the shadow remained immovable, as if it were painted on the +wall. Then, all at once, it began to quiver, and leap, and dance, with a +frisky motion. Anon, seeming to remember that these antics were unworthy +of such a dignified and venerable chair, it suddenly stood still. But +soon it began to dance anew. + +"Only see how grandfather's chair is dancing!" cried little Alice. + +And she ran to the wall, and tried to catch hold of the flickering +shadow; for to children of five years old, a shadow seems almost as real +as a substance. + +"I wish," said Clara, "Grandfather would sit down in the chair, and +finish its history." + +If the children had been looking at Grandfather, they would have noticed +that he paused in his walk across the room, when Clara made this remark. +The kind old gentleman was ready and willing to resume his stories of +departed times. But he had resolved to wait till his auditors should +request him to proceed, in order that they might find the instructive +history of the chair a pleasure, and not a task. + +"Grandfather," said Charley, "I am tired to death of this dismal rain, +and of hearing the wind roar in the chimney. I have had no good time all +day. It would be better to hear stories about the chair, than to sit +doing nothing, and thinking of nothing." + +To say the truth, our friend Charley was very much out of humor with the +storm, because it had kept him all day within doors, and hindered him +from making trial of a splendid sled, which Grandfather had given him +for a New Year's gift. As all sleds, now-a-days, must have a name, the +one in question had been honored with the title of Grandfather's Chair, +which was painted in golden letters, on each of the sides. Charley +greatly admired the construction of the new vehicle, and felt certain +that it would outstrip any other sled that ever dashed adown the long +slopes of the Common. + +As for Laurence, he happened to be thinking, just at this moment, about +the history of the chair. Kind old Grandfather had made him a present of +a volume of engraved portraits, representing the features of eminent and +famous people of all countries. Among them Laurence found several who +had formerly occupied our chair, or been connected with its adventures. +While Grandfather walked to and fro across the room, the imaginative boy +was gazing at the historic chair. He endeavored to summon up the +portraits which he had seen in his volume, and to place them, like +living figures, in the empty seat. + +"The old chair has begun another year of its existence, to-day," said +Laurence. "We must make haste, or it will have a new history to be told +before we finish the old one." + +"Yes, my children," replied Grandfather, with a smile and a sigh, +"another year has been added to those of the two centuries, and upward, +which have passed since the Lady Arbella brought this chair over from +England. It is three times as old as your Grandfather; but a year makes +no impression on its oaken frame, while it bends the old man nearer and +nearer to the earth; so let me go on with my stories while I may." + +Accordingly, Grandfather came to the fireside, and seated himself in the +venerable chair. The lion's head looked down with a grimly good-natured +aspect, as the children clustered around the old gentleman's knees. It +almost seemed as if a real lion were peeping over the back of the chair, +and smiling at the group of auditors, with a sort of lion-like +complaisance. Little Alice, whose fancy often inspired her with singular +ideas, exclaimed that the lion's head was nodding at her, and that it +looked as if it were going to open its wide jaws and tell a story. + +But, as the lion's head appeared to be in no haste to speak, and as +there was no record or tradition of its having spoken, during the whole +existence of the chair, Grandfather did not consider it worth while to +wait. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +"Charley, my boy," said Grandfather, "do you remember who was the last +occupant of the chair?" + +"It was Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson," answered Charley. "Sir Francis +Bernard, the new governor, had given him the chair, instead of putting +it away in the garret of the Province House. And when we took leave of +Hutchinson, he was sitting by his fireside, and thinking of the past +adventures of the chair, and of what was to come." + +"Very well," said Grandfather; "and you recollect that this was in 1763, +or thereabouts, at the close of the Old French War. Now, that you may +fully comprehend the remaining adventures of the chair, I must make some +brief remarks on the situation and character of the New England colonies +at this period." + +So Grandfather spoke of the earnest loyalty of our fathers during the +Old French War, and after the conquest of Canada had brought that war to +a triumphant close. + +The people loved and reverenced the king of England, even more than if +the ocean had not rolled its waves between him and them; for, at the +distance of three thousand miles, they could not discover his bad +qualities and imperfections. Their love was increased by the dangers +which they had encountered in order to heighten his glory and extend his +dominion. Throughout the war, the American colonists had fought side by +side with the soldiers of Old England; and nearly thirty thousand young +men had laid down their lives for the honor of King George. And the +survivors loved him the better, because they had done and suffered so +much for his sake. + +But, there were some circumstances, that caused America to feel more +independent of England than at an earlier period. Canada and Acadia had +now become British provinces; and our fathers were no longer afraid of +the bands of French and Indians, who used to assault them in old times. +For a century and a half this had been the great terror of New England. +Now, the old French soldier was driven from the north forever. And, even +had it been otherwise the English colonies were growing so populous and +powerful, that they might have felt fully able to protect themselves +without any help from England. + +There were thoughtful and sagacious men, who began to doubt, whether a +great country like America, would always be content to remain under the +government of an island three thousand miles away. This was the more +doubtful, because the English Parliament had long ago made laws which +were intended to be very beneficial to England, at the expense of +America. By these laws, the colonists were forbidden to manufacture +articles for their own use, or to carry on trade with any nation but the +English. + +"Now," continued Grandfather, "if King George the Third and his +counsellors had considered these things wisely, they would have taken +another course than they did. But, when they saw how rich and populous +the colonies had grown, their first thought was, how they might make +more profit out of them than heretofore. England was enormously in debt, +at the close of the Old French War, and it was pretended, that this debt +had been contracted for the defence of the American colonies, and that +therefore a part of it ought to be paid by them." + +"Why, this was nonsense," exclaimed Charley; "did not our fathers spend +their lives and their money too, to get Canada for King George?" + +"True, they did," said Grandfather; "and they told the English rulers +so. But the king and his ministers would not listen to good advice. In +1765, the British Parliament passed a Stamp Act." + +"What was that?" inquired Charley. + +"The Stamp Act," replied Grandfather, "was a law by which all deeds, +bonds, and other papers of the same kind, were ordered to be marked with +the king's stamp; and without this mark, they were declared illegal and +void. Now, in order to get a blank sheet of paper, with the king's stamp +upon it, people were obliged to pay three pence more than the actual +value of the paper. And this extra sum of three pence was a tax, and was +to be paid into the king's treasury." + +"I am sure three pence was not worth quarrelling about!" remarked Clara. + +"It was not for three pence, nor for any amount of money, that America +quarrelled with England," replied Grandfather; "it was for a great +principle. The colonists were determined not to be taxed, except by +their own representatives. They said that neither the king and +Parliament nor any other power on earth, had a right to take their money +out of their pockets, unless they freely gave it. And, rather than pay +three pence when it was unjustly demanded, they resolved to sacrifice +all the wealth of the country, and their lives along with it. They +therefore made a most stubborn resistance to the Stamp Act." + +"That was noble!" exclaimed Laurence. "I understand how it was. If they +had quietly paid this tax of three pence, they would have ceased to be +freemen, and would have become tributaries of England. And so they +contended about a great question of right and wrong, and put every thing +at stake for it." + +"You are right, Laurence," said Grandfather; "and it was really amazing +and terrible to see what a change came over the aspect of the people, +the moment the English Parliament had passed this oppressive act. The +former history of our chair, my children, has given you some idea of +what a harsh, unyielding, stern set of men the old Puritans were. For a +good many years back, however, it had seemed as if these characteristics +were disappearing. But no sooner did England offer wrong to the +colonies, than the descendants of the early settlers proved that they +had the same kind of temper as their forefathers. The moment before, New +England appeared like an humble and loyal subject of the crown; the next +instant, she showed the grim, dark features of an old king-resisting +Puritan." + +Grandfather spoke briefly of the public measures that were taken in +opposition to the Stamp Act. As this law affected all the American +colonies alike, it naturally led them to think of consulting together in +order to procure its repeal. For this purpose, the legislature of +Massachusetts proposed that delegates from every colony should meet in +Congress. Accordingly nine colonies, both northern and southern, sent +delegates to the city of New York. + +"And did they consult about going to war with England?" asked Charley. + +"No, Charley," answered Grandfather; "a great deal of talking was yet to +be done, before England and America could come to blows. The Congress +stated the rights and the grievances of the colonists. They sent an +humble petition to the king, and a memorial to the Parliament, +beseeching that the Stamp Act might be repealed. This was all that the +delegates had it in their power to do." + +"They might as well have staid at home, then," said Charley. + +"By no means," replied Grandfather. "It was a most important and +memorable event--this first coming together of the American people, by +their representatives from the north and south. If England had been +wise, she would have trembled at the first word that was spoken in such +an assembly!" + +These remonstrances and petitions, as Grandfather observed, were the +work of grave, thoughtful, and prudent men. Meantime, the young and +hot-headed people went to work in their own way. It is probable that the +petitions of Congress would have had little or no effect on the British +statesmen, if the violent deeds of the American people had not shown how +much excited the people were. LIBERTY TREE was soon heard of in England. + +"What was Liberty Tree?" inquired Clara. + +"It was an old elm tree," answered Grandfather, "which stood near the +corner of Essex street, opposite the Boylston market. Under the +spreading branches of this great tree, the people used to assemble, +whenever they wished to express their feelings and opinions. Thus, after +a while, it seemed as if the liberty of the country was connected with +Liberty Tree." + +"It was glorious fruit for a tree to bear," remarked Laurence. + +[Illustration] + +"It bore strange fruit, sometimes," said Grandfather. "One morning in +August, 1765, two figures were found hanging on the sturdy branches of +Liberty Tree. They were dressed in square-skirted coats and +small-clothes; and, as their wigs hung down over their faces, they +looked like real men. One was intended to represent the Earl of Bute, +who was supposed to have advised the king to tax America. The other was +meant for the effigy of Andrew Oliver, a gentleman belonging to one of +the most respectable families in Massachusetts." + +"What harm had he done?" inquired Charley. + +"The king had appointed him to be distributor of the stamps," answered +Grandfather. "Mr. Oliver would have made a great deal of money by this +business. But the people frightened him so much by hanging him in +effigy, and afterwards by breaking into his house, that he promised to +have nothing to do with the stamps. And all the king's friends +throughout America were compelled to make the same promise." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +"Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson," continued Grandfather, "now began to +be unquiet in our old chair. He had formerly been much respected and +beloved by the people, and had often proved himself a friend to their +interests. But the time was come, when he could not be a friend to the +people, without ceasing to be a friend to the king. It was pretty +generally understood, that Hutchinson would act according to the king's +wishes, right or wrong, like most of the other gentlemen who held +offices under the crown. Besides, as he was brother-in-law of Andrew +Oliver, the people now felt a particular dislike to him." + +"I should think," said Laurence, "as Mr. Hutchinson had written the +history of our Puritan forefathers, he would have known what the temper +of the people was, and so have taken care not to wrong them." + +"He trusted in the might of the king of England," replied Grandfather, +"and thought himself safe under the shelter of the throne. If no dispute +had arisen between the king and the people, Hutchinson would have had +the character of a wise, good, and patriotic magistrate. But, from the +time that he took part against the rights of his country, the people's +love and respect were turned to scorn and hatred; and he never had +another hour of peace." + +In order to show what a fierce and dangerous spirit was now aroused +among the inhabitants, Grandfather related a passage from history, which +we shall call + + +THE HUTCHINSON MOB. + +On the evening of the twenty-sixth of August, 1765, a bonfire was +kindled in King Street. It flamed high upward, and threw a ruddy light +over the front of the town house, on which was displayed a carved +representation of the royal arms. The gilded vane of the cupola +glittered in the blaze. The kindling of this bonfire was the well known +signal for the populace of Boston to assemble in the street. + +Before the tar-barrels, of which the bonfire was made, were half burnt +out, a great crowd had come together. They were chiefly laborers and +seafaring men, together with many young apprentices, and all those idle +people about town who are ready for any kind of mischief. Doubtless some +school-boys were among them. + +While these rough figures stood round the blazing bonfire, you might +hear them speaking bitter words against the high officers of the +province. Governor Bernard, Hutchinson, Oliver, Storey, Hallowell, and +other men whom King George delighted to honor, were reviled as traitors +to the country. Now and then, perhaps, an officer of the crown passed +along the street, wearing the gold-laced hat, white wig, and embroidered +waistcoat, which were the fashion of the day. But, when the people +beheld him, they set up a wild and angry howl, and their faces had an +evil aspect, which was made more terrible by the flickering blaze of the +bonfire. + +"I should like to throw the traitor right into that blaze!" perhaps one +fierce rioter would say. + +"Yes; and all his brethren too!" another might reply; "and the governor +and old Tommy Hutchinson into the hottest of it!" + +"And the Earl of Bute along with them," muttered a third; "and burn the +whole pack of them under King George's nose! No matter if it singed +him!" + +Some such expressions as these, either shouted aloud, or muttered under +the breath, were doubtless heard in King Street. The mob, meanwhile, +were growing fiercer, and fiercer, and seemed ready even to set the town +on fire, for the sake of burning the king's friends out of house and +home. And yet, angry as they were, they sometimes broke into a loud roar +of laughter, as if mischief and destruction were their sport. + +But we must now leave the rioters for a time, and take a peep into the +lieutenant-governor's splendid mansion. It was a large brick house, +decorated with Ionic pilasters, and stood in Garden Court Street, near +the North Square. + +While the angry mob in King Street were shouting his name, +Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson sat quietly in Grandfather's chair, +unsuspicious of the evil that was about to fall upon his head. His +beloved family were in the room with him. He had thrown off his +embroidered coat and powdered wig, and had on a loose flowing gown and +purple velvet cap. He had likewise laid aside the cares of state, and +all the thoughts that had wearied and perplexed him throughout the day. + +Perhaps, in the enjoyment of his home, he had forgotten all about the +Stamp Act, and scarcely remembered that there was a king, across the +ocean, who had resolved to make tributaries of the New Englanders. +Possibly, too, he had forgotten his own ambition, and would not have +exchanged his situation, at that moment, to be governor, or even a lord. + +The wax candles were now lighted, and showed a handsome room, well +provided with rich furniture. On the walls hung the pictures of +Hutchinson's ancestors, who had been eminent men in their day, and were +honorably remembered in the history of the country. Every object served +to mark the residence of a rich, aristocratic gentleman, who held +himself high above the common people, and could have nothing to fear +from them. In a corner of the room, thrown carelessly upon a chair, +were the scarlet robes of the chief justice. This high office, as well +as those of lieutenant-governor, counsellor, and judge of probate, was +filled by Hutchinson. + +Who or what could disturb the domestic quiet of such a great and +powerful personage as now sat in Grandfather's chair. + +The lieutenant-governor's favorite daughter sat by his side. She leaned +on the arm of our great chair, and looked up affectionately into her +father's face, rejoicing to perceive that a quiet smile was on his lips. +But suddenly a shade came across her countenance. She seemed to listen +attentively, as if to catch a distant sound. + +"What is the matter, my child?" inquired Hutchinson. + +"Father, do not you hear a tumult in the streets?" said she. + +The lieutenant-governor listened. But his ears were duller than those of +his daughter; he could hear nothing more terrible than the sound of a +summer breeze, sighing among the tops of the elm trees. + +"No, foolish child!" he replied, playfully patting her cheek. "There is +no tumult. Our Boston mobs are satisfied with what mischief they have +already done. The king's friends need not tremble." + +So Hutchinson resumed his pleasant and peaceful meditations, and again +forgot that there were any troubles in the world. But his family were +alarmed, and could not help straining their ears to catch the slightest +sound. More and more distinctly they heard shouts, and then the +trampling of many feet. While they were listening, one of the neighbors +rushed breathless into the room. + +"A mob!--a terrible mob!" cried he: "they have broken into Mr. Storey's +house, and into Mr. Hallowell's, and have made themselves drunk with the +liquors in his cellar, and now they are coming hither, as wild as so +many tigers. Flee, lieutenant-governor, for your life! for your life!" + +"Father, dear father, make haste!" shrieked his children. + +But Hutchinson would not hearken to them. He was an old lawyer; and he +could not realize that the people would do any thing so utterly lawless +as to assault him in his peaceful home. He was one of King George's +chief officers; and it would be an insult and outrage upon the king +himself, if the lieutenant-governor should suffer any wrong. + +"Have no fears on my account," said he; "I am perfectly safe. The king's +name shall be my protection." + +Yet he bade his family retire into one of the neighboring houses. His +daughter would have remained, but he forced her away. + +The huzzas and riotous uproar of the mob were now heard, close at hand. +The sound was terrible, and struck Hutchinson with the same sort of +dread as if an enraged wild beast had broken loose, and were roaring +for its prey. He crept softly to the window. There he beheld an immense +concourse of people, filling all the street, and rolling onward to his +house. It was like a tempestuous flood, that had swelled beyond its +bounds, and would sweep every thing before it. Hutchinson trembled; he +felt, at that moment, that the wrath of the people was a thousand-fold +more terrible than the wrath of a king. + +That was a moment when a loyalist and an aristocrat, like Hutchinson, +might have learned how powerless are kings, nobles, and great men, when +the low and humble range themselves against them. King George could do +nothing for his servant now. Had King George been there, he could have +done nothing for himself. If Hutchinson had understood this lesson, and +remembered it, he need not, in after years, have been an exile from his +native country, nor finally have laid his bones in a distant land. + +There was now a rush against the doors of the house. The people sent up +a hoarse cry. At this instant, the lieutenant-governor's daughter, whom +he had supposed to be in a place of safety, ran into the room, and threw +her arms around him. She had returned by a private entrance. + +"Father, are you mad!" cried she. "Will the king's name protect you now? +Come with me, or they will have your life." + +"True," muttered Hutchinson to himself; "what care these roarers for the +name of king? I must flee, or they will trample me down, on the door of +my own dwelling!" + +Hurrying away, he and his daughter made their escape by the private +passage, at the moment when the rioters broke into the house. The +foremost of them rushed up the stair-case, and entered the room which +Hutchinson had just quitted. There they beheld our good old chair, +facing them with quiet dignity, while the lion's head seemed to move its +jaws in the unsteady light of their torches. Perhaps the stately aspect +of our venerable friend, which had stood firm through a century and a +half of trouble, arrested them for an instant. But they were thrust +forward by those behind, and the chair lay overthrown. + +Then began the work of destruction. The carved and polished mahogany +tables were shattered with heavy clubs, and hewn to splinters with axes. +The marble hearths and mantel pieces were broken. The volumes of +Hutchinson's library, so precious to a studious man, were torn out of +their covers, and the leaves sent flying out of the windows. +Manuscripts, containing secrets of our country's history, which are now +lost forever, were scattered to the winds. + +The old ancestral portraits, whose fixed countenances looked down on the +wild scene, were rent from the walls. The mob triumphed in their +downfall and destruction, as if these pictures of Hutchinson's +forefathers had committed the same offences as their descendant. A tall +looking-glass, which had hitherto presented a reflection of the enraged +and drunken multitude, was now smashed into a thousand fragments. We +gladly dismiss the scene from the mirror of our fancy. + +Before morning dawned, the walls of the house were all that remained. +The interior was a dismal scene of ruin. A shower pattered in at the +broken windows, and when Hutchinson and his family returned, they stood +shivering in the same room, where the last evening had seen them so +peaceful and happy. + + * * * * * + +"Grandfather," said Laurence indignantly, "if the people acted in this +manner, they were not worthy of even so much liberty as the king of +England was willing to allow them." + +"It was a most unjustifiable act, like many other popular movements at +that time," replied Grandfather. "But we must not decide against the +justice of the people's cause, merely because an excited mob was guilty +of outrageous violence. Besides, all these things were done in the first +fury of resentment. Afterwards, the people grew more calm, and were more +influenced by the counsel of those wise and good men who conducted them +safely and gloriously through the Revolution." + +Little Alice, with tears in her blue eyes, said that she hoped the +neighbors had not let Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson and his family be +homeless in the street, but had taken them into their houses, and been +kind to them. Cousin Clara, recollecting the perilous situation of our +beloved chair, inquired what had become of it. + +"Nothing was heard of our chair for sometime afterwards," answered +Grandfather. "One day in September, the same Andrew Oliver, of whom I +before told you, was summoned to appear at high noon, under Liberty +Tree. This was the strangest summons that had ever been heard of; for it +was issued in the name of the whole people, who thus took upon +themselves the authority of a sovereign power. Mr. Oliver dared not +disobey. Accordingly, at the appointed hour, he went, much against his +will, to Liberty Tree." + +Here Charley interposed a remark that poor Mr. Oliver found but little +liberty under Liberty Tree. Grandfather assented. + +"It was a stormy day," continued he. "The equinoctial gale blew +violently, and scattered the yellow leaves of Liberty Tree all along the +street. Mr. Oliver's wig was dripping with water-drops, and he probably +looked haggard, disconsolate, and humbled to the earth. Beneath the +tree, in Grandfather's chair,--our own venerable chair,--sat Mr. Richard +Dana, a justice of the peace. He administered an oath to Mr. Oliver, +that he would never have any thing to do with distributing the stamps. A +vast concourse of people heard the oath, and shouted when it was taken." + +"There is something grand in this," said Laurence. "I like it, because +the people seem to have acted with thoughtfulness and dignity; and this +proud gentleman, one of his Majesty's high officers, was made to feel +that King George could not protect him in doing wrong." + +"But it was a sad day for poor Mr. Oliver," observed Grandfather. "From +his youth upward, it had probably been the great principle of his life, +to be faithful and obedient to the king. And now, in his old age, it +must have puzzled and distracted him, to find the sovereign people +setting up a claim to his faith and obedience." + +Grandfather closed the evening's conversation by saying that the +discontent of America was so great, that, in 1766, the British +Parliament was compelled to repeal the Stamp Act. The people made great +rejoicings, but took care to keep Liberty Tree well pruned, and free +from caterpillars and canker worms. They foresaw, that there might yet +be occasion for them to assemble under its far projecting shadow. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +The next evening, Clara, who remembered that our chair had been left +standing in the rain, under Liberty Tree, earnestly besought Grandfather +to tell when and where it had next found shelter. Perhaps she was afraid +that the venerable chair, by being exposed to the inclemency of a +September gale, might get the rheumatism in its aged joints. + +"The chair," said Grandfather, "after the ceremony of Mr. Oliver's oath, +appears to have been quite forgotten by the multitude. Indeed, being +much bruised and rather rickety, owing to the violent treatment it had +suffered from the Hutchinson mob, most people would have thought that +its days of usefulness were over. Nevertheless, it was conveyed away, +under cover of the night, and committed to the care of a skilful joiner. +He doctored our old friend so successfully, that, in the course of a few +days, it made its appearance in the public room of the British Coffee +House in King Street." + +"But why did not Mr. Hutchinson get possession of it again?" inquired +Charley. + +"I know not," answered Grandfather, "unless he considered it a dishonor +and disgrace to the chair to have stood under Liberty Tree. At all +events, he suffered it to remain at the British Coffee House, which was +the principal hotel in Boston. It could not possibly have found a +situation, where it would be more in the midst of business and bustle, +or would witness more important events, or be occupied by a greater +variety of persons." + +Grandfather went on to tell the proceedings of the despotic king and +ministry of England, after the repeal of the Stamp Act. They could not +bear to think, that their right to tax America should be disputed by the +people. In the year 1767, therefore, they caused Parliament to pass an +act for laying a duty on tea, and some other articles that were in +general use. Nobody could now buy a pound of tea, without paying a tax +to King George. This scheme was pretty craftily contrived; for the women +of America were very fond of tea, and did not like to give up the use of +it. + +But the people were as much opposed to this new act of Parliament, as +they had been to the Stamp Act. England, however, was determined that +they should submit. In order to compel their obedience, two regiments, +consisting of more than seven hundred British soldiers, were sent to +Boston. They arrived in September, 1768, and were landed on Long Wharf. +Thence they marched to the Common, with loaded muskets, fixed bayonets, +and great pomp and parade. So now, at last, the free town of Boston was +guarded and over-awed by red-coats, as it had been in the days of old +Sir Edmund Andros. + +In the month of November, more regiments arrived. There were now four +thousand troops in Boston. The Common was whitened with their tents. +Some of the soldiers were lodged in Faneuil Hall, which the inhabitants +looked upon as a consecrated place, because it had been the scene of a +great many meetings in favor of liberty. One regiment was placed in the +town house, which we now call the Old State House. The lower floor of +this edifice had hitherto been used by the merchants as an exchange. In +the upper stories were the chambers of the judges, the representatives, +and the governor's council. The venerable counsellors could not assemble +to consult about the welfare of the province, without being challenged +by sentinels, and passing among the bayonets of the British soldiers. + +Sentinels, likewise, were posted at the lodgings of the officers, in +many parts of the town. When the inhabitants approached, they were +greeted by the sharp question--"Who goes there?" while the rattle of the +soldier's musket was heard, as he presented it against their breasts. +There was no quiet, even on the Sabbath day. The pious descendants of +the Puritans were shocked by the uproar of military music, the drum, +fife, and bugle, drowning the holy organ peal and the voices of the +singers. It would appear as if the British took every method to insult +the feelings of the people. + +"Grandfather," cried Charley, impatiently, "the people did not go to +fighting half soon enough! These British red-coats ought to have been +driven back to their vessels, the very moment they landed on Long +Wharf." + +"Many a hot-headed young man said the same as you do, Charley," answered +Grandfather. "But the elder and wiser people saw that the time was not +yet come. Meanwhile, let us take another peep at our old chair." + +"Ah, it drooped its head, I know," said Charley, "when it saw how the +province was disgraced. Its old Puritan friends never would have borne +such doings." + +"The chair," proceeded Grandfather, "was now continually occupied by +some of the high tories, as the king's friends were called, who +frequented the British Coffee House. Officers of the custom-house, too, +which stood on the opposite side of King Street, often sat in the chair, +wagging their tongues against John Hancock." + +"Why against him?" asked Charley. + +"Because he was a great merchant, and contended against paying duties to +the king," said Grandfather. + +"Well, frequently, no doubt, the officers of the British regiments, when +not on duty, used to fling themselves into the arms of our venerable +chair. Fancy one of them, a red nosed captain, in his scarlet uniform, +playing with the hilt of his sword, and making a circle of his brother +officers merry with ridiculous jokes at the expense of the poor Yankees. +And perhaps he would call for a bottle of wine, or a steaming bowl of +punch, and drink confusion to all rebels." + +"Our grave old chair must have been scandalized at such scenes," +observed Laurence. "The chair that had been the Lady Arbella's, and +which the holy Apostle Eliot had consecrated." + +"It certainly was little less than sacrilege," replied Grandfather; "but +the time was coming, when even the churches, where hallowed pastors had +long preached the word of God, were to be torn down or desecrated by the +British troops. Some years passed, however, before such things were +done." + +Grandfather now told his auditors, that, in 1769, Sir Francis Bernard +went to England, after having been governor of Massachusetts ten years. +He was a gentleman of many good qualities, an excellent scholar, and a +friend to learning. But he was naturally of an arbitrary disposition; +and he had been bred at the University of Oxford, where young men were +taught that the divine right of kings was the only thing to be regarded +in matters of government. Such ideas were ill adapted to please the +people of Massachusetts. They rejoiced to get rid of Sir Francis +Bernard, but liked his successor, Lieutenant-Governor Hutchinson, no +better than himself. + +About this period, the people were much incensed at an act, committed by +a person who held an office in the custom-house. Some lads, or young +men, were snow-balling his windows. He fired a musket at them and killed +a poor German boy, only eleven years old. This event made a great noise +in town and country, and much increased the resentment that was already +felt against the servants of the crown. + +"Now, children," said Grandfather, "I wish to make you comprehend the +position of the British troops in King Street. This is the same which we +now call State Street. On the south side of the town-house, or Old State +House, was what military men call a court of guard, defended by two +brass cannons, which pointed directly at one of the doors of the above +edifice. A large party of soldiers were always stationed in the court of +guard. The custom-house stood at a little distance down King Street, +nearly where the Suffolk bank now stands; and a sentinel was continually +pacing before its front." + +"I shall remember this, to-morrow," said Charley; "and I will go to +State Street, so as to see exactly where the British troops were +stationed." + +"And, before long," observed Grandfather, "I shall have to relate an +event, which made King Street sadly famous on both sides of the +Atlantic. The history of our chair will soon bring us to this melancholy +business." + +Here Grandfather described the state of things, which arose from the +ill-will that existed between the inhabitants and the red-coats. The old +and sober part of the town's-people were very angry at the government, +for sending soldiers to overawe them. But those gray-headed men were +cautious, and kept their thoughts and feelings in their own breasts, +without putting themselves in the way of the British bayonets. + +The younger people, however, could hardly be kept within such prudent +limits. They reddened with wrath at the very sight of a soldier, and +would have been willing to come to blows with them, at any moment. For +it was their opinion, that every tap of a British drum within the +peninsula of Boston, was an insult to the brave old town. + +"It was sometimes the case," continued Grandfather, "that affrays +happened between such wild young men as these, and small parties of the +soldiers. No weapons had hitherto been used, except fists or cudgels. +But, when men have loaded muskets in their hands, it is easy to +foretell, that they will soon be turned against the bosoms of those who +provoke their anger." + +"Grandfather," said little Alice, looking fearfully into his face, "your +voice sounds as though you were going to tell us something awful!" + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +Little Alice, by her last remark, proved herself a good judge of what +was expressed by the tones of Grandfather's voice. He had given the +above description of the enmity between the town's-people and the +soldiers, in order to prepare the minds of his auditors for a very +terrible event. It was one that did more to heighten the quarrel between +England and America, than any thing that had yet occurred. + +Without further preface, Grandfather began the story of + + +THE BOSTON MASSACRE. + +It was now the 3d of March, 1770. The sunset music of the British +regiments was heard, as usual, throughout the town. The shrill fife and +rattling drum awoke the echoes in King Street, while the last ray of +sunshine was lingering on the cupola of the town-house. And now, all the +sentinels were posted. One of them marched up and down before the +custom-house, treading a short path through the snow, and longing for +the time when he would be dismissed to the warm fire-side of the +guard-room. Meanwhile, Captain Preston was perhaps sitting in our great +chair, before the hearth of the British Coffee House. In the course of +the evening, there were two or three slight commotions, which seemed to +indicate that trouble was at hand. Small parties of young men stood at +the corners of the streets, or walked along the narrow pavements. Squads +of soldiers, who were dismissed from duty, passed by them, shoulder to +shoulder, with the regular step which they had learned at the drill. +Whenever these encounters took place, it appeared to be the object of +the young men to treat the soldiers with as much incivility as possible. + +"Turn out, you lobster-backs!" one would say. "Crowd them off the +side-walks!" another would cry. "A red-coat has no right in Boston +streets." + +"Oh, you rebel rascals!" perhaps the soldiers would reply, glaring +fiercely at the young men. "Some day or other, we'll make our way +through Boston streets, at the point of the bayonet!" + +Once or twice, such disputes as these brought on a scuffle; which passed +off, however, without attracting much notice. About eight o'clock, for +some unknown cause, an alarm bell rang loudly and hurriedly. + +At the sound, many people ran out of their houses, supposing it to be an +alarm of fire. But there were no flames to be seen; nor was there any +smell of smoke in the clear, frosty air; so that most of the townsmen +went back to their own fire-sides, and sat talking with their wives and +children about the calamities of the times. Others, who were younger +and less prudent, remained in the streets; for there seems to have been +a presentiment that some strange event was on the eve of taking place. + +Later in the evening, not far from nine o'clock, several young men +passed by the town-house, and walked down King Street. The sentinel was +still on his post, in front of the custom-house, pacing to and fro, +while, as he turned, a gleam of light, from some neighboring window, +glittered on the barrel of his musket. At no great distance were the +barracks and the guard-house, where his comrades were probably telling +stories of battle and bloodshed. + +Down towards the custom-house, as I told you, came a party of wild young +men. When they drew near the sentinel, he halted on his post, and took +his musket from his shoulder, ready to present the bayonet at their +breasts. + +"Who goes there?" he cried, in the gruff, peremptory tones of a +soldier's challenge. + +The young men, being Boston boys, felt as if they had a right to walk +their own streets, without being accountable to a British red-coat, even +though he challenged them in King George's name. They made some rude +answer to the sentinel. There was a dispute, or, perhaps a scuffle. +Other soldiers heard the noise, and ran hastily from the barracks, to +assist their comrade. At the same time, many of the town's-people rushed +into King Street, by various avenues, and gathered in a crowd round +about the custom-house. It seemed wonderful how such a multitude had +started up, all of a sudden. + +The wrongs and insults, which the people had been suffering for many +months, now kindled them into a rage. They threw snow-balls and lumps of +ice at the soldiers. As the tumult grew louder, it reached the ears of +Captain Preston, the officer of the day. He immediately ordered eight +soldiers of the main guard to take their muskets and follow him. They +marched across the street, forcing their way roughly through the crowd, +and pricking the town's-people with their bayonets. + +A gentleman, (it was Henry Knox, afterwards general of the American +artillery,) caught Captain Preston's arm. + +"For Heaven's sake, sir," exclaimed he, take heed what you do, or here +will be bloodshed." + +"Stand aside!" answered Captain Preston, haughtily. "Do not interfere, +sir. Leave me to manage the affair." + +Arriving at the sentinel's post, Captain Preston drew up his men in a +semi-circle, with their faces to the crowd and their rear to the +custom-house. "When the people saw the officer, and beheld the +threatening attitude with which the soldiers fronted them, their rage +became almost uncontrollable. + +"Fire, you lobster-backs!" bellowed some. + +"You dare not fire, you cowardly red-coats," cried others. + +"Rush upon them!" shouted many voices. "Drive the rascals to their +barracks! Down with them! Down with them! Let them fire, if they dare!" + +Amid the uproar, the soldiers stood glaring at the people, with the +fierceness of men whose trade was to shed blood. + +Oh, what a crisis had now arrived! Up to this very moment, the angry +feelings between England and America might have been pacified. England +had but to stretch out the hand of reconciliation, and acknowledge that +she had hitherto mistaken her rights but would do so no more. Then, the +ancient bonds of brotherhood would again have been knit together, as +firmly as in old times. The habit of loyalty, which had grown as strong +as instinct, was not utterly overcome. The perils shared, the victories +won, in the Old French War, when the soldiers of the colonies fought +side by side with their comrades from beyond the sea, were unforgotten +yet. England was still that beloved country which the colonists called +their home. King George, though he had frowned upon America, was still +reverenced as a father. + +But, should the king's soldiers shed one drop of American blood, then it +was a quarrel to the death. Never--never would America rest satisfied, +until she had torn down the royal authority, and trampled it in the +dust. + +"Fire, if you dare, villains!" hoarsely shouted the people, while the +muzzles of the muskets were turned upon them; "you dare not fire!" + +They appeared ready to rush upon the levelled bayonets. Captain Preston +waved his sword, and uttered a command which could not be distinctly +heard, amid the uproar of shouts that issued from a hundred throats. But +his soldiers deemed that he had spoken the fatal mandate--"fire!" The +flash of their muskets lighted up the street, and the report rang loudly +between the edifices. It was said, too, that the figure of a man with a +cloth hanging down over his face, was seen to step into the balcony of +the custom-house, and discharge a musket at the crowd. + +A gush of smoke had overspread the scene. It rose heavily, as if it were +loath to reveal the dreadful spectacle beneath it. Eleven of the sons of +New England lay stretched upon the street. Some, sorely wounded, were +struggling to rise again. Others stirred not, nor groaned, for they were +past all pain. Blood was streaming upon the snow; and that purple stain, +in the midst of King Street, though it melted away in the next day's +sun, was never forgotten nor forgiven by the people. + + * * * * * + +Grandfather was interrupted by the violent sobs of little Alice. In his +earnestness, he had neglected to soften down the narrative, so that it +might not terrify the heart of this unworldly infant. Since Grandfather +began the history of our chair, little Alice had listened to many tales +of war. But, probably, the idea had never really impressed itself upon +her mind, that men have shed the blood of their fellow-creatures. And +now that this idea was forcibly presented to her, it affected the sweet +child with bewilderment and horror. + +"I ought to have remembered our dear little Alice," said Grandfather +reproachfully to himself. "Oh, what a pity! Her heavenly nature has now +received its first impression of earthly sin and violence. Well, Clara, +take her to bed, and comfort her. Heaven grant that she may dream away +the recollection of the Boston Massacre!" + +"Grandfather," said Charley, when Clara and little Alice had retired, +"did not the people rush upon the soldiers, and take revenge?" + +"The town drums beat to arms," replied Grandfather, "the alarm bells +rang, and an immense multitude rushed into King Street. Many of them had +weapons in their hands. The British prepared to defend themselves. A +whole regiment was drawn up in the street, expecting an attack; for the +townsmen appeared ready to throw themselves upon the bayonets." + +"And how did it end?" asked Charley. + +"Governor Hutchinson hurried to the spot," said Grandfather, "and +besought the people to have patience, promising that strict justice +should be done. A day or two afterward, the British troops were +withdrawn from town, and stationed at Castle William. Captain Preston +and the eight soldiers were tried for murder. But none of them were +found guilty. The judges told the jury that the insults and violence +which had been offered to the soldiers, justified them in firing at the +mob." + +"The Revolution," observed Laurence, who had said but little during the +evening, "was not such a calm, majestic movement as I supposed. I do not +love to hear of mobs and broils in the street. These things were +unworthy of the people, when they had such a great object to +accomplish." + +"Nevertheless, the world has seen no grander movement than that of our +Revolution, from first to last," said Grandfather. "The people, to a +man, were full of a great and noble sentiment. True, there may be much +fault to find with their mode of expressing this sentiment; but they +knew no better--the necessity was upon them to act out their feelings, +in the best manner they could. We must forgive what was wrong in their +actions, and look into their hearts and minds for the honorable motives +that impelled them." + +"And I suppose," said Laurence, "there were men who knew how to act +worthily of what they felt." + +"There were many such," replied Grandfather, "and we will speak of some +of them, hereafter." + +Grandfather here made a pause. That night, Charley had a dream about +the Boston Massacre, and thought that he himself was in the crowd, and +struck down Captain Preston with a great club. Laurence dreamed that he +was sitting in our great chair, at the window of the British Coffee +House, and beheld the whole scene which Grandfather had described. It +seemed to him, in his dream, that if the town's-people and the soldiers +would but have heard him speak a single word, all the slaughter might +have been averted. But there was such an uproar that it drowned his +voice. + +The next morning, the two boys went together to State Street, and stood +on the very spot where the first blood of the Revolution had been shed. +The Old State House was still there, presenting almost the same aspect +that it had worn on that memorable evening, one-and-seventy years ago. +It is the sole remaining witness of the Boston Massacre. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +The next evening the astral lamp was lighted earlier than usual, because +Laurence was very much engaged in looking over the collection of +portraits which had been his New Year's gift from Grandfather. + +Among them he found the features of more than one famous personage who +had been connected with the adventures of our old chair. Grandfather +bade him draw the table nearer to the fire-side; and they looked over +the portraits together, while Clara and Charley likewise lent their +attention. As for little Alice, she sat in Grandfather's lap, and seemed +to see the very men alive, whose faces were there represented. + +Turning over the volume, Laurence came to the portrait of a stern, +grim-looking man, in plain attire, of much more modern fashion than that +of the old Puritans. But the face might well have befitted one of those +iron-hearted men. Beneath the portrait was the name of Samuel Adams. + +"He was a man of great note in all the doings that brought about the +Revolution," said Grandfather. "His character was such, that it seemed +as if one of the ancient Puritans had been sent back to earth, to +animate the people's hearts with the same abhorrence of tyranny, that +had distinguished the earliest settlers. He was as religious as they, as +stern and inflexible, and as deeply imbued with democratic principles. +He, better than any one else, may be taken as a representative of the +people of New England, and of the spirit with which they engaged in the +revolutionary struggle. He was a poor man, and earned his bread by an +humble occupation; but with his tongue and pen, he made the king of +England tremble on his throne. Remember him, my children, as one of the +strong men of our country." + +"Here is one whose looks show a very different character," observed +Laurence, turning to the portrait of John Hancock. "I should think, by +his splendid dress and courtly aspect, that he was one of the king's +friends." + +"There never was a greater contrast than between Samuel Adams and John +Hancock," said Grandfather. "Yet they were of the same side in politics, +and had an equal agency in the Revolution. Hancock was born to the +inheritance of the largest fortune in New England. His tastes and habits +were aristocratic. He loved gorgeous attire, a splendid mansion, +magnificent furniture, stately festivals, and all that was glittering +and pompous in external things. His manners were so polished, that there +stood not a nobleman at the footstool of King George's throne, who was a +more skilful courtier than John Hancock might have been. Nevertheless, +he, in his embroidered clothes, and Samuel Adams in his threadbare coat, +wrought together in the cause of liberty. Adams acted from pure and +rigid principle. Hancock, though he loved his country, yet thought quite +as much of his own popularity as he did of the people's rights. It is +remarkable, that these two men, so very different as I describe them, +were the only two exempted from pardon by the king's proclamation." + +On the next leaf of the book, was the portrait of General Joseph Warren. +Charley recognized the name, and said that here was a greater man than +either Hancock or Adams. + +"Warren was an eloquent and able patriot," replied Grandfather. "He +deserves a lasting memory for his zealous efforts in behalf of liberty. +No man's voice was more powerful in Faneuil Hall than Joseph Warren's. +If his death had not happened so early in the contest, he would probably +have gained a high name as a soldier." + +The next portrait was a venerable man, who held his thumb under his +chin, and, through his spectacles, appeared to be attentively reading a +manuscript. + +"Here we see the most illustrious Boston boy that ever lived," said +Grandfather. "This is Benjamin Franklin! But I will not try to compress, +into a few sentences, the character of the sage, who, as a Frenchman +expressed it, snatched the lightning from the sky, and the sceptre from +a tyrant. Mr. Sparks must help you to the knowledge of Franklin." + +The book likewise contained portraits of James Otis and Josiah Quincy. +Both of them, Grandfather observed, were men of wonderful talents and +true patriotism. Their voices were like the stirring tones of a trumpet, +arousing the country to defend its freedom. Heaven seemed to have +provided a greater number of eloquent men than had appeared at any other +period, in order that the people might be fully instructed as to their +wrongs, and the method of resistance. + +"It is marvellous," said Grandfather, "to see how many powerful writers, +orators, and soldiers started up, just at the time when they were +wanted. There was a man for every kind of work. It is equally wonderful, +that men of such different characters were all made to unite in the one +object of establishing the freedom and independence of America. There +was an overruling Providence above them." + +"Here was another great man," remarked Laurence, pointing to the +portrait of John Adams. + +"Yes; an earnest, warm-tempered, honest, and most able man," said +Grandfather. "At the period of which we are now speaking, he was a +lawyer in Boston. He was destined, in after years, to be ruler over the +whole American people, whom he contributed so much to form into a +nation." + +Grandfather here remarked, that many a New Englander, who had passed +his boyhood and youth in obscurity, afterward attained to a fortune, +which he never could have foreseen, even in his most ambitious dreams. +John Adams, the second president of the United States, and the equal of +crowned kings, was once a schoolmaster and country lawyer. Hancock, the +first signer of the Declaration of Independence, served his +apprenticeship with a merchant. Samuel Adams, afterward governor of +Massachusetts, was a small tradesman and a tax-gatherer. General Warren +was a physician, General Lincoln a farmer, and General Knox a +bookbinder. General Nathaniel Greene, the best soldier, except +Washington, in the revolutionary army, was a Quaker and a blacksmith. +All these became illustrious men, and can never be forgotten in American +history. + +"And any boy, who is born in America, may look forward to the same +things," said our ambitious friend Charley. + +After these observations, Grandfather drew the book of portraits towards +him, and showed the children several British peers and members of +Parliament, who had exerted themselves either for or against the rights +of America. There were the Earl of Bute, Mr. Grenville, and Lord North. +These were looked upon as deadly enemies to our country. + +Among the friends of America was Mr. Pitt, afterward Earl of Chatham, +who spent so much of his wondrous eloquence in endeavoring to warn +England of the consequences of her injustice. He fell down on the floor +of the House of Lords, after uttering almost his dying words in defence +of our privileges as freemen. There was Edmund Burke, one of the wisest +men and greatest orators that ever the world produced. There was Colonel +Barre, who had been among our fathers, and knew that they had courage +enough to die for their rights. There was Charles James Fox, who never +rested until he had silenced our enemies in the House of Commons. + +"It is very remarkable to observe how many of the ablest orators in the +British Parliament were favorable to America," said Grandfather. "We +ought to remember these great Englishmen with gratitude; for their +speeches encouraged our fathers, almost as much as those of our own +orators, in Faneuil Hall, and under Liberty Tree. Opinions, which might +have been received with doubt, if expressed only by a native American, +were set down as true, beyond dispute, when they came from the lips of +Chatham, Burke, Barre, or Fox." + +"But, Grandfather," asked Laurence, "were there no able and eloquent men +in this country who took the part of King George?" + +"There were many men of talent, who said what they could in defence of +the king's tyrannical proceedings," replied Grandfather. "But they had +the worst side of the argument, and therefore seldom said any thing +worth remembering. Moreover their hearts were faint and feeble; for they +felt that the people scorned and detested them. They had no friends, no +defence, except in the bayonets of the British troops. A blight fell +upon all their faculties, because they were contending against the +rights of their own native land." + +"What were the names of some of them?" inquired Charley. + +"Governor Hutchinson, Chief Justice Oliver, Judge Auchmuty, the Reverend +Mather Byles, and several other clergymen, were among the most noted +loyalists," answered Grandfather. + +"I wish the people had tarred and feathered every man of them!" cried +Charley. + +"That wish is very wrong, Charley," said Grandfather. "You must not +think that there was no integrity and honor, except among those who +stood up for the freedom of America. For aught I know, there was quite +as much of these qualities on one side as on the other. Do you see +nothing admirable in a faithful adherence to an unpopular cause? Can you +not respect that principle of loyalty, which made the royalists give up +country, friends, fortune, every thing, rather than be false to their +king? It was a mistaken principle; but many of them cherished it +honorably, and were martyrs to it." + +"Oh, I was wrong!" said Charley, ingenuously. "And I would risk my life, +rather than one of those good old royalists should be tarred and +feathered." + +"The time is now come, when we may judge fairly of them," continued +Grandfather. "Be the good and true men among them honored; for they were +as much our countrymen as the patriots were. And, thank Heaven! our +country need not be ashamed of her sons--of most of them, at +least--whatever side they took in the revolutionary contest." + +Among the portraits was one of King George the Third. Little Alice +clapped her hands, and seemed pleased with the bluff good nature of his +physiognomy. But Laurence thought it strange, that a man with such a +face, indicating hardly a common share of intellect, should have had +influence enough on human affairs, to convulse the world with war. +Grandfather observed, that this poor king had always appeared to him one +of the most unfortunate persons that ever lived. He was so honest and +conscientious, that, if he had been only a private man, his life would +probably have been blameless and happy. But his was that worst of +fortunes, to be placed in a station far beyond his abilities. + +"And so," said Grandfather, "his life, while he retained what intellect +Heaven had gifted him with, was one long mortification. At last, he grew +crazed with care and trouble. For nearly twenty years, the monarch of +England was confined as a madman. In his old age, too, God took away his +eyesight; so that his royal palace was nothing to him but a dark, +lonesome prison-house." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +"Our old chair," resumed Grandfather, "did not now stand in the midst of +a gay circle of British officers. The troops, as I told you, had been +removed to Castle William, immediately after the Boston Massacre. Still, +however, there were many tories, custom-house officers, and Englishmen, +who used to assemble in the British Coffee House, and talk over the +affairs of the period. Matters grew worse and worse; and in 1773, the +people did a deed, which incensed the king and ministry more than any of +their former doings." + +Grandfather here described the affair, which is known by the name of the +Boston Tea Party. The Americans, for some time past, had left off +importing tea, on account of the oppressive tax. The East India Company, +in London, had a large stock of tea on hand, which they had expected to +sell to the Americans, but could find no market for it. But, after a +while, the government persuaded this company of merchants to send the +tea to America. + +"How odd it is," observed Clara, "that the liberties of America should +have had any thing to do with a cup of tea!" + +Grandfather smiled, and proceeded with his narrative. When the people of +Boston heard that several cargoes of tea were coming across the +Atlantic, they held a great many meetings at Faneuil Hall, in the Old +South church, and under Liberty Tree. In the midst of their debates, +three ships arrived in the harbor with the tea on board. The people +spent more than a fortnight in consulting what should be done. At last, +on the 16th of December, 1773, they demanded of Governor Hutchinson, +that he should immediately send the ships back to England. + +The governor replied that the ships must not leave the harbor, until the +custom-house duties upon the tea should be paid. Now, the payment of +these duties was the very thing, against which the people had set their +faces; because it was a tax, unjustly imposed upon America by the +English government. Therefore, in the dusk of the evening, as soon as +Governor Hutchinson's reply was received, an immense crowd hastened to +Griffin's Wharf, where the tea-ships lay. The place is now called +Liverpool Wharf. + +"When the crowd reached the wharf," said Grandfather, "they saw that a +set of wild-looking figures were already on board of the ships. You +would have imagined that the Indian warriors, of old times, had come +back again; for they wore the Indian dress, and had their faces covered +with red and black paint, like the Indians, when they go to war. These +grim figures hoisted the tea chests on the decks of the vessels, broke +them open, and threw all the contents into the harbor." + +"Grandfather," said little Alice, "I suppose Indians don't love tea; +else they would never waste it so." + +"They were not real Indians, my child," answered Grandfather. "They were +white men, in disguise; because a heavy punishment would have been +inflicted on them, if the king's officers had found who they were. But +it was never known. From that day to this, though the matter has been +talked of by all the world, nobody can tell the names of those Indian +figures. Some people say that there were very famous men among them, who +afterwards became governors and generals. Whether this be true, I cannot +tell." + +When tidings of this bold deed were carried to England, King George was +greatly enraged. Parliament immediately passed an act, by which all +vessels were forbidden to take in or discharge their cargoes at the port +of Boston. In this way, they expected to ruin all the merchants, and +starve the poor people, by depriving them of employment. At the same +time, another act was passed, taking away many rights and privileges +which had been granted in the charter of Massachusetts. + +Governor Hutchinson, soon afterward, was summoned to England, in order +that he might give his advice about the management of American affairs. +General Gage, an officer of the Old French War, and since +commander-in-chief of the British forces in America, was appointed +governor in his stead. One of his first acts, was to make Salem, instead +of Boston, the metropolis of Massachusetts, by summoning the General +Court to meet there. + +According to Grandfather's description, this was the most gloomy time +that Massachusetts had ever seen. The people groaned under as heavy a +tyranny as in the days of Sir Edmund Andros. Boston looked as if it were +afflicted with some dreadful pestilence,--so sad were the inhabitants, +and so desolate the streets. There was no cheerful hum of business. The +merchants shut up their warehouses, and the laboring men stood idle +about the wharves. But all America felt interested in the good town of +Boston; and contributions were raised, in many places, for the relief of +the poor inhabitants. + +"Our dear old chair!" exclaimed Clara. "How dismal it must have been +now!" + +"Oh," replied Grandfather, "a gay throng of officers had now come back +to the British Coffee House; so that the old chair had no lack of +mirthful company. Soon after General Gage became governor, a great many +troops had arrived, and were encamped upon the Common. Boston was now a +garrisoned and fortified town; for the general had built a battery +across the neck, on the road to Roxbury, and placed guards for its +defence. Every thing looked as if a civil war were close at hand." + +"Did the people make ready to fight?" asked Charley. + +"A continental Congress assembled at Philadelphia," said Grandfather, +"and proposed such measures as they thought most conducive to the +public good. A provincial Congress was likewise chosen in Massachusetts. +They exhorted the people to arm and discipline themselves. A great +number of minute men were enrolled. The Americans called them minute +men, because they engaged to be ready to fight at a minute's warning. +The English officers laughed, and said that the name was a very proper +one, because the minute men would run away the the minute they saw the +enemy. Whether they would fight or run, was soon to be proved." + +Grandfather told the children, that the first open resistance offered to +the British troops, in the province of Massachusetts was at Salem. +Colonel Timothy Pickering, with thirty or forty militia men, prevented +the English colonel, Leslie, with four times as many regular soldiers, +from taking possession of some military stores. No blood was shed on +this occasion; but, soon afterward, it began to flow. + +General Gage sent eight hundred soldiers to Concord, about eighteen +miles from Boston, to destroy some ammunition and provisions which the +colonists had collected there. They set out on their march in the +evening of the 18th of April, 1775. The next morning, the General sent +Lord Percy, with nine hundred men, to strengthen the troops which had +gone before. All that day, the inhabitants of Boston heard various +rumors. Some said, that the British were making great slaughter among +our countrymen. Others affirmed that every man had turned out with his +musket, and that not a single soldier would ever get back to Boston. + +"It was after sunset," continued Grandfather, "when the troops, who had +marched forth so proudly, were seen entering Charlestown. They were +covered with dust, and so hot and weary that their tongues hung out of +their mouths. Many of them were faint with wounds. They had not all +returned. Nearly three hundred were strewn, dead or dying, along the +road from Concord. The yeomanry had risen upon the invaders, and driven +them back." + +"Was this the battle of Lexington?" asked Charley. + +"Yes," replied Grandfather; "it was so called, because the British, +without provocation, had fired upon a party of minute men, near +Lexington meeting-house, and killed eight of them. That fatal volley, +which was fired by order of Major Pitcairn, began the war of the +Revolution." + +About this time, if Grandfather had been correctly informed, our chair +disappeared from the British Coffee House. The manner of its departure +cannot be satisfactorily ascertained. Perhaps the keeper of the Coffee +House turned it out of doors, on account of its old-fashioned aspect. +Perhaps he sold it as a curiosity. Perhaps it was taken, without leave, +by some person who regarded it as public property, because it had once +figured under Liberty Tree. Or, perhaps, the old chair, being of a +peaceable disposition, had made use of its four oaken legs, and run away +from the seat of war. + +"It would have made a terrible clattering over the pavement," said +Charley, laughing. + +"Meanwhile," continued Grandfather, "during the mysterious +non-appearance of our chair, an army of twenty thousand men had started +up, and come to the siege of Boston. General Gage and his troops were +cooped up within the narrow precincts of the peninsula. On the 17th of +June, 1775, the famous battle of Bunker Hill was fought. Here General +Warren fell. The British got the victory, indeed, but with the loss of +more than a thousand officers and men." + +"O, Grandfather," cried Charley, "you must tell us about that famous +battle." + +"No, Charley," said Grandfather, "I am not like other historians. +Battles shall not hold a prominent place in the history of our quiet and +comfortable old chair. But, to-morrow evening, Laurence, Clara, and +yourself, and dear little Alice too, shall visit the Diorama of Bunker +Hill. There you shall see the whole business, the burning of Charlestown +and all, with your own eyes, and hear the cannon and musketry with your +own ears." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +The next evening but one, when the children had given Grandfather a full +account of the Diorama of Bunker Hill, they entreated him not to keep +them any longer in suspense about the fate of his chair. The reader will +recollect, that at the last accounts, it had trotted away upon its poor +old legs, nobody knew whither. But, before gratifying their curiosity, +Grandfather found it necessary to say something about public events. + +The continental Congress, which was assembled at Philadelphia, was +composed of delegates from all the colonies. They had now appointed +George Washington, of Virginia, to be commander-in-chief of all the +American armies. He was, at that time, a member of Congress, but +immediately left Philadelphia, and began his journey to Massachusetts. +On the 3d of July, 1775, he arrived at Cambridge, and took command of +the troops which were besieging General Gage. + +"O, Grandfather," exclaimed Laurence, "it makes my heart throb to think +what is coming now. We are to see General Washington himself." + +The children crowded around Grandfather, and looked earnestly into his +face. Even little Alice opened her sweet blue eyes, with her lips +apart, and almost held her breath to listen; so instinctive is the +reverence of childhood for the father of his country. Grandfather paused +a moment; for he felt as if it might be irreverent to introduce the +hallowed shade of Washington into a history, where an ancient elbow +chair occupied the most prominent place. However, he determined to +proceed with his narrative, and speak of the hero when it was needful, +but with an unambitious simplicity. + +So Grandfather told his auditors, that, on General Washington's arrival +at Cambridge, his first care was, to reconnoitre the British troops with +his spy-glass, and to examine the condition of his own army. He found +that the American troops amounted to about fourteen thousand men. They +were extended all round the peninsula of Boston, a space of twelve +miles, from the high grounds of Roxbury on the right, to Mystic river on +the left. Some were living in tents of sail-cloth, some in shanties, +rudely constructed of boards, some in huts of stone or turf, with +curious windows and doors of basket-work. + +In order to be near the centre, and oversee the whole of this +wide-stretched army, the commander-in-chief made his head-quarters at +Cambridge, about half a mile from the colleges. A mansion-house, which +perhaps had been the country-seat of some tory gentleman, was provided +for his residence. + +"When General Washington first entered this mansion," said Grandfather, +"he was ushered up the stair-case, and shown into a handsome apartment. +He sat down in a large chair, which was the most conspicuous object in +the room. The noble figure of Washington would have done honor to a +throne. As he sat there, with his hand resting on the hilt of his +sheathed sword, which was placed between his knees, his whole aspect +well befitted the chosen man on whom his country leaned for the defence +of her dearest rights. America seemed safe, under his protection. His +face was grander than any sculptor had ever wrought in marble; none +could behold him without awe and reverence. Never before had the lion's +head, at the summit of the chair, looked down upon such a face and form +as Washington's!" + +"Why! Grandfather," cried Clara, clasping her hands in amazement, "was +it really so? Did General Washington sit in our great chair?" + +"I knew how it would be," said Laurence; "I foresaw it, the moment +Grandfather began to speak." + +Grandfather smiled. But, turning from the personal and domestic life of +the illustrious leader, he spoke of the methods which Washington adopted +to win back the metropolis of New England from the British. + +The army, when he took command of it, was without any discipline or +order. The privates considered themselves as good as their officers, and +seldom thought it necessary to obey their commands, unless they +understood the why and wherefore. Moreover, they were enlisted for so +short a period, that, as soon as they began to be respectable soldiers, +it was time to discharge them. Then came new recruits, who had to be +taught their duty, before they could be of any service. Such was the +army, with which Washington had to contend against more than twenty +veteran British regiments. + +Some of the men had no muskets, and almost all were without bayonets. +Heavy cannon, for battering the British fortifications, were much +wanted. There was but a small quantity of powder and ball, few tools to +build entrenchments with, and a great deficiency of provisions and +clothes for the soldiers. Yet, in spite of these perplexing +difficulties, the eyes of the whole people were fixed on General +Washington, expecting him to undertake some great enterprise against the +hostile army. + +The first thing that he found necessary, was to bring his own men into +better order and discipline. It is wonderful how soon he transformed +this rough mob of country people into the semblance of a regular army. +One of Washington's most invaluable characteristics, was the faculty of +bringing order out of confusion. All business, with which he had any +concern, seemed to regulate itself, as if by magic. The influence of his +mind was like light, gleaming through an unshaped world. It was this +faculty, more than any other, that made him so fit to ride upon the +storm of the Revolution, when every thing was unfixed, and drifting +about in a troubled sea. + +"Washington had not been long at the head of the army," proceeded +Grandfather, "before his soldiers thought as highly of him, as if he had +led them to a hundred victories. They knew that he was the very man whom +the country needed, and the only one who could bring them safely through +the great contest against the might of England. They put entire +confidence in his courage, wisdom, and integrity." + +"And were not they eager to follow him against the British?" asked +Charley. + +"Doubtless they would have gone whithersoever his sword pointed the +way," answered Grandfather; "and Washington was anxious to make a +decisive assault upon the enemy. But as the enterprise was very +hazardous, he called a council of all the generals in the army. +Accordingly, they came from their different posts, and were ushered into +the reception room. The commander-in-chief arose from our great chair to +greet them." + +"What were their names?" asked Charley. + +"There was General Artemas Ward," replied Grandfather, a "lawyer by +profession. He had commanded the troops before Washington's arrival. +Another was General Charles Lee, who had been a colonel in the English +army, and was thought to possess vast military science. He came to the +council, followed by two or three dogs, who were always at his heels. +There was General Putnam, too, who was known all over New England by the +name of Old Put." + +"Was it he who killed the wolf?" inquired Charley. + +"The same," said Grandfather; "and he had done good service in the Old +French War. His occupation was that of a farmer; but he left his plough +in the furrow, at the news of Lexington battle. Then there was General +Gates, who afterward gained great renown at Saratoga, and lost it again +at Camden. General Greene, of Rhode Island, was likewise at the council. +Washington soon discovered him to be one of the best officers in the +army." + +When the Generals were all assembled, Washington consulted them about a +plan for storming the English batteries. But it was their unanimous +opinion that so perilous an enterprise ought not to be attempted. The +army, therefore, continued to besiege Boston, preventing the enemy from +obtaining supplies of provisions, but without taking any immediate +measures to get possession of the town. In this manner, the summer, +autumn, and winter passed away. + +"Many a night, doubtless," said Grandfather, "after Washington had been +all day on horseback, galloping from one post of the army to another, he +used to sit in our great chair, wrapt in earnest thought. Had you seen +him, you might have supposed that his whole mind was fixed on the blue +china tiles, which adorned the old fashioned fire-place. But, in +reality, he was meditating how to capture the British army, or drive it +out of Boston. Once, when there was a hard frost, he formed a scheme to +cross the Charles River on the ice. But the other Generals could not be +persuaded that there was any prospect of success." + +"What were the British doing, all this time?" inquired Charley. + +"They lay idle in the town," replied Grandfather. "General Gage had been +recalled to England, and was succeeded by Sir William Howe. The British +army, and the inhabitants of Boston, were now in great distress. Being +shut up in the town so long, they had consumed almost all their +provisions, and burnt up all their fuel. The soldiers tore down the Old +North church, and used its rotten boards and timbers for fire-wood. To +heighten their distress, the small pox broke out. They probably lost far +more men by cold, hunger, and sickness, than had been slain at Lexington +and Bunker Hill." + +"What a dismal time for the poor women and children!" exclaimed Clara. + +"At length," continued Grandfather, "in March, 1776, General Washington, +who had now a good supply of powder, began a terrible cannonade and +bombardment from Dorchester heights. One of the cannon balls which he +fired into the town, struck the tower of the Brattle Street church, +where it may still be seen. Sir William Howe made preparations to cross +over in boats, and drive the Americans from their batteries, but was +prevented by a violent gale and storm. General Washington next erected a +battery on Nook's hill, so near the enemy, that it was impossible for +them to remain in Boston any longer." + +"Hurra! Hurra!" cried Charley, clapping his hands triumphantly. "I wish +I had been there, to see how sheepish the Englishmen looked." + +And, as Grandfather thought that Boston had never witnessed a more +interesting period than this, when the royal power was in its death +agony, he determined to take a peep into the town, and imagine the +feelings of those who were quitting it forever. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +"Alas! for the poor tories!" said Grandfather. "Until the very last +morning after Washington's troops had shown themselves on Nook's hill, +these unfortunate persons could not believe that the audacious rebels, +as they called the Americans, would ever prevail against King George's +army. But, when they saw the British soldiers preparing to embark on +board of the ships of war, then they knew that they had lost their +country. Could the patriots have known how bitter were their regrets, +they would have forgiven them all their evil deeds, and sent a blessing +after them as they sailed away from their native shore." + +In order to make the children sensible of the pitiable condition of +these men, Grandfather singled out Peter Oliver, chief justice of +Massachusetts under the crown, and imagined him walking through the +streets of Boston, on the morning before he left it forever. + +This effort of Grandfather's fancy may be called-- + + +THE TORY'S FAREWELL. + +Old Chief Justice Oliver threw on his red cloak, and placed his +three-cornered hat on the top of his white wig. In this garb he intended +to go forth and take a parting look at objects that had been familiar +to him from his youth. Accordingly, he began his walk in the north part +of the town, and soon came to Faneuil Hall. This edifice, the cradle of +liberty, had been used by the British officers as a play-house. + +"Would that I could see its walls crumble to dust!" thought the chief +justice; and, in the bitterness of his heart, he shook his fist at the +famous hall. "There began the mischief which now threatens to rend +asunder the British empire. The seditious harangues of demagogues in +Faneuil Hall, have made rebels of a loyal people, and deprived me of my +country." + +He then passed through a narrow avenue, and found himself in King +Street, almost in the very spot which, six years before, had been +reddened by the blood of the Boston Massacre. The chief justice stept +cautiously, and shuddered, as if he were afraid, that, even now, the +gore of his slaughtered countrymen might stain his feet. + +Before him rose the town house, on the front of which were still +displayed the royal arms. Within that edifice he had dispensed justice +to the people, in the days when his name was never mentioned without +honor. There, too, was the balcony whence the trumpet had been sounded, +and the proclamation read to an assembled multitude, whenever a new king +of England ascended the throne. + +"I remember--I remember," said Chief Justice Oliver to himself, "when +his present most sacred majesty was proclaimed. Then how the people +shouted. Each man would have poured out his life-blood to keep a hair of +King George's head from harm. But now, there is scarcely a tongue in all +New England that does not imprecate curses on his name. It is ruin and +disgrace to love him. Can it be possible that a few fleeting years have +wrought such a change!" + +It did not occur to the chief justice, that nothing but the most +grievous tyranny could so soon have changed the people's hearts. +Hurrying from the spot, he entered Cornhill, as the lower part of +Washington Street was then called. Opposite to the town house was the +waste foundation of the Old North church. The sacrilegious hands of the +British soldiers had torn it down, and kindled their barrack fires with +the fragments. + +Further on, he passed beneath the tower of the Old South. The threshold +of this sacred edifice was worn by the iron tramp of horse's feet: for +the interior had been used as a riding-school and rendezvous, for a +regiment of dragoons. As the chief justice lingered an instant at the +door, a trumpet sounded within, and the regiment came clattering forth, +and galloped down the street. They were proceeding to the place of +embarkation. + +"Let them go!" thought the chief justice, with somewhat of an old +puritan feeling in his breast. "No good can come of men who desecrate +the house of God." + +He went on a few steps further, and paused before the Province House. +No range of brick stores had then sprung up to hide the mansion of the +royal governors from public view. It had a spacious court-yard, bordered +with trees, and enclosed with a wrought-iron fence. On the cupola, that +surmounted the edifice, was the gilded figure of an Indian chief, ready +to let fly an arrow from his bow. Over the wide front door was a +balcony, in which the chief justice had often stood, when the governor +and high officers of the province showed themselves to the people. + +While Chief Justice Oliver gazed sadly at the Province House, before +which a sentinel was pacing, the double leaves of the door were thrown +open, and Sir William Howe made his appearance. Behind him came a throng +of officers, whose steel scabbards clattered against the stones, as they +hastened down the court-yard. Sir William Howe was a dark-complexioned +man, stern and haughty in his deportment. He stepped as proudly, in that +hour of defeat, as if he were going to receive the submission of the +rebel general. + +The chief justice bowed and accosted him. + +"This is a grievous hour for both of us, Sir William," said he. + +"Forward! gentlemen," said Sir William Howe to the officers who attended +him: "we have no time to hear lamentations now!" + +And, coldly bowing, he departed. Thus, the chief justice had a +foretaste of the mortifications which the exiled New Englanders +afterwards suffered from the haughty Britons. They were despised even by +that country which they had served more faithfully than their own. + +A still heavier trial awaited Chief Justice Oliver, as he passed onward +from the Province House. He was recognized by the people in the street. +They had long known him as the descendant of an ancient and honorable +family. They had seen him sitting, in his scarlet robes, upon the +judgment seat. All his life long, either for the sake of his ancestors, +or on account of his own dignified station and unspotted character, he +had been held in high respect. The old gentry of the province were +looked upon almost as noblemen, while Massachusetts was under royal +government. + +But now, all hereditary reverence for birth and rank was gone. The +inhabitants shouted in derision, when they saw the venerable form of the +old chief justice. They laid the wrongs of the country, and their own +sufferings during the siege--their hunger, cold, and sickness--partly to +his charge, and to that of his brother Andrew, and his kinsman +Hutchinson. It was by their advice that the king had acted, in all the +colonial troubles. But the day of recompense was come. + +"See the old tory!" cried the people, with bitter laughter. "He is +taking his last look at us. Let him show his white wig among us an hour +hence, and we'll give him a coat of tar and feathers!" + +The chief justice, however, knew that he need fear no violence, so long +as the British troops were in possession of the town. But alas! it was a +bitter thought, that he should leave no loving memory behind him. His +forefathers, long after their spirits left the earth, had been honored +in the affectionate remembrance of the people. But he, who would +henceforth be dead to his native land, would have no epitaph save +scornful and vindictive words. The old man wept. + +"They curse me--they invoke all kinds of evil on my head!" thought he, +in the midst of his tears. "But, if they could read my heart, they would +know that I love New England well. Heaven bless her, and bring her again +under the rule of our gracious king! A blessing, too, on these poor, +misguided people!" + +The chief justice flung out his hands with a gesture, as if he were +bestowing a parting benediction on his countrymen. He had now reached +the southern portion of the town, and was far within the range of cannon +shot from the American batteries. Close beside him was the broad stump +of a tree, which appeared to have been recently cut down. Being weary +and heavy at heart, he was about to sit down upon the stump. + +Suddenly, it flashed upon his recollection, that this was the stump of +Liberty Tree! The British soldiers had cut it down, vainly boasting that +they could as easily overthrow the liberties of America. Under its +shadowy branches, ten years before, the brother of Chief Justice Oliver +had been compelled to acknowledge the supremacy of the people, by taking +the oath which they prescribed. This tree was connected with all the +events that had severed America from England. + +"Accursed tree!" cried the chief justice, gnashing his teeth: for anger +overcame his sorrow. "Would that thou hadst been left standing, till +Hancock, Adams, and every other traitor, were hanged upon thy branches! +Then fitly mightest thou have been hewn down, and cast into the flames." + +He turned back, hurried to Long Wharf without looking behind him, +embarked with the British troops for Halifax, and never saw his country +more. Throughout the remainder of his days, Chief Justice Oliver was +agitated with those same conflicting emotions, that had tortured him, +while taking his farewell walk through the streets of Boston. Deep love +and fierce resentment burned in one flame within his breast. Anathemas +struggled with benedictions. He felt as if one breath of his native air +would renew his life, yet would have died, rather than breathe the same +air with rebels. + +And such, likewise, were the feelings of the other exiles, a thousand +in number, who departed with the British army. Were they not the most +unfortunate of men? + + * * * * * + +"The misfortunes of these exiled tories," observed Laurence, "must have +made them think of the poor exiles of Acadia." + +"They had a sad time of it, I suppose," said Charley. "But I choose to +rejoice with the patriots, rather than be sorrowful with the tories. +Grandfather, what did General Washington do now?" + +"As the rear of the British army embarked from the wharf," replied +Grandfather, "General Washington's troops marched over the neck, through +the fortification gates, and entered Boston in triumph. And now, for the +first time since the pilgrims landed, Massachusetts was free from the +dominion of England. May she never again be subjected to foreign +rule--never again feel the rod of oppression!" + +"Dear Grandfather," asked little Alice, "did General Washington bring +our chair back to Boston?" + +"I know not how long the chair remained at Cambridge," said Grandfather. +"Had it staid there till this time, it could not have found a better or +more appropriate shelter. The mansion which General Washington occupied +is still standing; and his apartments have since been tenanted by +several eminent men. Governor Everett, while a professor in the +university, resided there. So at an after period, did Mr. Sparks, whose +invaluable labors have connected his name with the immortality of +Washington. And, at this very time, a venerable friend and contemporary +of your Grandfather, after long pilgrimages beyond the sea, has set up +his staff of rest at Washington's head-quarters." + +"You mean Professor Longfellow, Grandfather," said Laurence. "Oh, how I +should love to see the author of those beautiful VOICES OF THE NIGHT!" + +"We will visit him next summer," answered Grandfather, "and take Clara +and little Alice with us--and Charley, too, if he will be quiet." + + + + +CHAPTER X. + + +When Grandfather resumed his narrative, the next evening, he told the +children that he had some difficulty in tracing the movements of the +chair, during a short period after General Washington's departure from +Cambridge. + +Within a few months, however, it made its appearance at a shop in +Boston, before the door of which was seen a striped pole. In the +interior was displayed a stuffed alligator, a rattlesnake's skin, a +bundle of Indian arrows, an old-fashioned matchlock gun, a walking-stick +of Governor Winthrop's, a wig of old Cotton Mather's, and a colored +print of the Boston Massacre. In short, it was a barber's shop, kept by +a Mr. Pierce, who prided himself on having shaved General Washington, +Old Put, and many other famous persons. + +"This was not a very dignified situation for our venerable chair," +continued Grandfather; "but, you know, there is no better place for +news, than a barber's shop. All the events of the revolutionary war were +heard of there, sooner than anywhere else. People used to sit in the +chair, reading the newspaper or talking, and waiting to be shaved, +while Mr. Pierce with his scissors and razor, was at work upon the +heads or chins of his other customers." + +"I am sorry the chair could not betake itself to some more suitable +place of refuge," said Laurence. "It was old now, and must have longed +for quiet. Besides, after it had held Washington in its arms, it ought +not to have been compelled to receive all the world. It should have been +put into the pulpit of the Old South Church, or some other consecrated +place." + +"Perhaps so," answered Grandfather. "But the chair, in the course of its +varied existence, had grown so accustomed to general intercourse with +society, that I doubt whether it would have contented itself in the +pulpit of the Old South. There it would have stood solitary, or with no +livelier companion than the silent organ, in the opposite gallery, six +days out of seven. I incline to think, that it had seldom been situated +more to its mind, than on the sanded floor of the snug little barber's +shop." + +Then Grandfather amused his children and himself, with fancying all the +different sorts of people who had occupied our chair, while they awaited +the leisure of the barber. + +There was the old clergyman, such as Dr. Chauncey, wearing a white wig, +which the barber took from his head, and placed upon a wig-block. Half +an hour, perhaps, was spent in combing and powdering this reverend +appendage to a clerical skull. There too, were officers of the +continental army, who required their hair to be pomatumed and +plastered, so as to give them a bold and martial aspect. There, once in +a while, was seen the thin, care-worn, melancholy visage of an old tory, +with a wig that, in times long past, had perhaps figured at a Province +House ball. And there, not unfrequently, sat the rough captain of a +privateer, just returned from a successful cruise, in which he had +captured half a dozen richly laden vessels, belonging to King George's +subjects. And, sometimes, a rosy little school-boy climbed into our +chair, and sat staring, with wide-open eyes, at the alligator, the +rattlesnake, and the other curiosities of the barber's shop. His mother +had sent him, with sixpence in his hand, to get his glossy curls cropped +off. The incidents of the Revolution plentifully supplied the barber's +customers with topics of conversation. They talked sorrowfully of the +death of General Montgomery, and the failure of our troops to take +Quebec; for the New Englanders were now as anxious to get Canada from +the English, as they had formerly been to conquer it from the French. + +"But, very soon," said Grandfather, "came news from Philadelphia, the +most important that America had ever heard of. On the 4th of July, 1776, +Congress had signed the Declaration of Independence. The thirteen +colonies were now free and independent states. Dark as our prospects +were, the inhabitants welcomed these glorious tidings, and resolved to +perish, rather than again bear the yoke of England!" + +"And I would perish too!" cried Charley. + +"It was a great day--a glorious deed!" said Laurence, coloring high +with enthusiasm. "And, Grandfather, I love to think that the sages in +Congress showed themselves as bold and true as the soldiers in the +field. For it must have required more courage to sign the Declaration of +Independence, than to fight the enemy in battle." + +Grandfather acquiesced in Laurence's view of the matter. He then touched +briefly and hastily upon the prominent events of the Revolution. The +thunder-storm of war had now rolled southward, and did not again burst +upon Massachusetts, where its first fury had been felt. But she +contributed her full share to the success of the contest. Wherever a +battle was fought--whether at Long Island, White Plains, Trenton, +Princeton, Brandywine, or German-town--some of her brave sons were found +slain upon the field. + +In October, 1777, General Burgoyne surrendered his army, at Saratoga, to +the American general, Gates. The captured troops were sent to +Massachusetts. Not long afterwards, Doctor Franklin and other American +commissioners made a treaty at Paris, by which France bound herself to +assist our countrymen. The gallant Lafayette was already fighting for +our freedom, by the side of Washington. In 1778, a French fleet, +commanded by Count d'Estaing, spent a considerable time in Boston +Harbor. It marks the vicissitudes of human affairs, that the French, our +ancient enemies, should come hither as comrades and brethren, and that +kindred England should be our foe. + +"While the war was raging in the Middle and Southern States," proceeded +Grandfather, "Massachusetts had leisure to settle a new constitution of +government, instead of the royal charter. This was done in 1780. In the +same year, John Hancock, who had been president of Congress, was chosen +governor of the state. He was the first whom the people had elected, +since the days of old Simon Bradstreet." + +"But, Grandfather, who had been governor since the British were driven +away?" inquired Laurence. "General Gage and Sir William Howe were the +last whom you have told us of." + +"There had been no governor for the last four years," replied +Grandfather. "Massachusetts had been ruled by the legislature, to whom +the people paid obedience of their own accord. It is one of the most +remarkable circumstances in our history, that, when the charter +government was overthrown by the war, no anarchy, nor the slightest +confusion ensued. This was a great honor to the people. But now, Hancock +was proclaimed governor by sound of trumpet; and there was again a +settled government." + +Grandfather again adverted to the progress of the war. In 1781, General +Greene drove the British from the Southern States. In October, of the +same year, General Washington compelled Lord Cornwallis to surrender his +army, at Yorktown, in Virginia. This was the last great event of the +revolutionary contest. King George and his ministers perceived, that all +the might of England could not compel America to renew her allegiance to +the crown. After a great deal of discussion, a treaty of peace was +signed, in September, 1783. + +"Now, at last," said Grandfather, "after weary years of war, the +regiments of Massachusetts returned in peace to their families. Now, the +stately and dignified leaders, such as General Lincoln and General Knox, +with their pondered hair and their uniforms of blue and buff, were seen +moving about the streets." + +"And little boys ran after them, I suppose," remarked Charley; "and the +grown people bowed respectfully." + +"They deserved respect, for they were good men, as well as brave," +answered Grandfather. "Now, too, the inferior officers and privates came +home, to seek some peaceful occupation. Their friends remembered them as +slender and smooth-cheeked young men; but they returned with the erect +and rigid mien of disciplined soldiers. Some hobbled on crutches and +wooden legs; others had received wounds, which were still rankling in +their breasts. Many, alas! had fallen in battle, and perhaps were left +unburied on the bloody field." + +"The country must have been sick of war," observed Laurence. + +"One would have thought so," said Grandfather. "Yet only two or three +years elapsed, before the folly of some misguided men caused another +mustering of soldiers. This affair was called Shays' War, because a +Captain Shays was the chief leader of the insurgents." + +"O Grandfather, don't let there be another war!" cried little Alice, +piteously. + +Grandfather comforted his dear little girl, by assuring her that there +was no great mischief done. Shays's War happened in the latter part of +1786, and the beginning of the following year. Its principal cause was +the badness of the times. The State of Massachusetts, in its public +capacity, was very much in debt. So, likewise, were many of the people. +An insurrection took place, the object of which seems to have been, to +interrupt the course of law, and get rid of debts and taxes. + +James Bowdoin, a good and able man, was now governor of Massachusetts. +He sent General Lincoln, at the head of four thousand men, to put down +the insurrection. This general, who had fought through several hard +campaigns in the Revolution, managed matters like an old soldier, and +totally defeated the rebels, at the expense of very little blood. + +"There is but one more public event to be recorded in the history of our +chair," proceeded Grandfather. "In the year 1794, Samuel Adams was +elected governor of Massachusetts. I have told you what a distinguished +patriot he was, and how much he resembled the stern old Puritans. Could +the ancient freemen of Massachusetts, who lived in the days of the first +charter, have arisen from their graves, they would probably have voted +for Samuel Adams to be governor." + +"Well, Grandfather, I hope he sat in our chair!" said Clara. + +"He did," replied Grandfather. "He had long been in the habit of +visiting the barber's shop, where our venerable chair, philosophically +forgetful of its former dignities, had now spent nearly eighteen not +uncomfortable years. Such a remarkable piece of furniture, so evidently +a relic of long-departed times, could not escape the notice of Samuel +Adams. He made minute researches into its history, and ascertained what +a succession of excellent and famous people had occupied it." + +"How did he find it out?" asked Charley. "For I suppose the chair could +not tell its own history." + +"There used to be a vast collection of ancient letters and other +documents, in the tower of the old South Church," answered Grandfather. +"Perhaps the history of our chair was contained among these. At all +events, Samuel Adams appears to have been well acquainted with it. When +he became governor, he felt that he could have no more honorable seat, +than that which had been the ancient Chair of State. He therefore +purchased it for a trifle, and filled it worthily for three years, as +governor of Massachusetts." + +"And what next?" asked Charley. + +"That is all," said Grandfather, heaving a sigh; for he could not help +being a little sad, at the thought that his stories must close here. +"Samuel Adams died in 1803, at the age of above threescore and ten. He +was a great patriot but a poor man. At his death, he left scarcely +property enough to pay the expenses of his funeral. This precious chair, +among his other effects, was sold at auction; and your Grandfather, who +was then in the strength of his years, became the purchaser." + +Laurence, with a mind full of thoughts, that struggled for expression, +but could find none, looked steadfastly at the chair. + +He had now learned all its history, yet was not satisfied. + +"Oh, how I wish that the chair could speak!" cried he. "After its long +intercourse with mankind--after looking upon the world for ages--what +lessons of golden wisdom it might utter! It might teach a private person +how to lead a good and happy life--or a statesman how to make his +country prosperous!" + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + + +Grandfather was struck by Laurence's idea, that the historic chair +should utter a voice, and thus pour forth the collected wisdom of two +centuries. The old gentleman had once possessed no inconsiderable share +of fancy; and, even now, its fading sunshine occasionally glimmered +among his more sombre reflections. + +As the history of the chair had exhausted all his facts, Grandfather +determined to have recourse to fable. So, after warning the children +that they must not mistake this story for a true one, he related what we +shall call,-- + + +GRANDFATHER'S DREAM. + +Laurence and Clara, where were you last night? Where were you, Charley, +and dear little Alice? You had all gone to rest, and left old +Grandfather to meditate alone, in his great chair. The lamp had grown so +dim, that its light hardly illuminated the alabaster shade. The wood +fire had crumbled into heavy embers, among which the little flames +danced, and quivered, and sported about, like fairies. + +And here sat Grandfather, all by himself. He knew that it was bedtime; +yet he could not help longing to hear your merry voices, or to hold a +comfortable chat with some old friend; because then his pillow would be +visited by pleasant dreams. But, as neither children nor friends were at +hand, Grandfather leaned back in the great chair, and closed his eyes, +for the sake of meditating more profoundly. + +And, when Grandfather's meditations had grown very profound indeed, he +fancied that he heard a sound over his head, as if somebody were +preparing to speak. + +"Hem!" it said, in a dry, husky tone. "H-e-m! Hem!" + +As Grandfather did not know that any person was in the room, he started +up in great surprise, and peeped hither and thither, behind the chair, +and into the recess by the fireside, and at the dark nook yonder, near +the bookcase. Nobody could he see. + +"Pooh!" said Grandfather to himself, "I must have been dreaming." + +But, just as he was going to resume his seat, Grandfather happened to +look at the great chair. The rays of fire-light were flickering upon it +in such a manner that it really seemed as if its oaken frame were all +alive. What! Did it not move its elbow? There, too! It certainly lifted +one of its ponderous fore-legs, as if it had a notion of drawing itself +a little nearer to the fire. Meanwhile, the lion's head nodded at +Grandfather, with as polite and sociable a look as a lion's visage, +carved in oak, could possibly be expected to assume. Well, this is +strange! + +"Good evening, my old friend," said the dry and husky voice, now a +little clearer than before. "We have been intimately acquainted so long, +that I think it high time we have a chat together." + +Grandfather was looking straight at the lion's head, and could not be +mistaken in supposing that it moved its lips. So here the mystery was +all explained. + +"I was not aware," said Grandfather, with a civil salutation to his +oaken companion, "that you possessed the faculty of speech. Otherwise, I +should often have been glad to converse with such a solid, useful, and +substantial, if not brilliant member of society." + +"Oh!" replied the ancient chair, in a quiet and easy tone, for it had +now cleared its throat of the dust of ages. "I am naturally a silent and +incommunicative sort of character. Once or twice, in the course of a +century, I unclose my lips. When the gentle Lady Arbella departed this +life, I uttered a groan. When the honest mint-master weighed his plump +daughter against the pine-tree shillings, I chuckled audibly at the +joke. When old Simon Bradstreet took the place of the tyrant Andros, I +joined in the general huzza, and capered upon my wooden legs, for joy. +To be sure, the bystanders were so fully occupied with their own +feelings, that my sympathy was quite unnoticed." + +"And have you often held a private chat with your friends?" asked +Grandfather. + +"Not often," answered the chair. "I once talked with Sir William Phips, +and communicated my ideas about the witchcraft delusion. Cotton Mather +had several conversations with me, and derived great benefit from my +historical reminiscences. In the days of the Stamp Act, I whispered in +the ear of Hutchinson, bidding him to remember what stock his countrymen +were descended of, and to think whether the spirit of their forefathers +had utterly departed from them. The last man whom I favored with a +colloquy, was that stout old republican, Samuel Adams." + +"And how happens it," inquired Grandfather, "that there is no record nor +tradition of your conversational abilities? It is an uncommon thing to +meet with a chair that can talk." + +"Why, to tell you the truth," said the chair, giving itself a hitch +nearer to the hearth, "I am not apt to choose the most suitable moments +for unclosing my lips. Sometimes I have inconsiderately begun to speak, +when my occupant, lolling back in my arms, was inclined to take an +after-dinner nap. Or, perhaps, the impulse to talk may be felt at +midnight, when the lamp burns dim, and the fire crumbles into decay, and +the studious or thoughtful man finds that his brain is in a mist. +Oftenest, I have unwisely uttered my wisdom in the ears of sick persons, +when the inquietude of fever made them toss about, upon my cushion. And +so it happens, that, though my words make a pretty strong impression at +the moment, yet my auditors invariably remember them only as a dream. I +should not wonder if you, my excellent friend, were to do the same, +to-morrow morning." + +"Nor I either," thought Grandfather to himself. However, he thanked this +respectable old chair for beginning the conversation, and begged to know +whether it had any thing particular to communicate. + +"I have been listening attentively to your narrative of my adventures," +replied the chair, "and it must be owned, that your correctness entitles +you to be held up as a pattern to biographers. Nevertheless, there are a +few omissions, which I should be glad to see supplied. For instance, you +make no mention of the good knight, Sir Richard Saltonstall, nor of the +famous Hugh Peters, nor of those old regicide judges, Whalley, Goffe, +and Dixwell. Yet I have borne the weight of all these distinguished +characters, at one time or another." + +Grandfather promised amendment, if ever he should have an opportunity to +repeat his narrative. The good old chair, which still seemed to retain a +due regard for outward appearance, then reminded him how long a time had +passed, since it had been provided with a new cushion. It likewise +expressed the opinion, that the oaken figures on its back would show to +much better advantage, by the aid of a little varnish. + +"And I have had a complaint in this joint," continued the chair, +endeavoring to lift one of its legs, "ever since Charley trundled his +wheelbarrow against me." + +"It shall be attended to," said Grandfather. "And now, venerable chair, +I have a favor to solicit. During an existence of more than two +centuries, you have had a familiar intercourse with men who were +esteemed the wisest of their day. Doubtless, with your capacious +understanding, you have treasured up many an invaluable lesson of +wisdom. You certainly have had time enough to guess the riddle of life. +Tell us poor mortals, then, how we may be happy!" + +The lion's head fixed its eyes thoughtfully upon the fire, and the whole +chair assumed an aspect of deep meditation. Finally, it beckoned to +Grandfather with its elbow, and made a step sideways towards him, as if +it had a very important secret to communicate. + +"As long as I have stood in the midst of human affairs," said the chair, +with a very oracular enunciation, "I have constantly observed that +JUSTICE, TRUTH, and LOVE, are the chief ingredients of every happy +life." + +"Justice, Truth, and Love!" exclaimed Grandfather. "We need not exist +two centuries to find out that these qualities are essential to our +happiness. This is no secret. Every human being is born with the +instinctive knowledge of it." + +"Ah!" cried the chair, drawing back in surprise. "From what I have +observed of the dealings of man with man, and nation with nation, I +never should have suspected that they knew this all-important secret. +And, with this eternal lesson written in your soul, do you ask me to +sift new wisdom for you, out of my petty existence of two or three +centuries?" + +"But, my dear chair--" said Grandfather. + +"Not a word more," interrupted the chair; "here I close my lips for the +next hundred years. At the end of that period, if I shall have +discovered any new precepts of happiness, better than what Heaven has +already taught you, they shall assuredly be given to the world." + +In the energy of its utterance, the oaken chair seemed to stamp its +foot, and trod, (we hope unintentionally) upon Grandfather's toe. The +old gentleman started, and found that he had been asleep in the great +chair, and that his heavy walking stick had fallen down across his foot. + + * * * * * + +"Grandfather," cried little Alice, clapping her hands, "you must dream a +new dream, every night, about our chair!" + +Laurence, and Clara, and Charley, said the same. But the good old +gentleman shook his head, and declared that here ended the history, real +or fabulous, of GRANDFATHER'S CHAIR. + + + + +BIOGRAPHICAL STORIES + + BENJAMIN WEST, + SIR ISAAC NEWTON, + SAMUEL JOHNSON, + + OLIVER CROMWELL, + BENJAMIN FRANKLIN, + QUEEN CHRISTINA. + +This small volume, and others of a similar character, from the same +hand, have not been composed without a deep sense of responsibility. The +author regards children as sacred, and would not, for the world, cast +any thing into the fountain of a young heart, that might embitter and +pollute its waters. And, even in point of the reputation to be aimed at, +juvenile literature is as well worth cultivating as any other. The +writer, if he succeed in pleasing his little readers, may hope to be +remembered by them till their own old age--a far longer period of +literary existence than is generally attained, by those who seek +immortality from the judgments of full grown men. + + + + +BIOGRAPHICAL STORIES. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +When Edward Temple was about eight or nine years old, he was afflicted +with a disorder of the eyes. It was so severe, and his sight was +naturally so delicate, that the surgeon felt some apprehensions lest the +boy should become totally blind. He therefore gave strict directions to +keep him in a darkened chamber, with a bandage over his eyes. Not a ray +of the blessed light of Heaven could be suffered to visit the poor lad. + +This was a sad thing for Edward! It was just the same as if there were +to be no more sunshine, nor moonlight, nor glow of the cheerful fire, +nor light of lamps. A night had begun which was to continue perhaps for +months,--a longer and drearier night than that which voyagers are +compelled to endure, when their ship is ice-bound, throughout the +winter, in the Arctic Ocean. His dear father and mother, his brother +George, and the sweet face of little Emily Robinson, must all vanish, +and leave him in utter darkness and solitude. Their voices and +footsteps, it is true, would be heard around him; he would feel his +mother's embrace, and the kind pressure of all their hands; but still it +would seem as if they were a thousand miles away. + +And then his studies! They were to be entirely given up. This was +another grievous trial; for Edward's memory hardly went back to the +period when he had not known how to read. Many and many a holiday had he +spent at his book, poring over its pages until the deepening twilight +confused the print, and made all the letters run into long words. Then +would he press his hands across his eyes, and wonder why they pained him +so, and, when the candles were lighted, what was the reason that they +burned so dimly, like the moon in a foggy night. Poor little fellow! So +far as his eyes were concerned, he was already an old man, and needed a +pair of spectacles almost as much as his own grandfather did. + +And now, alas! the time was come, when even grandfather's spectacles +could not have assisted Edward to read. After a few bitter tears, which +only pained his eyes the more, the poor boy submitted to the surgeon's +orders. His eyes were bandaged, and, with his mother on one side, and +his little friend Emily on the other, he was led into a darkened +chamber. + +"Mother, I shall be very miserable," said Edward, sobbing. + +"Oh, no, my dear child!" replied his mother, cheerfully. "Your eyesight +was a precious gift of Heaven, it is true; but you would do wrong to be +miserable for its loss, even if there were no hope of regaining it. +There are other enjoyments, besides what come to us through our eyes." + +"None that are worth having," said Edward. + +"Ah! but you will not think so long," rejoined Mrs. Temple, with +tenderness. "All of us--your father, and myself, and George, and our +sweet Emily--will try to find occupation and amusement for you. We will +use all our eyes to make you happy. Will not they be better than a +single pair?" + +"I will sit by you all day long," said Emily, in her low, sweet voice, +putting her hand into that of Edward. + +"And so will I, Ned," said George, his elder brother,--"school time and +all, if my father will permit me." + +Edward's brother George was three or four years older than himself, a +fine, hardy lad, of a bold and ardent temper. He was the leader of his +comrades in all their enterprises and amusements. As to his proficiency +at study, there was not much to be said. He had sense and ability enough +to have made himself a scholar, but found so many pleasanter things to +do, that he seldom took hold of a book with his whole heart. So fond was +George of boisterous sports and exercises, that it was really a great +token of affection and sympathy, when he offered to sit all day long in +a dark chamber, with his poor brother Edward. + +As for little Emily Robinson, she was the daughter of one of Mr. +Temple's dearest friends. Ever since her mother went to Heaven, (which +was soon after Emily's birth,) the little girl had dwelt in the +household where we now find her. Mr. and Mrs. Temple seemed to love her +as well as their own children; for they had no daughter except Emily; +nor would the boys have known the blessing of a sister, had not this +gentle stranger come to teach them what it was. If I could show you +Emily's face, with her dark hair smoothed away from her forehead, you +would be pleased with her look of simplicity and loving-kindness, but +might think that she was somewhat too grave for a child of seven years +old. But you would not love her the less for that. + +So brother George, and this loving little girl, were to be Edward's +companions and playmates, while he should be kept prisoner in the dark +chamber. When the first bitterness of his grief was over, he began to +feel that there might be some comforts and enjoyments in life, even for +a boy whose eyes were covered with a bandage. + +"I thank you, dear mother," said he, with only a few sobs, "and you, +Emily; and you too, George. You will all be very kind to me, I know. And +my father--will not he come and see me, every day?" + +"Yes, my dear boy," said Mr. Temple; for, though invisible to Edward, he +was standing close beside him. "I will spend some hours of every day +with you. And as I have often amused you by relating stories and +adventures, while you had the use of your eyes, I can do the same, now +that you are unable to read. Will this please you, Edward?" + +"Oh, very much!" replied Edward. + +"Well then," said his father, "this evening we will begin the series of +Biographical Stories, which I promised you some time ago." + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +When evening came, Mr. Temple found Edward considerably revived in +spirits, and disposed to be resigned to his misfortune. Indeed, the +figure of the boy, as it was dimly seen by the fire-light, reclining in +a well stuffed easy-chair, looked so very comfortable that many people +might have envied him. When a man's eyes have grown old with gazing at +the ways of the world, it does not seem such a terrible misfortune to +have them bandaged. + +Little Emily Robinson sat by Edward's side, with the air of an +accomplished nurse. As well as the duskiness of the chamber would +permit, she watched all his motions, and each varying expression of his +face, and tried to anticipate her patient's wishes, before his tongue +could utter them. Yet it was noticeable, that the child manifested an +indescribable awe and disquietude, whenever she fixed her eyes on the +bandage; for to her simple and affectionate heart, it seemed as if her +dear friend Edward was separated from her, because she could not see his +eyes. A friend's eyes tell us many things, which could never be spoken +by the tongue. + +George, likewise, looked awkward and confused, as stout and healthy boys +are accustomed to do, in the society of the sick or afflicted. Never +having felt pain or sorrow, they are abashed, from not knowing how to +sympathize with the sufferings of others. + +"Well, my dear Edward," inquired Mrs. Temple, "is your chair quite +comfortable? and has your little nurse provided for all your wants? If +so, your father is ready to begin his stories." + +"Oh, I am very well now," answered Edward, with a faint smile. "And my +ears have not forsaken me, though my eyes are good for nothing. So, +pray, dear father, begin!" + +It was Mr. Temple's design to tell the children a series of true +stories, the incidents of which should be taken from the childhood and +early life of eminent people. Thus he hoped to bring George, and Edward, +and Emily, into closer acquaintance with the famous persons who have +lived in other times, by showing that they also had been children once. +Although Mr. Temple was scrupulous to relate nothing but what was +founded on fact, yet he felt himself at liberty to clothe the incidents +of his narrative in a new coloring, so that his auditors might +understand them the better. + +"My first story," said he, "shall be about a painter of pictures." + +"Dear me!" cried Edward, with a sigh. "I am afraid I shall never look at +pictures any more." + +"We will hope for the best," answered his father. "In the mean time, you +must try to see things within your own mind." + +Mr. Temple then began the following story: + + +BENJAMIN WEST. + +BORN 1738. DIED 1820. + + +In the year 1738, there came into the world, in the town of Springfield, +Pennsylvania, a Quaker infant, from whom his parents and neighbors +looked for wonderful things. A famous preacher of the Society of Friends +had prophesied about little Ben, and foretold that he would be one of +the most remarkable characters that had appeared on earth since the days +of William Penn. On this account, the eyes of many people were fixed +upon the boy. Some of his ancestors had won great renown in the old wars +of England and France; but it was probably expected that Ben would +become a preacher, and would convert multitudes to the peaceful +doctrines of the Quakers. Friend West and his wife were thought to be +very fortunate in having such a son. + +Little Ben lived to the ripe age of six years, without doing any thing +that was worthy to be told in history. But, one summer afternoon, in his +seventh year, his mother put a fan into his hand, and bade him keep the +flies away from the face of a little babe, who lay fast asleep in the +cradle. She then left the room. + +The boy waved the fan to-and-fro, and drove away the buzzing flies +whenever they had the impertinence to come near the baby's face. When +they had all flown out of the window, or into distant parts of the +room, he bent over the cradle, and delighted himself with gazing at the +sleeping infant. It was, indeed, a very pretty sight. The little +personage in the cradle slumbered peacefully, with its waxen hands under +its chin, looking as full of blissful quiet as if angels were singing +lullabies in its ear. Indeed, it must have been dreaming about Heaven; +for, while Ben stooped over the cradle, the little baby smiled. + +"How beautiful she looks!" said Ben to himself. "What a pity it is, that +such a pretty smile should not last forever!" + +Now Ben, at this period of his life, had never heard of that wonderful +art, by which a look, that appears and vanishes in a moment, may be made +to last for hundreds of years. But, though nobody had told him of such +an art, he may be said to have invented it for himself. On a table, near +at hand, there were pens and paper, and ink of two colors, black and +red. The boy seized a pen and sheet of paper, and kneeling down beside +the cradle, began to draw a likeness of the infant. While he was busied +in this manner, he heard his mother's step approaching, and hastily +tried to conceal the paper. + +"Benjamin, my son, what hast thou been doing?" inquired his mother, +observing marks of confusion in his face. + +At first, Ben was unwilling to tell; for he felt as if there might be +something wrong in stealing the baby's face, and putting it upon a sheet +of paper. However, as his mother insisted, he finally put the sketch +into her hand, and then hung his head, expecting to be well scolded. But +when the good lady saw what was on the paper, in lines of red and black +ink, she uttered a scream of surprise and joy. + +"Bless me!" cried she. "It is a picture of little Sally!" + +And then she threw her arms round our friend Benjamin, and kissed him so +tenderly, that he never afterwards was afraid to show his performances +to his mother. + +As Ben grew older, he was observed to take vast delight in looking at +the hues and forms of nature. For instance, he was greatly pleased with +the blue violets of spring, the wild roses of summer, and the scarlet +cardinal-flowers of early autumn. In the decline of the year, when the +woods were variegated with all the colors of the rainbow, Ben seemed to +desire nothing better than to gaze at them from morn till night. The +purple and golden clouds of sunset were a joy to him. And he was +continually endeavoring to draw the figures of trees, men, mountains, +houses, cattle, geese, ducks, and turkeys, with a piece of chalk, on +barn-doors, or on the floor. + +In these old times, the Mohawk Indians were still numerous in +Pennsylvania. Every year a party of them used to pay a visit to +Springfield, because the wigwams of their ancestors had formerly stood +there. These wild men grew fond of little Ben, and made him very happy +by giving him some of the red and yellow paint with which they were +accustomed to adorn their faces. His mother, too, presented him with a +piece of indigo. Thus he now had three colors,--red, blue, and +yellow--and could manufacture green, by mixing the yellow with the blue. +Our friend Ben was overjoyed, and doubtless showed his gratitude to the +Indians by taking their likenesses, in the strange dresses which they +wore, with feathers, tomahawks, and bows and arrows. + +But, all this time, the young artist had no paint-brushes, nor were +there any to be bought, unless he had sent to Philadelphia on purpose. +However, he was a very ingenious boy, and resolved to manufacture +paint-brushes for himself. With this design, he laid hold upon--what do +you think? why, upon a respectable old black cat, who was sleeping +quietly by the fireside. + +"Puss," said little Ben to the cat, "pray give me some of the fur from +the tip of thy tail!" + +Though he addressed the black cat so civilly, yet Ben was determined to +have the fur, whether she were willing or not. Puss, who had no great +zeal for the fine arts, would have resisted if she could; but the boy +was armed with his mother's scissors, and very dexterously clipped off +fur enough to make a paint-brush. This was of so much use to him, that +he applied to Madam Puss again and again, until her warm coat of fur had +become so thin and ragged, that she could hardly keep comfortable +through the winter. Poor thing! she was forced to creep close into the +chimney-corner, and eyed Ben with a very rueful physiognomy. But Ben +considered it more necessary that he should have paint-brushes, than +that Puss should be warm. + +About this period, Friend West received a visit from Mr. Pennington, a +merchant of Philadelphia, who was likewise a member of the Society of +Friends. The visitor, on entering the parlor, was surprised to see it +ornamented with drawings of Indian chiefs, and of birds with beautiful +plumage, and of the wild flowers of the forest. Nothing of the kind was +ever seen before in the habitation of a Quaker farmer. + +"Why, Friend West," exclaimed the Philadelphia merchant, "what has +possessed thee to cover thy walls with all these pictures? Where on +earth didst thou get them?" + +Then Friend West explained, that all these pictures were painted by +little Ben, with no better materials than red and yellow ochre and a +piece of indigo, and with brushes made of the black cat's fur. + +"Verily," said Mr. Pennington, "the boy hath a wonderful faculty. Some +of our friends might look upon these matters as vanity; but little +Benjamin appears to have been born a painter; and Providence is wiser +than we are." + +The good merchant patted Benjamin on the head, and evidently considered +him a wonderful boy. When his parents saw how much their son's +performances were admired, they no doubt remembered the prophecy of the +old Quaker preacher, respecting Ben's future eminence. Yet they could +not understand how he was ever to become a very great and useful man, +merely by making pictures. + +One evening, shortly after Mr. Pennington's return to Philadelphia, a +package arrived at Springfield, directed to our little friend Ben. + +"What can it possibly be?" thought Ben, when it was put into his hands. +"Who can have sent me such a great square package as this!" + +On taking off the thick brown paper which enveloped it, behold! there +was a paint-box, with a great many cakes of paint, and brushes of +various sizes. It was the gift of good Mr. Pennington. There were +likewise several squares of canvas, such as artists use for painting +pictures upon, and, in addition to all these treasures, some beautiful +engravings of landscapes. These were the first pictures that Ben had +ever seen, except those of his own drawing. + +What a joyful evening was this for the little artist! At bedtime, he put +the paint-box under his pillow, and got hardly a wink of sleep; for, all +night long, his fancy was painting pictures in the darkness. In the +morning, he hurried to the garret, and was seen no more till the +dinner-hour; nor did he give himself time to eat more than a mouthful or +two of food, before he hurried back to the garret again. The next day, +and the next, he was just as busy as ever; until at last his mother +thought it time to ascertain what he was about. She accordingly followed +him to the garret. + +On opening the door, the first object that presented itself to her eyes +was our friend Benjamin, giving the last touches to a beautiful picture. +He had copied portions of two of the engravings, and made one picture +out of both, with such admirable skill that it was far more beautiful +than the originals. The grass, the trees, the water, the sky, and the +houses, were all painted in their proper colors. There, too, was the +sunshine and the shadow, looking as natural as life. + +"My dear child, thou hast done wonders!" cried his mother. + +The good lady was in an ecstasy of delight. And well might she be proud +of her boy; for there were touches in this picture, which old artists, +who had spent a lifetime in the business, need not have been ashamed of. +Many a year afterwards, this wonderful production was exhibited at the +Royal Academy in London. + +When Benjamin was quite a large lad, he was sent to school at +Philadelphia. Not long after his arrival, he had a slight attack of +fever, which confined him to his bed. The light, which would otherwise +have disturbed him, was excluded from his chamber by means of closed +wooden shutters. At first, it appeared so totally dark, that Ben could +not distinguish any object in the room. By degrees, however, his eyes +became accustomed to the scanty light. + +He was lying on his back, looking up towards the ceiling, when suddenly +he beheld the dim apparition of a white cow, moving slowly over his +head! Ben started, and rubbed his eyes, in the greatest amazement. + +"What can this mean?" thought he. + +The white cow disappeared; and next came several pigs, who trotted along +the ceiling, and vanished into the darkness of the chamber. So lifelike +did these grunters look, that Ben almost seemed to hear them squeak. + +"Well, this is very strange!" said Ben to himself. + +When the people of the house came to see him, Benjamin told them of the +marvellous circumstance which had occurred. But they would not believe +him. + +"Benjamin, thou art surely out of thy senses!" cried they. "How is it +possible that a white cow and a litter of pigs should be visible on the +ceiling of a dark chamber?" + +Ben, however, had great confidence in his own eyesight, and was +determined to search the mystery to the bottom. For this purpose, when +he was again left alone, he got out of bed, and examined the +window-shutters. He soon perceived a small chink in one of them, through +which a ray of light found its passage, and rested upon the ceiling. Now +the science of optics will inform us, that the pictures of the white cow +and the pigs, and of other objects out of doors, came into the dark +chamber, through this narrow chink, and were painted over Benjamin's +head. It is greatly to his credit, that he discovered the scientific +principle of this phenomenon, and, by means of it, constructed a Camera +Obscura, or Magic Lantern, out of a hollow box. This was of great +advantage to him in drawing landscapes. + +Well; time went on, and Benjamin continued to draw and paint pictures, +until he had now reached the age when it was proper that he should +choose a business for life. His father and mother were in considerable +perplexity about him. According to the ideas of the Quakers it is not +right for people to spend their lives in occupations that are of no real +and sensible advantage to the world. Now, what advantage could the world +expect from Benjamin's pictures? This was a difficult question; and, in +order to set their minds at rest, his parents determined to consult the +preachers and wise men of their society. Accordingly, they all assembled +in the meeting-house, and discussed the matter from beginning to end. + +Finally, they came to a very wise decision. It seemed so evident that +Providence had created Benjamin to be a painter, and had given him +abilities which would be thrown away in any other business, that the +Quakers resolved not to oppose his inclination. They even acknowledged +that the sight of a beautiful picture might convey instruction to the +mind, and might benefit the heart, as much as a good book or a wise +discourse. They therefore committed the youth to the direction of God, +being well assured that he best knew what was his proper sphere of +usefulness. The old men laid their hands upon Benjamin's head, and gave +him their blessing, and the women kissed him affectionately. All +consented that he should go forth into the world, and learn to be a +painter, by studying the best pictures of ancient and modern times. + +So our friend Benjamin left the dwelling of his parents, and his native +woods and streams, and the good Quakers of Springfield, and the Indians +who had given him his first colors,--he left all the places and persons +whom he had hitherto known,--and returned to them no more. He went first +to Philadelphia, and afterwards to Europe. Here he was noticed by many +great people, but retained all the sobriety and simplicity which he had +learned among the Quakers. It is related of him, that, when he was +presented at the court of the Prince of Parma, he kept his hat upon his +head, even while kissing the Prince's hand. + +When he was twenty-five years old, he went to London, and established +himself there as an artist. In due course of time, he acquired great +fame by his pictures, and was made chief painter to King George the +Third, and President of the Royal Academy of Arts. When the Quakers of +Pennsylvania heard of his success, they felt that the prophecy of the +old preacher, as to little Ben's future eminence, was now accomplished. +It is true, they shook their heads at his pictures of battle and +bloodshed, such as the Death of Wolfe,--thinking that these terrible +scenes should not be held up to the admiration of the world. + +But they approved of the great paintings in which he represented the +miracles and sufferings of the Redeemer of Mankind. King George employed +him to adorn a large and beautiful chapel, at Windsor Castle, with +pictures of these sacred subjects. He likewise painted a magnificent +picture of Christ Healing the Sick, which he gave to the Hospital at +Philadelphia. It was exhibited to the public, and produced so much +profit that the Hospital was enlarged, so as to accommodate thirty more +patients. If Benjamin West had done no other good deed than this, yet it +would have been enough to entitle him to an honorable remembrance +forever. At this very day, there are thirty poor people in the Hospital, +who owe all their comforts to that same picture. + +We shall mention only a single incident more. The picture of Christ +Healing the Sick was exhibited at the Royal Academy in London, where it +covered a vast space, and displayed a multitude of figures as large as +life. On the wall, close beside this admirable picture, hung a small and +faded landscape. It was the same that little Ben had painted in his +father's garret, after receiving the paint-box and engravings from good +Mr. Pennington. + +He lived many years, in peace and honor, and died in 1820, at the age of +eighty-two. The story of his life is almost as wonderful as a fairy +tale; for there are few stranger transformations than that of a little +unknown Quaker boy, in the wilds of America, into the most distinguished +English painter of his day. Let us each make the best use of our natural +abilities, as Benjamin West did; and with the blessing of Providence, we +shall arrive at some good end. As for fame, it is but little matter +whether we acquire it or not. + + * * * * * + +"Thank you for the story, my dear father," said Edward, when it was +finished. "Do you know, that it seems as if I could see things without +the help of my eyes? While you were speaking, I have seen little Ben, +and the baby in its cradle, and the Indians, and the white cow and the +pigs, and kind Mr. Pennington, and all the good old Quakers, almost as +plainly as if they were in this very room." + +"It is because your attention was not disturbed by outward objects," +replied Mr. Temple. "People, when deprived of sight, often have more +vivid ideas than those who possess the perfect use of their eyes. I will +venture to say that George has not attended to the story quite so +closely." + +"No indeed," said George, "but it was a very pretty story for all that. +How I should have laughed to see Ben making a paint-brush out of the +black cat's tail! I intend to try the experiment with Emily's kitten." + +"Oh, no, no, George!" cried Emily, earnestly. "My kitten cannot spare +her tail." + +Edward being an invalid, it was now time for him to retire to bed. When +the family bade him good night, he turned his face towards them, looking +very loth to part. + +"I shall not know when morning comes," said he sorrowfully. "And besides +I want to hear your voices all the time; for, when nobody is speaking, +it seems as if I were alone in a dark world!" + +"You must have faith, my dear child," replied his mother. "Faith is the +soul's eyesight; and when we possess it, the world is never dark nor +lonely." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +The next day, Edward began to get accustomed to his new condition of +life. Once, indeed, when his parents were out of the way, and only Emily +was left to take care of him, he could not resist the temptation to +thrust aside the bandage, and peep at the anxious face of his little +nurse. But, in spite of the dimness of the chamber, the experiment +caused him so much pain, that he felt no inclination to take another +look. So, with a deep sigh, he resigned himself to his fate. + +"Emily, pray talk to me!" said he, somewhat impatiently. + +Now, Emily was a remarkably silent little girl, and did not possess that +liveliness of disposition which renders some children such excellent +companions. She seldom laughed, and had not the faculty of making many +words about small matters. But the love and earnestness of her heart +taught her how to amuse poor Edward, in his darkness. She put her +knitting-work into his hands. + +"You must learn how to knit," said she. + +"What! without using my eyes?" cried Edward. + +"I can knit with my eyes shut," replied Emily. + +Then, with her own little hands, she guided Edward's fingers, while he +set about this new occupation. So awkward were his first attempts, that +any other little girl would have laughed heartily. But Emily preserved +her gravity, and showed the utmost patience in taking up the innumerable +stitches which he let down. In the course of an hour or two, his +progress was quite encouraging. + +When evening came, Edward acknowledged that the day had been far less +wearisome than he anticipated. But he was glad, nevertheless, when his +father and mother, and George and Emily, all took their seats around his +chair. He put out his hand to grasp each of their hands, and smiled with +a very bright expression upon his lips. + +"Now I can see you all, with my mind's eye," said he; "and now, father, +pray tell us another story." + +So Mr. Temple began. + + +SIR ISAAC NEWTON. + +BORN 1642. DIED 1727. + +On Christmas-day, in the year 1642, Isaac Newton was born, at the small +village of Woolsthorpe, in England. Little did his mother think, when +she beheld her new-born babe, that he was destined to explain many +matters which had been a mystery ever since the creation of the world. + +Isaac's father being dead, Mrs. Newton was married again to a +clergyman, and went to reside at North Witham. Her son was left to the +care of his good old grandmother, who was very kind to him, and sent him +to school. In his early years, Isaac did not appear to be a very bright +scholar, but was chiefly remarkable for his ingenuity in all mechanical +occupations. He had a set of little tools, and saws of various sizes, +manufactured by himself. With the aid of these, Isaac contrived to make +many curious articles, at which he worked with so much skill, that he +seemed to have been born with a saw or chisel in his hand. + +The neighbors looked with vast admiration at the things which Isaac +manufactured. And his old grandmother, I suppose, was never weary of +talking about him. + +"He'll make a capital workman, one of these days," she would probably +say. "No fear but what Isaac will do well in the world, and be a rich +man before he dies." + +It is amusing to conjecture what were the anticipations of his +grandmother and the neighbors, about Isaac's future life. Some of them, +perhaps, fancied that he would make beautiful furniture of mahogany, +rose-wood, or polished oak, inlaid with ivory and ebony, and +magnificently gilded. And then, doubtless, all the rich people would +purchase these fine things, to adorn their drawing-rooms. Others +probably thought that little Isaac was destined to be an architect, and +would build splendid mansions for the nobility and gentry, and churches +too, with the tallest steeples that had ever been seen in England. + +Some of his friends, no doubt, advised Isaac's grandmother to apprentice +him to a clockmaker; for, besides his mechanical skill, the boy seemed +to have a taste for mathematics, which would be very useful to him in +that profession. And then, in due time, Isaac would set up for himself, +and would manufacture curious clocks, like those that contain sets of +dancing figures, which issue from the dial-plate when the hour is +struck; or like those, where a ship sails across the face of the clock, +and is seen tossing up and down on the waves, as often as the pendulum +vibrates. + +Indeed, there was some ground for supposing that Isaac would devote +himself to the manufacture of clocks; since he had already made one, of +a kind which nobody had ever heard of before. It was set a-going, not by +wheels and weights, like other clocks, but by the dropping of water. +This was an object of great wonderment to all the people roundabout; and +it must be confessed that there are few boys, or men either, who could +contrive to tell what o'clock it is, by means of a bowl of water. + +Besides the water-clock, Isaac made a sun-dial. Thus his grandmother was +never at a loss to know the hour; for the water-clock would tell it in +the shade, and the dial in the sunshine. The sun-dial is said to be +still in existence at Woolsthorpe, on the corner of the house where +Isaac dwelt. If so, it must have marked the passage of every sunny hour +that has elapsed, since Isaac Newton was a boy. It marked all the famous +moments of his life; it marked the hour of his death; and still the +sunshine creeps slowly over it, as regularly as when Isaac first set it +up. + +Yet we must not say that the sun-dial has lasted longer than its maker; +for Isaac Newton will exist, long after the dial--yea, and long after +the sun itself--shall have crumbled to decay. + +Isaac possessed a wonderful faculty of acquiring knowledge by the +simplest means. For instance, what method do you suppose he took, to +find out the strength of the wind? You will never guess how the boy +could compel that unseen, inconstant, and ungovernable wanderer, the +wind, to tell him the measure of its strength. Yet nothing can be more +simple. He jumped against the wind; and by the length of his jump, he +could calculate the force of a gentle breeze, a brisk gale, or a +tempest. Thus, even in his boyish sports, he was continually searching +out the secrets of philosophy. + +Not far from his grandmother's residence there was a windmill, which +operated on a new plan. Isaac was in the habit of going thither +frequently, and would spend whole hours in examining its various parts. +While the mill was at rest, he pryed into its internal machinery. When +its broad sails were set in motion by the wind, he watched the process +by which the mill-stones were made to revolve, and crush the grain that +was put into the hopper. After gaining a thorough knowledge of its +construction, he was observed to be unusually busy with his tools. + +It was not long before his grandmother, and all the neighborhood, knew +what Isaac had been about. He had constructed a model of the windmill. +Though not so large, I suppose as one of the box-traps which boys set to +catch squirrels, yet every part of the mill and its machinery was +complete. Its little sails were neatly made of linen, and whirled round +very swiftly when the mill was placed in a draught of air. Even a puff +of wind from Isaac's mouth, or from a pair of bellows, was sufficient to +set the sails in motion. And--what was most curious--if a handful of +grains of wheat were put into the little hopper, they would soon be +converted into snow-white flour. + +Isaac's playmates were enchanted with his new windmill. They thought +that nothing so pretty, and so wonderful, had ever been seen in the +whole world. + +"But, Isaac," said one of them, "you have forgotten one thing that +belongs to a mill." + +"What is that?" asked Isaac; for he supposed, that, from the roof of the +mill to its foundation, he had forgotten nothing. + +"Why, where is the miller?" said his friend. + +"That is true!--I must look out for one," said Isaac; and he set himself +to consider how the deficiency should be supplied. + +He might easily have made the miniature figure of a man; but then it +would not have been able to move about, and perform the duties of a +miller. As Captain Lemuel Gulliver had not yet discovered the island of +Lilliput, Isaac did not know that there were little men in the world, +whose size was just suited to his windmill. It so happened, however, +that a mouse had just been caught in the trap; and, as no other miller +could be found, Mr. Mouse was appointed to that important office. The +new miller made a very respectable appearance in his dark gray coat. To +be sure, he had not a very good character for honesty, and was suspected +of sometimes stealing a portion of the grain which was given him to +grind. But perhaps some two-legged millers are quite as dishonest as +this small quadruped. + +As Isaac grew older, it was found that he had far more important matters +in his mind than the manufacture of toys, like the little windmill. All +day long, if left to himself, he was either absorbed in thought, or +engaged in some book of mathematics, or natural philosophy. At night, I +think it probable, he looked up with reverential curiosity to the stars, +and wondered whether they were worlds, like our own,--and how great was +their distance from the earth,--and what was the power that kept them in +their courses. Perhaps, even so early in life, Isaac Newton felt a +presentiment that he should be able, hereafter, to answer all these +questions. + +When Isaac was fourteen years old, his mother's second husband being +now dead, she wished her son to leave school, and assist her in managing +the farm at Woolsthorpe. For a year or two, therefore, he tried to turn +his attention to farming. But his mind was so bent on becoming a +scholar, that his mother sent him back to school, and afterwards to the +University of Cambridge. + +I have now finished my anecdotes of Isaac Newton's boyhood. My story +would be far too long, were I to mention all the splendid discoveries +which he made, after he came to be a man. He was the first that found +out the nature of Light; for, before his day, nobody could tell what the +sunshine was composed of. You remember, I suppose, the story of an +apple's falling on his head, and thus leading him to discover the force +of gravitation, which keeps the heavenly bodies in their courses. When +he had once got hold of this idea, he never permitted his mind to rest, +until he had searched out all the laws, by which the planets are guided +through the sky. This he did as thoroughly as if he had gone up among +the stars, and tracked them in their orbits. The boy had found out the +mechanism of a windmill; the man explained to his fellow-men the +mechanism of the universe. + +While making these researches he was accustomed to spend night after +night in a lofty tower, gazing at the heavenly bodies through a +telescope. His mind was lifted far above the things of this world. He +may be said, indeed, to have spent the greater part of his life in +worlds that lie thousands and millions of miles away; for where the +thoughts and the heart are, there is our true existence. + +Did you never hear the story of Newton and his little dog Diamond? One +day, when he was fifty years old, and had been hard at work more than +twenty years, studying the theory of Light, he went out of his chamber, +leaving his little dog asleep before the fire. On the table lay a heap +of manuscript papers, containing all the discoveries which Newton had +made during those twenty years. When his master was gone, up rose little +Diamond, jumped upon the table, and overthrew the lighted candle. The +papers immediately caught fire. + +Just as the destruction was completed, Newton opened the chamber-door, +and perceived that the labors of twenty years were reduced to a heap of +ashes. There stood little Diamond, the author of all the mischief. +Almost any other man would have sentenced the dog to immediate death. +But Newton patted him on the head with his usual kindness, although +grief was at his heart. + +"Oh, Diamond, Diamond," exclaimed he, "thou little knowest the mischief +thou hast done." + +This incident affected his health and spirits for some time afterwards; +but, from his conduct towards the little dog, you may judge what was the +sweetness of his temper. + +Newton lived to be a very old man, and acquired great renown, and was +made a Member of Parliament, and received the honor of knighthood from +the king. But he cared little for earthly fame and honors, and felt no +pride in the vastness of his knowledge. All that he had learned only +made him feel how little he knew in comparison to what remained to be +known. + +"I seem to myself like a child," observed he, "playing on the sea-shore, +and picking up here and there a curious shell or a pretty pebble, while +the boundless ocean of Truth lies undiscovered before me." + +At last, in 1727, when he was fourscore and five years old, Sir Isaac +Newton died,--or rather he ceased to live on earth. We may be permitted +to believe that he is still searching out the infinite wisdom and +goodness of the Creator, as earnestly, and with even more success, than +while his spirit animated a mortal body. He has left a fame behind him, +which will be as endurable as if his name were written in letters of +light, formed by the stars upon the midnight sky. + + * * * * * + +"I love to hear about mechanical contrivances--such as the water-clock +and the little windmill," remarked George. "I suppose if Sir Isaac +Newton had only thought of it, he might have found out the steam-engine, +and railroads, and all the other famous inventions that have come into +use since his day." + +"Very possibly he might," replied Mr. Temple; "and, no doubt, a great +many people would think it more useful to manufacture steam-engines, +than to search out the system of the universe. Other great astronomers, +besides Newton, have been endowed with mechanical genius. There was +David Rittenhouse, an American,--he made a perfect little water-mill, +when he was only seven or eight years old. But this sort of ingenuity is +but a mere trifle in comparison with the other talents of such men." + +"It must have been beautiful," said Edward, "to spend whole nights in a +high tower, as Newton did, gazing at the stars, and the comets, and the +meteors. But what would Newton have done, had he been blind? or if his +eyes had been no better than mine?" + +"Why, even then, my dear child," observed Mrs. Temple, "he would have +found out some way of enlightening his mind, and of elevating his soul. +But, come! little Emily is waiting to bid you good night. You must go to +sleep, and dream of seeing all our faces." + +"But how sad it will be, when I awake!" murmured Edward. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +In the course of the next day, the harmony of our little family was +disturbed by something like a quarrel between George and Edward. + +The former, though he loved his brother dearly, had found it quite too +great a sacrifice of his own enjoyments, to spend all his playtime in a +darkened chamber. Edward, on the other hand, was inclined to be +despotic. He felt as if his bandaged eyes entitled him to demand that +everybody, who enjoyed the blessing of sight, should contribute to his +comfort and amusement. He therefore insisted that George, instead of +going out to play at foot-ball, should join with himself and Emily in a +game of questions and answers. + +George resolutely refused, and ran out of the house. He did not revisit +Edward's chamber till the evening, when he stole in, looking confused, +yet somewhat sullen, and sat down beside his father's chair. It was +evident, by a motion of Edward's head and a slight trembling of his +lips, that he was aware of George's entrance, though his footsteps had +been almost inaudible. Emily, with her serious and earnest little face, +looked from one to the other, as if she longed to be a messenger of +peace between them. + +Mr. Temple, without seeming to notice any of these circumstances, began +a story. + + +SAMUEL JOHNSON. + +BORN 1709. DIED 1784. + +"Sam," said Mr. Michael Johnson of Lichfield, one morning, "I am very +feeble and ailing to-day. You must go to Uttoxeter in my stead, and tend +the bookstall in the market-place there." + +This was spoken, above a hundred years ago, by an elderly man, who had +once been a thriving bookseller at Lichfield, in England. Being now in +reduced circumstances, he was forced to go, every market-day, and sell +books at a stall, in the neighboring village of Uttoxeter. + +His son, to whom Mr. Johnson spoke, was a great boy of very singular +aspect. He had an intelligent face; but it was seamed and distorted by a +scrofulous humor, which affected his eyes so badly, that sometimes he +was almost blind. Owing to the same cause, his head would often shake +with a tremulous motion, as if he were afflicted with the palsy. When +Sam was an infant, the famous Queen Anne had tried to cure him of this +disease, by laying her royal hands upon his head. But though the touch +of a king or Queen was supposed to be a certain remedy for scrofula, it +produced no good effect upon Sam Johnson. + +At the time which we speak of, the poor lad was not very well dressed, +and wore shoes from which his toes peeped out; for his old father had +barely the means of supporting his wife and children. But, poor as the +family were, young Sam Johnson had as much pride as any nobleman's son +in England. The fact was, he felt conscious of uncommon sense and +ability, which, in his own opinion, entitled him to great respect from +the world. Perhaps he would have been glad, if grown people had treated +him as reverentially as his school-fellows did. Three of them were +accustomed to come for him, every morning; and while he sat upon the +back of one, the two others supported him on each side, and thus he rode +to school in triumph! + +Being a personage of so much importance, Sam could not bear the idea of +standing all day in Uttoxeter market, offering books to the rude and +ignorant country-people. Doubtless he felt the more reluctant on account +of his shabby clothes, and the disorder of his eyes, and the tremulous +motion of his head. + +When Mr. Michael Johnson spoke, Sam pouted, and made an indistinct +grumbling in his throat; then he looked his old father in the face, and +answered him loudly and deliberately. + +"Sir," said he, "I will not go to Uttoxeter market!" + +Mr. Johnson had seen a great deal of the lad's obstinacy ever since his +birth; and while Sam was younger, the old gentleman had probably used +the rod, whenever occasion seemed to require. But he was now too +feeble, and too much out of spirits, to contend with this stubborn and +violent-tempered boy. He therefore gave up the point at once, and +prepared to go to Uttoxeter himself. + +"Well Sam," said Mr. Johnson, as he took his hat and staff, "If, for the +sake of your foolish pride, you can suffer your poor sick father to +stand all day in the noise and confusion of the market, when he ought to +be in his bed, I have no more to say. But you will think of this, Sam, +when I am dead and gone!" + +So the poor old man (perhaps with a tear in his eye, but certainly with +sorrow in his heart) set forth towards Uttoxeter. The gray-haired, +feeble, melancholy Michael Johnson! How sad a thing it was, that he +should be forced to go, in his sickness, and toil for the support of an +ungrateful son, who was too proud to do any thing for his father, or his +mother, or himself! Sam looked after Mr. Johnson, with a sullen +countenance, till he was out of sight. + +But when the old man's figure, as he went stooping along the street, was +no more to be seen, the boy's heart began to smite him. He had a vivid +imagination, and it tormented him with the image of his father, standing +in the market-place of Uttoxeter and offering his books to the noisy +crowd around him, Sam seemed to behold him, arranging his literary +merchandise upon the stall in such a way as was best calculated to +attract notice. Here was Addison's Spectator, a long row of little +volumes; here was Pope's translation of the Iliad and Odyssey; here were +Dryden's poems, or those of Prior. Here, likewise, were Gulliver's +Travels, and a variety of little gilt-covered children's books, such as +Tom Thumb, Jack the Giant-queller, Mother Goose's Melodies, and others +which our great-grandparents used to read in their childhood. And here +were sermons for the pious, and pamphlets for the politicians, and +ballads, some merry and some dismal ones, for the country people to +sing. + +Sam, in imagination, saw his father offer these books, pamphlets, and +ballads, now to the rude yeomen, who perhaps could not read a word,--now +to the country squires, who cared for nothing but to hunt hares and +foxes,--now to the children, who chose to spend their coppers for +sugar-plums or gingerbread, rather than for picture-books. And if Mr. +Johnson should sell a book to man, woman, or child, it would cost him an +hour's talk to get a profit of only sixpence. + +"My poor father!" thought Sam to himself. "How his head will ache, and +how heavy his heart will be! I am almost sorry that I did not do as he +bade me!" + +Then the boy went to his mother, who was busy about the house. She did +not know of what had passed between Mr. Johnson and Sam. + +"Mother," said he, "did you think father seemed very ill to-day?" + +"Yes, Sam," answered his mother, turning with a flushed face from the +fire, where she was cooking their scanty dinner. "Your father did look +very ill; and it is a pity he did not send you to Uttoxeter in his +stead. You are a great boy now, and would rejoice, I am sure, to do +something for your poor father, who has done so much for you." + +The lad made no reply. But again his imagination set to work, and +conjured up another picture of poor Michael Johnson. He was standing in +the hot sunshine of the market-place, and looking so weary, sick, and +disconsolate, that the eyes of all the crowd were drawn to him. "Had +this old man no son," the people would say among themselves, "who might +have taken his place at the bookstall, while the father kept his bed?" +And perhaps--but this was a terrible thought for Sam!--perhaps his +father would faint away, and fall down in the market-place, with his +gray hair in the dust, and his venerable face as deathlike as that of a +corpse. And there would be the bystanders gazing earnestly at Mr. +Johnson, and whispering, "Is he dead? Is he dead?" + +And Sam shuddered, as he repeated to himself: "Is he dead?" + +"Oh, I have been a cruel son!" thought he, within his own heart. "God +forgive me! God forgive me!" + +But God could not yet forgive him; for he was not truly penitent. Had he +been so, he would have hastened away that very moment to Uttoxeter, and +have fallen at his father's feet, even in the midst of the crowded +market-place. There he would have confessed his fault, and besought Mr. +Johnson to go home, and leave the rest of the day's work to him. But +such was Sam's pride and natural stubbornness, that he could not bring +himself to this humiliation. Yet he ought to have done so, for his own +sake, and for his father's sake, and for God's sake. + +After sunset, old Michael Johnson came slowly home, and sat down in his +customary chair. He said nothing to Sam; nor do I know that a single +word ever passed between them, on the subject of the son's disobedience. +In a few years, his father died and left Sam to fight his way through +the world by himself. It would make our story much too long were I to +tell you even a few of the remarkable events of Sam's life. Moreover, +there is the less need of this, because many books have been written +about that poor boy, and the fame that he acquired, and all that he did +or talked of doing, after he came to be a man. + +But one thing I must not neglect to say. From his boyhood upward, until +the latest day of his life, he never forgot the story of Uttoxeter +market. Often when he was a scholar of the University of Oxford, or +master of an Academy at Edial, or a writer for the London +booksellers,--in all his poverty and toil, and in all his +success,--while he was walking the streets without a shilling to buy +food, or when the greatest men of England were proud to feast him at +their table,--still that heavy and remorseful thought came back to +him:--"I was cruel to my poor father in his illness!" Many and many a +time, awake or in his dreams, he seemed to see old Michael Johnson, +standing in the dust and confusion of the market-place, and pressing his +withered hand to his forehead as if it ached. + +Alas! my dear children, it is a sad thing to have such a thought as this +to bear us company through life. + + * * * * * + +Though the story was but half finished, yet, as it was longer than +usual, Mr. Temple here made a short pause. He perceived that Emily was +in tears, and Edward turned his half-veiled face towards the speaker, +with an air of great earnestness and interest. As for George he had +withdrawn into the dusky shadow behind his father's chair. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +In a few moments Mr. Temple resumed the story, as follows: + + +SAMUEL JOHNSON. + +CONTINUED. + +Well, my children, fifty years had passed away since young Sam Johnson +had shown himself so hard-hearted towards his father. It was now +market-day in the village of Uttoxeter. + +In the street of the village, you might see cattle-dealers with cows and +oxen for sale, and pig-drovers, with herds of squeaking swine, and +farmers, with cart-loads of cabbages, turnips, onions, and all other +produce of the soil. Now and then a farmer's red-faced wife trotted +along on horseback, with butter and cheese in two large panniers. The +people of the village, with country squires and other visitors from the +neighborhood, walked hither and thither, trading, jesting, quarrelling, +and making just such a bustle as their fathers and grandfathers had made +half a century before. + +In one part of the street, there was a puppet-show, with a ridiculous +Merry-Andrew, who kept both grown people and children in a roar of +laughter. On the opposite side was the old stone church of Uttoxeter, +with ivy climbing up its walls, and partly obscuring its Gothic windows. + +There was a clock in the gray tower of the ancient church; and the hands +on the dial-plate had now almost reached the hour of noon. At this +busiest hour of the market, a strange old gentleman was seen making his +way among the crowd. He was very tall and bulky, and wore a brown coat +and small clothes, with black worsted stockings and buckled shoes. On +his head was a three-cornered hat, beneath which a bushy gray wig thrust +itself out, all in disorder. The old gentleman elbowed the people aside, +and forced his way through the midst of them with a singular kind of +gait, rolling his body hither and thither, so that he needed twice as +much room as any other person there. + +"Make way, sir!" he would cry out, in a loud, harsh voice, when somebody +happened to interrupt his progress.--"Sir, you intrude your person into +the public thoroughfare!" + +"What a queer old fellow this is!" muttered the people among themselves, +hardly knowing whether to laugh or to be angry. + +But, when they looked into the venerable stranger's face, not the most +thoughtless among them dared to offer him the least impertinence. Though +his features were scarred and distorted with the scrofula, and though +his eyes were dim and bleared, yet there was something of authority and +wisdom in his look, which impressed them all with awe. So they stood +aside to let him pass; and the old gentleman made his way across the +market-place, and paused near the corner of the ivy-mantled church. Just +as he reached it, the clock struck twelve. + +On the very spot of ground, where the stranger now stood, some aged +people remembered that old Michael Johnson had formerly kept his +bookstall. The little children, who had once bought picture-books of +him, were grandfathers now. + +"Yes; here is the very spot!" muttered the old gentleman to himself. + +There this unknown personage took his stand, and removed the +three-cornered hat from his head. It was the busiest hour of the day. +What with the hum of human voices, the lowing of cattle, the squeaking +of pigs, and the laughter caused by the Merry-Andrew, the market-place +was in very great confusion. But the stranger seemed not to notice it, +any more than if the silence of a desert were around him. He was wrapt +in his own thoughts. Sometimes he raised his furrowed brow to heaven, as +if in prayer; sometimes he bent his head, as if an insupportable weight +of sorrow were upon him. It increased the awfulness of his aspect that +there was a motion of his head, and an almost continual tremor +throughout his frame, with singular twitchings and contortions of his +features. + +The hot sun blazed upon his unprotected head; but he seemed not to feel +its fervor. A dark cloud swept across the sky, and rain-drops pattered +into the market-place; but the stranger heeded not the shower. The +people began to gaze at the mysterious old gentleman, with superstitious +fear and wonder. Who could he be? Whence did he come? Wherefore was he +standing bare-headed in the market-place? Even the school-boys left the +Merry-Andrew, and came to gaze, with wide open eyes, at this tall, +strange-looking old man. + +There was a cattle-drover in the village, who had recently made a +journey to the Smithfield market, in London. No sooner had this man +thrust his way through the throng, and taken a look at the unknown +personage, than he whispered to one of his acquaintances: + +"I say, neighbor Hutchins, would ye like to know who this old gentleman +is?" + +"Ay, that I would," replied neighbor Hutchins; "for a queerer chap I +never saw in my life! Somehow, it makes me feel small to look at him. +He's more than a common man." + +"You may well say so," answered the cattle-drover. "Why, that's the +famous Doctor Samuel Johnson, who, they say, is the greatest and +learnedest man in England. I saw him in London Streets, walking with one +Mr. Boswell." + +Yes; the poor boy--the friendless Sam--with, whom we began our story, +had become the famous Doctor Samuel Johnson! He was universally +acknowledged as the wisest man and greatest writer in all England. He +had given shape and permanence to his native language, by his +Dictionary. Thousands upon thousands of people had read his Idler, his +Rambler, and his Rasselas. Noble and wealthy men, and beautiful ladies, +deemed it their highest privilege to be his companions. Even the king of +Great Britain had sought his acquaintance, and told him what an honor he +considered it, that such a man had been born in his dominions. He was +now at the summit of literary renown. + +But all his fame could not extinguish the bitter remembrance, which had +tormented him through life. Never, never, had he forgotten his father's +sorrowful and upbraiding look. Never--though the old man's troubles had +been over so many years--had he forgiven himself for inflicting such a +pang upon his heart. And now, in his old age, he had come hither to do +penance, by standing at noon-day in the market-place of Uttoxeter, on +the very spot where Michael Johnson had once kept his bookstall. The +aged and illustrious man had done what the poor boy refused to do. By +thus expressing his deep repentance and humiliation of heart, he hoped +to gain peace of conscience, and the forgiveness of God. + +My dear children, if you have grieved--I will not say, your +parents--but, if you have grieved the heart of any human being, who has +a claim upon your love, then think of Samuel Johnson's penance! Will it +not be better to redeem the error now, than to endure the agony of +remorse for fifty years? Would you not rather say to a brother--"I have +erred! Forgive me!"--than perhaps to go hereafter, and shed bitter tears +upon his grave? + + * * * * * + +Hardly was the story concluded, when George hastily arose, and Edward +likewise, stretching forth his hands into the darkness that surrounded +him, to find his brother. Both accused themselves of unkindness; each +besought the other's forgiveness; and having, done so, the trouble of +their hearts vanished away like a dream. + +"I am glad! I am so glad!" said Emily, in a low, earnest voice. "Now I +shall sleep quietly to-night." + +"My sweet child," thought Mrs. Temple, as she kissed her, "mayest thou +never know how much strife there is on earth! It would cost thee many a +night's rest." + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +About this period, Mr. Temple found it necessary to take a journey, +which interrupted the series of Biographical Stories for several +evenings. In the interval, Edward practised various methods of employing +and amusing his mind. + +Sometimes he meditated upon beautiful objects which he had formerly +seen, until the intensity of his recollection seemed to restore him the +gift of sight, and place every thing anew before his eyes. Sometimes he +repeated verses of poetry, which he did not know to be in his memory, +until he found them there, just at the time of need. Sometimes he +attempted to solve arithmetical questions, which had perplexed him while +at school. + +Then, with his mother's assistance, he learned the letters of the +string-alphabet, which is used in some of the Institutions for the +Blind, in Europe. When one of his friends gave him a leaf of Saint +Mark's Gospel, printed in embossed characters, he endeavored to read it +by passing his fingers over the letters, as blind children do. + +His brother George was now very kind, and spent so much time in the +darkened chamber, that Edward often insisted upon his going out to play. +George told him all about the affairs at school, and related many +amusing incidents that happened among his comrades, and informed him +what sports were now in fashion, and whose kite soared the highest, and +whose little ship sailed fleetest on the Frog Pond. As for Emily, she +repeated stories which she had learned from a new book, called THE +FLOWER PEOPLE, in which the snow-drops, the violets, the columbines, the +roses, and all that lovely tribe, are represented as telling their +secrets to a little girl. The flowers talked sweetly, as flowers should; +and Edward almost fancied that he could behold their bloom and smell +their fragrant breath. + +Thus, in one way or another, the dark days of Edward's confinement +passed not unhappily. In due time, his father returned; and the next +evening, when the family were assembled, he began a story. + +"I must first observe, children," said he, "that some writers deny the +truth of the incident which I am about to relate to you. There certainly +is but little evidence in favor of it. Other respectable writers, +however, tell it for a fact; and, at all events, it is an interesting +story, and has an excellent moral." + +So Mr. Temple proceeded to talk about the early days of + + +OLIVER CROMWELL. + +BORN 1599. DIED 1658. + +Not long after King James the First took the place of Queen Elizabeth +on the throne of England, there lived an English knight at a place +called Hinchinbrooke. His name was Sir Oliver Cromwell. He spent his +life, I suppose, pretty much like other English knights and squires in +those days, hunting hares and foxes, and drinking large quantities of +ale and wine. The old house in which he dwelt, had been occupied by his +ancestors before him, for a good many years. In it there was a great +hall, hung round with coats of arms, and helmets, cuirasses and swords +which his forefathers had used in battle, and with horns of deer and +tails of foxes, which they or Sir Oliver himself had killed in the +chase. + +This Sir Oliver Cromwell had a nephew, who had been called Oliver, after +himself, but who was generally known in the family by the name of little +Noll. His father was a younger brother of Sir Oliver. The child was +often sent to visit his uncle, who probably found him a troublesome +little fellow to take care of. He was forever in mischief, and always +running into some danger or other from which he seemed to escape only by +miracle. + +Even while he was an infant in the cradle a strange accident had +befallen him. A huge ape which was kept in the family, snatched up +little Noll in his forepaws and clambered with him to the roof of the +house. There this ugly beast sat grinning at the affrighted spectators, +as if he had done the most praiseworthy thing imaginable. Fortunately, +however, he brought the child safe down again; and the event was +afterwards considered an omen that Noll would reach a very elevated +station in the world. + +One morning, when Noll was five or six years old, a royal messenger +arrived at Hinchinbrooke, with tidings that King James was coming to +dine with Sir Oliver Cromwell. This was a high honor to be sure, but a +very great trouble; for all the lords and ladies, knights, squires, +guards, and yeomen, who waited on the king, were to be feasted as well +as himself; and more provisions would be eaten, and more wine drunk, in +that one day, than generally in a month. However, Sir Oliver expressed +much thankfulness for the king's intended visit, and ordered his butler +and cook to make the best preparations in their power. So a great fire +was kindled in the kitchen; and the neighbors knew by the smoke which +poured out of the chimney, that boiling, baking, stewing, roasting, and +frying, were going on merrily. + +By and by the sound of trumpets was heard, approaching nearer and +nearer; and a heavy, old-fashioned coach, surrounded by guards on +horseback, drove up to the house. Sir Oliver, with his hat in his hand, +stood at the gate to receive the king. His Majesty was dressed in a suit +of green, not very new; he had a feather in his hat, and a triple ruff +round his neck; and over his shoulder was slung a hunting horn, instead +of a sword. Altogether, he had not the most dignified aspect in the +world; but the spectators gazed at him as if there was something +superhuman and divine in his person. They even shaded their eyes with +their hands, as if they were dazzled by the glory of his countenance. + +"How are ye, man?" cried King James, speaking in a Scotch accent; for +Scotland was his native country. "By my crown, Sir Oliver, but I am glad +to see ye!" + +The good knight thanked the king, at the same time kneeling down, while +his Majesty alighted. When King James stood on the ground, he directed +Sir Oliver's attention to a little boy, who had come with him in the +coach. He was six or seven years old, and wore a hat and feather, and +was more richly dressed than the king himself. Though by no means an +ill-looking child; he seemed shy, or even sulky; and his cheeks were +rather pale, as if he had been kept moping within doors, instead of +being sent out to play in the sun and wind. + +"I have brought my son Charlie to see ye," said the king. "I hope, Sir +Oliver, ye have a son of your own, to be his playmate?" + +Sir Oliver Cromwell made a reverential bow to the little prince, whom +one of the attendants had now taken out of the coach. It was wonderful +to see how all the spectators, even the aged men, with their gray +beards, humbled themselves before this child. They bent their bodies +till their beards almost swept the dust. They looked as if they were +ready to kneel down and worship him. + +The poor little prince! From his earliest infancy not a soul had dared +to contradict him; everybody around him had acted as if he were a +superior being; so that, of course, he had imbibed the same opinion of +himself. He naturally supposed that the whole kingdom of Great Britain +and all its inhabitants, had been created solely for his benefit and +amusement. This was a sad mistake; and it cost him dear enough after he +had ascended his father's throne. + +"What a noble little prince he is!" exclaimed Sir Oliver, lifting his +hands in admiration. "No, please your Majesty, I have no son to be the +playmate of his Royal Highness; but there is a nephew of mine, somewhere +about the house. He is near the prince's age, and will be but too happy +to wait upon his Royal Highness." + +"Send for him, man! send for him!" said the king. + +But, as it happened, there was no need of sending for Master Noll. While +King James was speaking, a rugged, bold-faced, sturdy little urchin +thrust himself through the throng of courtiers and attendants, and +greeted the prince with a broad stare. His doublet and hose (which had +been put on new and clean in honor of the king's visit) were already +soiled and torn with the rough play in which he had spent the morning. +He looked no more abashed than if King James were his uncle, and the +prince one of his customary playfellows. + +This was little Noll himself. + +"Here, please your Majesty, is my nephew," said sir Oliver, somewhat +ashamed of Noll's appearance and demeanor. "Oliver, make your obeisance +to the king's Majesty!" + +The boy made a pretty respectful obeisance to the king; for, in those +days, children were taught to pay reverence to their elders. King James, +who prided himself greatly on his scholarship, asked Noll a few +questions in the Latin Grammar, and then introduced him to his son. The +little prince in a very grave and dignified manner, extended his hand, +not for Noll to shake, but that he might kneel down and kiss it. + +"Nephew," said Sir Oliver, "pay your duty to the prince." + +"I owe him no duty," cried Noll, thrusting aside the prince's hand, with +a rude laugh. "Why should I kiss that boy's hand?" + +All the courtiers were amazed and confounded, and Sir Oliver the most of +all. But the king laughed heartily, saying that little Noll had a +stubborn English spirit, and that it was well for his son to learn +betimes what sort of a people he was to rule over. + +So King James and his train entered the house; and the prince, with Noll +and some other children, was sent to play in a separate room while his +Majesty was at dinner. The young people soon became acquainted; for +boys, whether the sons of monarchs or of peasants, all like play, and +are pleased with one another's society. What games they diverted +themselves with, I cannot tell. Perhaps they played at ball--perhaps at +blindman's buff--perhaps at leap-frog--perhaps at prison-bars. Such +games have been in use for hundreds of years; and princes as well as +poor children have spent some of their happiest hours in playing at +them. + +Meanwhile, King James and his nobles were feasting with Sir Oliver, in +the great hall. The king sat in a gilded chair, under a canopy, at the +head of a long table. Whenever any of the company addressed him, it was +with the deepest reverence. If the attendants offered him wine, or the +various delicacies of the festival, it was upon their bended knees. You +would have thought, by these tokens of worship, that the monarch was a +supernatural being; only he seemed to have quite as much need of those +vulgar matters, food and drink, as any other person at the table. But +fate had ordained that good King James should not finish his dinner in +peace. + +All of a sudden, there arose a terrible uproar in the room where the +children were at play. Angry shouts and shrill cries of alarm were mixed +up together; while the voices of elder persons were likewise heard, +trying to restore order among the children. The king, and everybody else +at table, looked aghast; for perhaps the tumult made them think that a +general rebellion had broken out. + +"Mercy on us!" muttered Sir Oliver; "that graceless nephew of mine is in +some mischief or other. The naughty little whelp!" + +Getting up from table, he ran to see what was the matter, followed by +many of the guests, and the king among them. They all crowded to the +door of the play-room. + +On looking in, they beheld the little Prince Charles, with his rich +dress all torn, and covered with the dust of the floor. His royal blood +was streaming from his nose in great abundance. He gazed at Noll with a +mixture of rage and affright, and at the same time a puzzled expression, +as if he could not understand how any mortal boy should dare to give him +a beating. As for Noll, there stood his sturdy little figure, bold as a +lion, looking as if he were ready to fight not only the prince, but the +king and kingdom too. + +"You little villain!" cried his uncle. "What have you been about? Down +on your knees, this instant, and ask the prince's pardon. How dare you +lay your hands on the king's Majesty's royal son?" + +"He struck me first," grumbled the valiant little Noll; "and I've only +given him his due." + +Sir Oliver and the guests lifted up their hands in astonishment and +horror. No punishment seemed severe enough for this wicked little +varlet, who had dared to resent a blow from the king's own son. Some of +the courtiers were of opinion that Noll should be sent prisoner to the +Tower of London, and brought to trial for high treason. Others, in their +great zeal for the king's service, were about to lay hands on the boy, +and chastise him in the royal presence. + +But King James, who sometimes showed a good deal of sagacity, ordered +them to desist. + +"Thou art a bold boy," said he, looking fixedly at little Noll; "and, if +thou live to be a man, my son Charlie would do wisely to be friends with +thee." + +"I never will!" cried the little prince, stamping his foot. + +"Peace, Charlie, peace!" said the king; then addressing Sir Oliver and +the attendants, "Harm not the urchin; for he has taught my son a good +lesson, if Heaven do but give him grace to profit by it. Hereafter, +should he be tempted to tyrannize over the stubborn race of Englishmen, +let him remember little Noll Cromwell, and his own bloody nose!" + +So the king finished his dinner and departed; and, for many a long year, +the childish quarrel between Prince Charles and Noll Cromwell was +forgotten. The prince, indeed, might have lived a happier life, and have +met a more peaceful death, had he remembered that quarrel, and the moral +which his father drew from it. But, when old King James was dead, and +Charles sat upon his throne, he seemed to forget that he was but a man, +and that his meanest subjects were men as well as he. He wished to have +the property and lives of the people of England entirely at his own +disposal. But the Puritans, and all who loved liberty, rose against him, +and beat him in many battles, and pulled him down from his throne. + +Throughout this war between the king and nobles on one side, and the +people of England on the other, there was a famous leader, who did more +towards the ruin of royal authority, than all the rest. The contest +seemed like a wrestling-match between King Charles and this strong man. +And the king was overthrown. + +When the discrowned monarch was brought to trial, that warlike leader +sat in the judgment-hall. Many judges were present, besides himself; but +he alone had the power to save King Charles, or to doom him to the +scaffold. After sentence was pronounced, this victorious general was +entreated by his own children, on their knees, to rescue his Majesty +from death. + +"No!" said he sternly. "Better that one man should perish, than that the +whole country should be ruined for his sake. It is resolved that he +shall die!" + +When Charles, no longer a king, was led to the scaffold, his great enemy +stood at a window of the royal palace of Whitehall. He beheld the poor +victim of pride, and an evil education, and misused power, as he laid +his head upon the block. He looked on, with a steadfast gaze, while a +black-veiled executioner lifted the fatal axe, and smote off that +anointed head at a single blow. + +"It is a righteous deed," perhaps he said to himself. "Now Englishmen +may enjoy their rights." + +At night, when the body of Charles was laid in the coffin, in a gloomy +chamber, the general entered, lighting himself with a torch. Its gleam +showed that he was now growing old; his visage was scarred with the many +battles in which he had led the van; his brow was wrinkled with care, +and with the continual exercise of stern authority. Probably there was +not a single trait, either of aspect or manner, that belonged to the +little Noll, who had battled so stoutly with Prince Charles. Yet this +was he! + +He lifted the coffin-lid, and caused the light of his torch to fall upon +the dead monarch's face. Then, probably, his mind went back over all the +marvellous events, that had brought the hereditary king of England to +this dishonored coffin, and had raised himself, an humble individual, to +the possession of kingly power. He was a king, though without the empty +title, or the glittering crown. + +"Why was it," said Cromwell to himself--or might have said--as he gazed +at the pale features in the coffin,--"Why was it, that this great king +fell, and that poor Noll Cromwell has gained all the power of the +realm?" + +And, indeed, why was it? + +King Charles had fallen, because, in his manhood the same as when a +child, he disdained to feel that every human creature was his brother. +He deemed himself a superior being, and fancied that his subjects were +created only for a king to rule over. And Cromwell rose, because, in +spite of his many faults, he mainly fought for the rights and freedom +of his fellow-men; and therefore the poor and the oppressed all lent +their strength to him. + + * * * * * + +"Dear father, how I should hate to be a king!" exclaimed Edward. + +"And would you like to be a Cromwell?" inquired his father. + +"I should like it well," replied George, "only I would not have put the +poor old king to death. I would have sent him out of the kingdom, or +perhaps have allowed him to live in a small house, near the gate of the +royal palace. It was too severe, to cut off his head." + +"Kings are in such an unfortunate position," said Mr. Temple, "that they +must either be almost deified by their subjects, or else be dethroned +and beheaded. In either case it is a pitiable lot." + +"Oh, I had rather be blind than be a king!" said Edward. + +"Well, my dear Edward," observed his mother, with a smile, "I am glad +you are convinced that your own lot is not the hardest in the world." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +It was a pleasant sight (for those who had eyes) to see how patiently +the blinded little boy now submitted to what he had at first deemed an +intolerable calamity. The beneficent Creator has not allowed our comfort +to depend on the enjoyment of any single sense. Though he has made the +world so very beautiful, yet it is possible to be happy without ever +beholding the blue sky, or the green and flowery earth, or the kind +faces of those whom we love. Thus it appears that all the external +beauty of the universe is a free gift from God, over and above what is +necessary to our comfort. How grateful, then, should we be to that +Divine Benevolence, which showers even superfluous bounties upon us! + +One truth, therefore, which Edward's blindness had taught him, was, that +his mind and soul could dispense with the assistance of his eyes. +Doubtless, however, he would have found this lesson far more difficult +to learn, had it not been for the affection of those around him. His +parents, and George and Emily, aided him to bear his misfortune; if +possible, they would have lent him their own eyes. And this, too, was a +good lesson for him. It taught him how dependent on one another God has +ordained us to be; insomuch that all the necessities of mankind should +incite them to mutual love. + +So Edward loved his friends, and perhaps all the world, better than he +ever did before. And he felt grateful towards his father for spending +the evenings in telling him stories--more grateful, probably, than any +of my little readers will feel towards me for so carefully writing those +same stories down. + +"Come, dear father," said he, the next evening, "now tell us all about +some other little boy, who was destined to be a famous man." + +"How would you like a story of a Boston boy?" asked his father. + +"Oh, pray let us have it!" cried George eagerly. "It will be all the +better if he has been to our schools, and has coasted on the Common, and +sailed boats in the Frog Pond. I shall feel acquainted with him then." + +"Well, then," said Mr. Temple, "I will introduce you to a Boston boy, +whom all the world became acquainted with, after he grew to be a man." + +The story was as follows:-- + + +BENJAMIN FRANKLIN. + +BORN 1706. DIED 1790. + +In the year 1716, or about that period, a boy used to be seen in the +streets of Boston, who was known among his schoolfellows and playmates +by the name of Ben Franklin. Ben was born in 1706; so that he was now +about ten years old. His father, who had come over from England, was a +soap-boiler and tallow-chandler, and resided in Milk Street, not far +from the old South Church. + +Ben was a bright boy at his book, and even a brighter one when at play +with his comrades. He had some remarkable qualities which always seemed +to give him the lead, whether at sport or in more serious matters. I +might tell you a number of amusing anecdotes about him. You are +acquainted, I suppose, with his famous story of the WHISTLE, and how he +bought it with a whole pocketful of coppers, and afterwards repented of +his bargain. But Ben had grown a great boy since those days, and had +gained wisdom by experience; for it was one of his peculiarities, that +no incident ever happened to him without teaching him some valuable +lesson. Thus he generally profited more by his misfortunes, than many +people do by the most favorable events that could befall them. + +Ben's face was already pretty well known to the inhabitants of Boston. +The selectmen, and other people of note, often used to visit his father, +for the sake of talking about the affairs of the town or province. Mr. +Franklin was considered a person of great wisdom and integrity, and was +respected by all who knew him, although he supported his family by the +humble trade of boiling soap, and making tallow-candles. + +While his father and the visitors were holding deep consultations about +public affairs, little Ben would sit on his stool in a corner, +listening with the greatest interest, as if he understood every word. +Indeed, his features were so full of intelligence, that there could be +but little doubt, not only that he understood what was said, but that he +could have expressed some very sagacious opinions out of his own mind. +But, in those days, boys were expected to be silent in the presence of +their elders. However, Ben Franklin was looked upon as a very promising +lad, who would talk and act wisely by and by. + +"Neighbor Franklin," his father's friends would sometimes say, "you +ought to send this boy to college and make a minister of him." + +"I have often thought of it," his father would reply; "and my brother +Benjamin promises to give him a great many volumes of manuscript sermons +in case he should be educated for the church. But I have a large family +to support, and cannot afford the expense." + +In fact, Mr. Franklin found it so difficult to provide bread for his +family, that, when the boy was ten years old, it became necessary to +take him from school. Ben was then employed in cutting candlewicks into +equal lengths, and filling the moulds with tallow; and many families in +Boston spent their evenings by the light of the candles which he had +helped to make. Thus, you see, in his early days, as well as in his +manhood his labors contributed to throw light upon dark matters. + +Busy as his life now was, Ben still found time to keep company with his +former schoolfellows. He and the other boys were very fond of fishing, +and spent any of their leisure hours on the margin of the mill-pond, +catching flounders, perch, eels, and tom-cod, which came up thither with +the tide. The place where they fished is now, probably, covered with +stone-pavements and brick buildings, and thronged with people, and with +vehicles of all kinds. But, at that period, it was a marshy spot on the +outskirts of the town, where gulls flitted and screamed overhead, and +salt meadow-grass grew under foot. On the edge of the water there was a +deep bed of clay, in which the boys were forced to stand, while they +caught their fish. Here they dabbled in mud and mire like a flock of +ducks. + +"This is very uncomfortable," said Ben Franklin one day to his comrades, +while they were standing mid-leg deep in the quagmire. + +"So it is," said the other boys. "What a pity we have no better place to +stand!" + +If it had not been for Ben, nothing more would have been done or said +about the matter. But it was not in his nature to be sensible of an +inconvenience, without using his best efforts to find a remedy. So, as +he and his comrades were returning from the water-side, Ben suddenly +threw down his string of fish with a very determined air: + +"Boys," cried he, "I have thought of a scheme, which will be greatly for +our benefit, and for the public benefit!" + +It was queer enough, to be sure, to hear this little chap--this +rosy-cheeked, ten-year-old boy--talking about schemes for the public +benefit! Nevertheless, his companions were ready to listen, being +assured that Ben's scheme, whatever it was, would be well worth their +attention. They remembered how sagaciously he had conducted all their +enterprises, ever since he had been old enough to wear small-clothes. + +They remembered, too, his wonderful contrivance of sailing across the +mill-pond by lying flat on his back, in the water, and allowing himself +to be drawn along by a paper-kite. If Ben could do that, he might +certainly do any thing. + +"What is your scheme, Ben?--what is it?" cried they all. + +It so happened that they had now come to a spot of ground where a new +house was to be built. Scattered round about lay a great many large +stones, which were to be used for the cellar and foundation. Ben mounted +upon the highest of these stones, so that he might speak with the more +authority. + +"You know, lads," said he, "what a plague it is, to be forced to stand +in the quagmire yonder--over shoes and stockings (if we wear any) in mud +and water. See! I am bedaubed to the knees of my small-clothes, and you +are all in the same pickle. Unless we can find some remedy for this +evil, our fishing-business must be entirely given up. And, surely, this +would be a terrible misfortune!" + +"That it would!--that it would!" said his comrades, sorrowfully. + +"Now I propose," continued Master Benjamin, "that we build a wharf, for +the purpose of carrying on our fisheries. You see these stones. The +workmen mean to use them for the underpinning of a house; but that would +be for only one man's advantage. My plan is to take these same stones, +and carry them to the edge of the water and build a wharf with them. +This will not only enable us to carry on the fishing business with +comfort, and to better advantage, but it will likewise be a great +convenience to boats passing up and down the stream. Thus, instead of +one man, fifty, or a hundred, or a thousand, besides ourselves, may be +benefited by these stones. What say you, lads?--shall we build the +wharf?" + +Ben's proposal was received with one of those uproarious shouts, +wherewith boys usually express their delight at whatever completely +suits their views. Nobody thought of questioning the right and justice +of building a wharf, with stones that belonged to another person. + +"Hurrah, hurrah!" shouted they. "Let's set about it!" + +It was agreed that they should all be on the spot, that evening, and +commence their grand public enterprise by moonlight. Accordingly, at the +appointed time, the whole gang of youthful laborers assembled, and +eagerly began to remove the stones. They had not calculated how much +toil would be requisite, in this important part of their undertaking. +The very first stone which they laid hold of, proved so heavy, that it +almost seemed to be fastened to the ground. Nothing but Ben Franklin's +cheerful and resolute spirit could have induced them to persevere. + +Ben, as might be expected, was the soul of the enterprise. By his +mechanical genius, he contrived methods to lighten the labor of +transporting the stones; so that one boy, under his directions, would +perform as much as half a dozen, if left to themselves. Whenever their +spirits flagged, he had some joke ready, which seemed to renew their +strength by setting them all into a roar of laughter. And when, after an +hour or two of hard work, the stones were transported to the water-side, +Ben Franklin was the engineer, to superintend the construction of the +wharf. + +The boys, like a colony of ants, performed a great deal of labor by +their multitude, though the individual strength of each could have +accomplished but little. Finally, just as the moon sank below the +horizon, the great work was finished. + +"Now, boys," cried Ben, "let's give three cheers, and go home to bed. +To-morrow, we may catch fish at our ease!" "Hurrah! hurrah! hurrah!" +shouted his comrades. + +Then they all went home, in such an ecstasy of delight that they could +hardly get a wink of sleep. + +The story was not yet finished; but George's impatience caused him to +interrupt it. + +"How I wish that I could have helped to build that wharf!" exclaimed +he. "It must have been glorious fun. Ben Franklin for ever, say I!" + +"It was a very pretty piece of work," said Mr. Temple. "But wait till +you hear the end of the story." + +"Father," inquired Edward, "whereabouts in Boston was the mill-pond, on +which Ben built his wharf?" + +"I do not exactly know," answered Mr. Temple; "but I suppose it to have +been on the northern verge of the town, in the vicinity of what are now +called Merrimack and Charlestown streets. That thronged portion of the +city was once a marsh. Some of it, in fact, was covered with water." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +As the children had no more questions to ask, Mr. Temple proceeded to +relate what consequences ensued from the building of Ben Franklin's +wharf. + + +BENJAMIN FRANKLIN. + +CONTINUED. + +In the morning, when the early sunbeams were gleaming on the steeples +and roofs of the town, and gilding the water that surrounded it, the +masons came, rubbing their eyes, to begin their work at the foundation +of the new house. But, on reaching the spot, they rubbed their eyes so +much the harder. What had become of their heap of stones! + +"Why, Sam," said one to another, in great perplexity, "here's been some +witchcraft at work, while we were asleep. The stones must have flown +away through the air!" + +"More likely they have been stolen!" answered Sam. + +"But who on earth would think of stealing a heap of stones?" cried a +third. "Could a man carry them away in his pocket?" + +The master-mason, who was a gruff kind of man, stood scratching his +head, and said nothing, at first. But, looking carefully on the ground, +he discerned innumerable tracks of little feet, some with shoes, and +some barefoot. Following these tracks with his eye, he saw that they +formed a beaten path towards the water-side. + +"Ah, I see what the mischief is," said he, nodding his head. "Those +little rascals, the boys! they have stolen our stones to build a wharf +with!" + +The masons immediately went to examine the new structure. And to say the +truth, it was well worth looking at, so neatly, and with such admirable +skill, had it been planned and finished. The stones were put together so +securely, that there was no danger of their being loosened by the tide, +however swiftly it might sweep along. There was a broad and safe +platform to stand upon, whence the little fishermen might cast their +lines into deep water, and draw up fish in abundance. Indeed, it almost +seemed as if Ben and his comrades might be forgiven for taking the +stones, because they had done their job in such a workmanlike manner. + +"The chaps, that built this wharf, understood their business pretty +well," said one of the masons. "I should not be ashamed of such a piece +of work myself." + +But the master-mason did not seem to enjoy the joke. He was one of those +unreasonable people, who care a great deal more for their own rights and +privileges, than for the convenience of all the rest of the world. + +"Sam," said he, more gruffly than usual, "go call a constable." + +So Sam called a constable, and inquiries were set on foot to discover +the perpetrators of the theft. In the course of the day, warrants were +issued, with the signature of a Justice of the Peace, to take the bodies +of Benjamin Franklin and other evil-disposed persons, who had stolen a +heap of stones. If the owner of the stolen property had not been more +merciful than the master-mason, it might have gone hard with our friend +Benjamin and his fellow-laborers. But, luckily for them, the gentleman +had a respect for Ben's father, and moreover, was amused with the spirit +of the whole affair. He therefore let the culprits off pretty easily. + +But, when the constables were dismissed, the poor boys had to go through +another trial, and receive sentence, and suffer execution too, from +their own fathers. Many a rod I grieve to say, was worn to the stump, on +that unlucky night. + +As for Ben, he was less afraid of a whipping than of his father's +disapprobation. Mr. Franklin, as I have mentioned before, was a +sagacious man, and also an inflexibly upright one. He had read much, for +a person in his rank of life, and had pondered upon the ways of the +world, until he had gained more wisdom than a whole library of books +could have taught him. Ben had a greater reverence for his father, than +for any other person in the world, as well on account of his spotless +integrity, as of his practical sense and deep views of things. + +Consequently, after being released from the clutches of the law, Ben +came into his father's presence, with no small perturbation of mind. + +"Benjamin, come hither," began Mr. Franklin, in his customary solemn and +weighty tone. + +The boy approached, and stood before his father's chair, waiting +reverently to hear what judgment this good man would pass upon his late +offence. He felt that now the right and wrong of the whole matter would +be made to appear. + +"Benjamin," said his father, "what could induce you to take property +which did not belong to you?" + +"Why, father," replied Ben, hanging his head, at first, but then lifting +his eyes to Mr. Franklin's face, "if it had been merely for my own +benefit, I never should have dreamed of it. But I knew that the wharf +would be a public convenience. If the owner of the stones should build a +house with them, nobody will enjoy any advantage except himself. Now, I +made use of them in a way that was for the advantage of many persons. I +thought it right to aim at doing good to the greatest number." + +"My son," said Mr. Franklin, solemnly, "so far as it was in your power, +you have done a greater harm to the public, than to the owner of the +stones." + +"How can that be, father?" asked Ben. + +"Because," answered his father, "in building your wharf with stolen +materials, you have committed a moral wrong. There is no more terrible +mistake, than to violate what is eternally right, for the sake of a +seeming expediency. Those who act upon such a principle, do the utmost +in their power to destroy all that is good in the world." + +"Heaven forbid!" said Benjamin. + +"No act," continued Mr. Franklin, "can possibly be for the benefit of +the public generally, which involves injustice to any individual. It +would be easy to prove this by examples. But, indeed, can we suppose +that our all-wise and just Creator would have so ordered the affairs of +the world, that a wrong act should be the true method of attaining a +right end? It is impious to think so! And I do verily believe, Benjamin, +that almost all the public and private misery of mankind arises from a +neglect of this great truth--that evil can produce only evil--that good +ends must be wrought out by good means." + +"I will never forget it again," said Benjamin, bowing his head. + +"Remember," concluded his father, "that, whenever we vary from the +highest rule of right, just so far we do an injury to the world. It may +seem otherwise for the moment; but, both in Time and in Eternity, it +will be found so." + +To the close of his life, Ben Franklin never forgot this conversation +with his father; and we have reason to suppose, that in most of his +public and private career, he endeavored to act upon the principles +which that good and wise man had then taught him. + +After the great event of building the wharf, Ben continued to cut +wick-yarn and fill candle-moulds for about two years. But, as he had no +love for that occupation, his father often took him to see various +artisans at their work, in order to discover what trade he would prefer. +Thus Ben learned the use of a great many tools, the knowledge of which +afterwards proved very useful to him. But he seemed much inclined to go +to sea. In order to keep him at home, and likewise to gratify his taste +for letters, the lad was bound apprentice to his elder brother, who had +lately set up a printing-office in Boston. + +Here he had many opportunities of reading new books, and of hearing +instructive conversation. He exercised himself so successfully in +writing composition, that, when no more than thirteen or fourteen years +old, he became a contributor to his brother's newspaper. Ben was also a +versifier, if not a poet. He made two doleful ballads; one about the +shipwreck of Captain Worthilake, and the other about the pirate Black +Beard, who not long before, infested the American seas. + +When Ben's verses were printed, his brother sent him to sell them to the +town's-people, wet from the press. "Buy my ballads!" shouted Benjamin, +as he trudged through the streets, with a basketful on his arm. "Who'll +buy a ballad about Black Beard? A penny a piece! a penny a piece! who'll +buy my ballads?" + +If one of those roughly composed and rudely printed ballads could be +discovered now, it would be worth more than its weight in gold. + +In this way our friend Benjamin spent his boyhood and youth, until, on +account of some disagreement with his brother, he left his native town +and went to Philadelphia. He landed in the latter city, a homeless and +hungry young man, and bought three-pence worth of bread to satisfy his +appetite. Not knowing where else to go, he entered a Quaker +meeting-house, sat down, and fell fast asleep. He has not told us +whether his slumbers were visited by any dreams. But it would have been +a strange dream, indeed, and an incredible one, that should have +foretold how great a man he was destined to become, and how much he +would be honored in that very city, where he was now friendless, and +unknown. + +So here we finish our story of the childhood of Benjamin Franklin. One +of these days, if you would know what he was in his manhood, you must +read his own works, and the history of American Independence. + + +"Do let us hear a little more of him!" said Edward; "not that I admire +him so much as many other characters; but he interests me, because he +was a Yankee boy." + +"My dear son," replied Mr. Temple, "it would require a whole volume of +talk, to tell you all that is worth knowing about Benjamin Franklin. +There is a very pretty anecdote of his flying a kite in the midst of a +thunder-storm, and thus drawing down the lightning from the clouds, and +proving that it was the same thing as electricity. His whole life would +be an interesting story, if we had time to tell it." + +"But, pray, dear father, tell us what made him so famous," said George. +"I have seen his portrait a great many times. There is a wooden bust of +him in one of our streets, and marble ones, I suppose, in some other +places. And towns, and ships of war, and steamboats, and banks, and +academies, and children, are often named after Franklin. Why should he +have grown so very famous?" + +"Your question is a reasonable one, George," answered his father. "I +doubt whether Franklin's philosophical discoveries, important as they +were, or even his vast political services, would have given him all the +fame which he acquired. It appears to me that Poor Richard's Almanac did +more than any thing else towards making him familiarly known to the +public. As the writer of those proverbs, which Poor Richard was supposed +to utter, Franklin became the counsellor and household friend of almost +every family in America. Thus, it was the humblest of all his labors +that has done the most for his fame." + +"I have read some of those proverbs," remarked Edward; "but I do not +like them. They are all about getting money, or saving it." + +"Well," said his father, "they were suited to the condition of the +country; and their effect, upon the whole, has doubtless been +good,--although they teach men but a very small portion of their +duties." + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + + +Hitherto, Mr. Temple's narratives had all been about boys and men. But, +the next evening, he bethought himself that the quiet little Emily would +perhaps be glad to hear the story of a child of her own sex. He +therefore resolved to narrate the youthful adventures of Christina of +Sweden, who began to be a Queen at the age of no more than six years. If +we have any little girls among our readers, they must not suppose that +Christina is set before them as a pattern of what they ought to be. On +the contrary, the tale of her life is chiefly profitable as showing the +evil effects of a wrong education, which caused this daughter of a king +to be both useless and unhappy. + +Here follows the story. + + +QUEEN CHRISTINA. + +BORN 1626. DIED 1689. + +In the royal palace at Stockholm, the capital city of Sweden, there was +born, in 1626, a little princess. The king, her father, gave her the +name of Christina, in memory of a Swedish girl with whom he had been in +love. His own name was Gustavus Adolphus; and he was also called the +Lion of the North, because he had gained greater fame in war than any +other prince or general then alive. With this valiant king for their +commander, the Swedes had made themselves terrible to the Emperor of +Germany and to the King of France, and were looked upon as the chief +defence of the Protestant religion. + +The little Christina was by no means a beautiful child. To confess the +truth, she was remarkably plain. The queen, her mother, did not love her +so much as she ought; partly, perhaps, on account of Christina's want of +beauty, and also, because both the king and queen had wished for a son, +who might have gained as great renown in battle as his father had. + +The king, however, soon became exceedingly fond of the infant princess. +When Christina was very young, she was taken violently sick. Gustavus +Adolphus, who was several hundred miles from Stockholm, travelled night +and day, and never rested until he held the poor child in his arms. On +her recovery, he made a solemn festival, in order to show his joy to the +people of Sweden and express his gratitude to Heaven. After this event, +he took his daughter with him in all the journeys which he made through +his kingdom. + +Christina soon proved herself a bold and sturdy little girl. When she +was two years old, the king and herself, in the course of a journey, +came to the strong fortress of Colmar. On the battlements were soldiers +clad in steel armor, which glittered in the sunshine. There were +likewise great cannons, pointing their black mouths at Gustavus and +little Christina, and ready to belch out their smoke and thunder; for +whenever a king enters a fortress it is customary to receive him with a +royal salute of artillery. + +But the captain of the fortress met Gustavus and his daughter, as they +were about to enter the gateway. + +"May it please your Majesty," said he, taking off his steel cap and +bowing profoundly, "I fear that if we receive you with a salute of +cannon, the little princess will be frightened almost to death." + +Gustavus looked earnestly at his daughter, and was indeed apprehensive +that the thunder of so many cannon might perhaps throw her into +convulsions. He had almost a mind to tell the captain to let them enter +the fortress quietly, as common people might have done, without all this +head-splitting racket. But no; this would not do. + +"Let them fire," said he, waving his hand. "Christina is a soldier's +daughter, and must learn to bear the noise of cannon." + +So the captain uttered the word of command, and immediately there was a +terrible peal of thunder from the cannon, and such a gush of smoke that +it enveloped the whole fortress in its volumes. But, amid all the din +and confusion, Christina was seen clapping her little hands, and +laughing in an ecstasy of delight. Probably nothing ever pleased her +father so much as to see that his daughter promised to be fearless as +himself. He determined to educate her exactly as if she had been a boy, +and to teach her all the knowledge needful to the ruler of a kingdom and +the commander of an army. + +But Gustavus should have remembered that Providence had created her to +be a woman, and that it was not for him to make a man of her. + +However, the king derived great happiness from his beloved Christina. It +must have been a pleasant sight to see the powerful monarch of Sweden +playing in some magnificent hall of the palace with this merry little +girl. Then he forgot that the weight of a kingdom rested upon his +shoulders. He forgot that the wise Chancellor Oxenstiern was waiting to +consult with him how to render Sweden the greatest nation of Europe. He +forgot that the Emperor of Germany and the King of France were plotting +together how they might pull him down from his throne. + +Yes; Gustavus forgot all the perils and cares and pompous irksomeness of +a royal life, and was as happy, while playing with his child, as the +humblest peasant in the realm of Sweden. How gayly did they dance along +the marble floor of the palace, this valiant king, with his upright, +martial figure, his warworn visage, and commanding aspect, and the +small, round form of Christina, with her rosy face of childish +merriment! Her little fingers were clasped in her father's hand, which +had held the leading-staff in many famous victories. His crown and +sceptre were her playthings. She could disarm Gustavus of his sword, +which was so terrible to the princes of Europe. + +But alas! the king was not long permitted to enjoy Christina's society. +When she was four years old, Gustavus was summoned to take command of +the allied armies of Germany, which were fighting against the Emperor. +His greatest affliction was the necessity of parting with his child; but +people in such high stations have but little opportunity for domestic +happiness. He called an assembly of the Senators of Sweden, and confided +Christina to their care, saying that each one of them must be a father +to her, if he himself should fall in battle. + +At the moment of his departure Christina ran towards him, and began to +address him with a speech which somebody had taught her for the +occasion. Gustavus was busied with thoughts about the affairs of the +kingdom, so that he did not immediately attend to the childish voice of +his little girl. Christina, who did not love to be unnoticed, +immediately stopped short, and pulled him by the coat. + +"Father," said she, "why do not you listen to my speech?" + +In a moment, the king forgot every thing, except that he was parting +with what he loved best in all the world. He caught the child in his +arms, pressed her to his bosom, and burst into tears. Yes; though he was +a brave man, and though he wore a steel corselet on his breast, and +though armies were waiting for him to lead them to battle,--still, his +heart melted within him, and he wept. Christina, too, was so afflicted +that her attendants began to fear that she would actually die of grief. +But probably she was soon comforted; for children seldom remember their +parents quite so faithfully as their parents remember them. + +For two years more, Christina remained in the palace at Stockholm. The +queen, her mother, had accompanied Gustavus to the wars. The child, +therefore, was left to the guardianship of five of the wisest men in the +kingdom. But these wise men knew better how to manage the affairs of +state, than how to govern and educate a little girl so as to render her +a good and happy woman. + +When two years had passed away, tidings were brought to Stockholm which +filled everybody with triumph and sorrow at the same time. The Swedes +had won a glorious victory at Lutzen. But alas! the warlike king of +Sweden, the Lion of the North, the father of our little Christina,--had +been slain at the foot of a great stone, which still marks the spot of +that hero's death. + +Soon after this sad event, a General Assembly, or Congress, consisting +of deputations from the nobles, the clergy, the burghers, and the +peasants of Sweden was summoned to meet at Stockholm. It was for the +purpose of declaring little Christina to be Queen of Sweden, and giving +her the crown and sceptre of her deceased father. Silence being +proclaimed, the Chancellor Oxenstiern arose. + +"We desire to know," said he, "whether the people of Sweden will take +the daughter of our dead king, Gustavus Adolphus, to be their Queen." + +When the Chancellor had spoken, an old man with white hair, and in +coarse apparel, stood up in the midst of the assembly. He was a peasant, +Lars Larrson by name, and had spent most of his life in laboring on a +farm. + +"Who is this daughter of Gustavus?" asked the old man. "We do not know +her. Let her be shown to us." + +Then Christina was brought into the hall, and placed before the old +peasant. It was strange, no doubt, to see a child--a little girl of six +years old--offered to the Swedes as their ruler, instead of the brave +king, her father, who had led them to victory so many times. Could her +baby fingers wield a sword in war? Could her childish mind govern the +nation wisely in peace? + +But the Swedes do not appear to have asked themselves these questions. +Old Lars Larrson took Christina up in his arms, and gazed earnestly into +her face. He had known the great Gustavus well; and his heart was +touched, when he saw the likeness which the little girl bore to that +heroic monarch. + +"Yes," cried he, with the tears gushing down his furrowed cheeks, "this +is truly the daughter of our Gustavus! Here is her father's brow!--here +is his piercing eye! She is his very picture. This child shall be our +queen!" + +[Illustration] + +Then all the proud nobles of Sweden, and the reverend clergy, and the +burghers, and the peasants, knelt down at the child's feet, and kissed +her hand. + +"Long live Christina, queen of Sweden!" shouted they. + +Even after she was a woman grown, Christina remembered the pleasure +which she felt in seeing all these men at her feet, and hearing them +acknowledge her as their supreme ruler. Poor child! she was yet to learn +that power does not insure happiness. As yet, however, she had not any +real power. All the public business, it is true, was transacted in her +name; but the kingdom was governed by a number of the most experienced +statesmen, who were called a Regency. + +But it was considered necessary that the little queen should be present +at the public ceremonies, and should behave just as if she were in +reality the ruler of the nation. When she was seven years of age, some +ambassadors from the Czar of Muscovy came to the Swedish court. They +wore long beards, and were clad in a strange fashion, with furs, and +other outlandish ornaments; and as they were inhabitants of a +half-civilized country, they did not behave like other people. The +Chancellor Oxenstiern was afraid that the young queen would burst out +a-laughing, at the first sight of these queer ambassadors; or else that +she would be frightened by their unusual aspect. + +"Why should I be frightened?" said the little queen;--"and do you +suppose that I have no better manners than to laugh? Only tell me how I +must behave; and I will do it." + +Accordingly, the Muscovite ambassadors were introduced; and Christina +received them, and answered their speeches, with as much dignity and +propriety as if she had been a grown woman. + +All this time, though Christina was now a queen, you must not suppose +that she was left to act as she pleased. She had a preceptor, named John +Mathias, who was a very learned man, and capable of instructing her in +all the branches of science. But there was nobody to teach her the +delicate graces and gentle virtues of a woman. She was surrounded almost +entirely by men; and had learned to despise the society of her own sex. +At the age of nine years, she was separated from her mother, whom the +Swedes did not consider a proper person to be entrusted with the charge +of her. No little girl, who sits by a New England fireside, has cause to +envy Christina, in the royal palace at Stockholm. + +Yet she made great progress in her studies. She learned to read the +classical authors of Greece and Rome, and became a great admirer of the +heroes and poets of old times. Then, as for active exercises, she could +ride on horseback as well as any man in her kingdom. She was fond of +hunting, and could shoot at a mark with wonderful skill. But dancing was +the only feminine accomplishment with which she had any acquaintance. + +She was so restless in her disposition, that none of her attendants +were sure of a moment's quiet, neither day nor night. She grew up, I am +sorry to say, a very unamiable person, ill-tempered, proud, stubborn, +and, in short, unfit to make those around her happy, or to be happy +herself. Let every little girl, who has been taught self-control, and a +due regard for the rights of others, thank heaven that she has had +better instruction than this poor little queen of Sweden. + +At the age of eighteen, Christina was declared free to govern the +kingdom by herself, without the aid of a regency. At this period of her +life, she was a young woman of striking aspect, a good figure and +intelligent face, but very strangely dressed. She wore a short habit of +gray cloth, with a man's vest over it, and a black scarf around her +neck, but no jewels, nor ornaments of any kind. + +Yet, though Christina was so negligent of her appearance, there was +something in her air and manner that proclaimed her as the ruler of a +kingdom. Her eyes, it is said, had a very fierce and haughty look. Old +General Wrangel, who had often caused the enemies of Sweden to tremble +in battle, actually trembled himself, when he encountered the eyes of +the queen. But it would have been better for Christina if she could have +made people love her, by means of soft and gentle looks, instead of +affrighting them by such terrible glances. + +And now I have told you almost all that is amusing or instructive, in +the childhood of Christina. Only a few more words need be said about +her; for it is neither pleasant nor profitable to think of many things +that she did, after she grew to be a woman. + +When she had worn the crown a few years, she began to consider it +beneath her dignity to be called a queen, because the name implied that +she belonged to the weaker sex. She therefore caused herself to be +proclaimed KING, thus declaring to the world that she despised her own +sex, and was desirous of being ranked among men. But in the +twenty-eighth year of her age, Christina grew tired of royalty, and +resolved to be neither a king nor a queen any longer. She took the crown +from her head, with her own hands, and ceased to be the ruler of Sweden. +The people did not greatly regret her abdication; for she had governed +them ill, and had taken much of their property to supply her +extravagance. + +Having thus given up her hereditary crown, Christina left Sweden and +travelled over many of the countries of Europe. Everywhere, she was +received with great ceremony, because she was the daughter of the +renowned Gustavus, and had herself been a powerful queen. Perhaps you +would like to know something about her personal appearance, in the +latter part of her life. She is described as wearing a man's vest, a +short gray petticoat, embroidered with gold and silver, and a black wig, +which was thrust awry upon her head. She wore no gloves, and so seldom +washed her hands that nobody could tell what had been their original +color. In this strange dress, and, I suppose, without washing her hands +or face, she visited the magnificent court of Louis the Fourteenth. + +She died in 1689. None loved her while she lived, nor regretted her +death, nor planted a single flower upon her grave. Happy are the little +girls of America, who are brought up quietly and tenderly, at the +domestic hearth, and thus become gentle and delicate women! May none of +them ever lose the loveliness of their sex, by receiving such an +education as that of Queen Christina! + + * * * * * + +Emily, timid, quiet, and sensitive, was the very reverse of little +Christina. She seemed shocked at the idea of such a bold and masculine +character as has been described in the foregoing story. + +"I never could have loved her," whispered she to Mrs. Temple; and then +she added, with that love of personal neatness, which generally +accompanies purity of heart:--"It troubles me to think of her unclean +hands!" + +"Christina was a sad specimen of womankind, indeed," said Mrs. Temple. +"But it is very possible for a woman to have a strong mind, and to be +fitted for the active business of life, without losing any of her +natural delicacy. Perhaps, some time or other, Mr. Temple will tell you +a story of such a woman." + +It was now time for Edward to be left to repose. His brother George +shook him heartily by the hand, and hoped, as he had hoped twenty times +before, that to-morrow or the next day, Ned's eyes would be strong +enough to look the sun right in the face. + +"Thank you, George," replied Edward, smiling; "but I am not half so +impatient as at first. If my bodily eyesight were as good as yours, +perhaps I could not see things so distinctly with my mind's eye. But now +there is a light within which shows me the little Quaker artist, Ben +West, and Isaac Newton with his windmill, and stubborn Sam Johnson, and +stout Noll Cromwell, and shrewd Ben Franklin, and little Queen Christina +with the Swedes kneeling at her feet. It seems as if I really saw these +personages face to face. So I can bear the darkness outside of me pretty +well." + +When Edward ceased speaking, Emily put up her mouth and kissed him as +her farewell for the night. + +"Ah, I forgot!" said Edward, with a sigh. "I cannot see any of your +faces. What would it signify to see all the famous people in the world, +if I must be blind to the faces that I love?" + +"You must try to see us with your heart, my dear child," said his +mother. + +Edward went to bed, somewhat dispirited, but quickly falling asleep, was +visited with such a pleasant dream of the sunshine and of his dearest +friends that he felt the happier for it all the next day. And we hope to +find him still happy when we meet again. + + +THE END. + + + + +JUVENILE BOOKS + +PUBLISHED BY + +TICKNOR, REED, AND FIELDS. + +JUST OUT, + + +_History of my Pets_. +By Grace Greenwood. A beautiful little volume, with fine plates. + 50 cents. + +_Barbauld's (Mrs.) Lessons for Children_. +With a large number of engravings. 16mo. 40 cents. + +_Jonas's Stories. Related to Rollo and Lucy_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jonas a Judge; or Law among the Boys_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jonas on a Farm in Summer_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jonas on a Farm in Winter_. +By Jacob Abbott. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Jack Halliard. Voyages and adventures in the +Arctic Ocean_. With engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly's History of the New England +Slates_. With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly's History of the Middle States_. +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly's History of the Southern States_, +_Virginia_, _North and South Carolina_, _and Georgia_. +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly's History of the Western States_. +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Lambert Lilly's Story of the American Revolution._ +With numerous engravings. 18mo. 38 cents. + +_Little Stories for Little Folks_. +Translated from the German. With twelve fine steel engravings. 16mo. + 60 cents. + +_Mary Howitt's Birds and Flowers, and other_ +_Country Things_. With engravings. 12mo. 50 cents. + +_Mother's Lessons, for Little Girls and Boys_. +By a Lady of Boston. With eight beautiful steel engravings. 16mo. + 50 cents. + +_Olympic Games. A Gift for the Holidays_. +By the Author of "Poetry for Home and School," &c. 16mo. 50 cents. + +_Parley's Short Stories for Long Nights_. +With eight colored engravings, 16mo. 50 cents; uncolored engravings, +40 cents. + +_Lights and Shadows of Domestic Life, and other Stories_. +By the authors of "Rose and her Lamb." + + + + +TICKNOR, REED, AND FIELDS + +HAVE PUBLISHED + +_Greenwood Leaves_. + +A Collection of Stories and Letters, by Grace Greenwood. Second edition. +1 vol. 12mo. $1.25; gilt $1.75. + + +We suppose most of our readers are familiar with the name of Grace +Greenwood. For some half dozen of years she has been one of the most +acceptable contributors to our American monthlies, and she possesses +such liveliness and vivacity that it does one good to read her +productions. There is an ease and _grace_ about her, too, that makes us +feel acquainted with her, although we have never seen her. The volume +before us is filled with tales, sketches, letters, and poems. We predict +that every lady's library will contain this volume.--BOSTON ATLAS. + +The name of Grace Greenwood has now become a household word in the +popular literature of our country and our day. Of the intellectual woman +we are not called to say much, as her writings speak for themselves, and +they have spoken widely. They are eminently characteristic; they are +strictly national; they are likewise decisively individual. All true +individuality is honestly social; and also, in Miss Clarke's writings, +nothing is sectional, and nothing sectarian. There is much in them that +is subjective, much that is drawn from personal experience, but nothing +that is merely vain or selfish. A genuine human being, she is at the +same time a genuine American girl. And the spirit of her country finds +in her utterance a voice that must stir an earnest life in the brothers +and sisters of her nation. She is one of the spiritual products of the +soil, which has of late given evidence of spiritual fertility; and she +promises not to be the least healthy, as she is not the least choice +among them; she is only putting out her spring buds; if no untimely +frost shall nip them, when the summer suns are warm they will be +splendid blossoms, and long before autumn begins to dim the sky with its +mellow shootings they will be luxuriant fruit.--HENRY GILES. + + + + +_Alderbrook_. + +_A Collection of Fanny Forester's Village Sketches, Poems, &c_. With a +fine Mezzotinto Portrait of the Author, engraved by Sartain. Ninth +edition, enlarged. + +2 vols. 12mo, $1.75; gilt $2.50; gilt extra $3.00. The same in 1 vol. +$1.62; gilt $2.25; gilt extra $2.75. + + +Who has not heard of Fanny Forester,--'charming Fanny Forester,' as she +is deservedly called? Her sketches have been more generally read and +admired than those of almost any other periodical writer of our day. +There is a freshness, grace, sprightliness, purity, and actualness about +them, which charms and invigorates; and we are glad to find them +collected and published in a form both elegant and convenient. Miss +Chubbuck, it will be remembered, was married a few months ago to the +Rev. Dr. Judson, and is now on her way, with that devoted missionary, to +the scene of his former labors. The dedicatory preface of these volumes, +to her husband, is one of the most graceful and touching we have ever +seen. A beautifully engraved portrait of the lady, by Sartain, is +prefixed to the first volume. This collection will make a very +acceptable and suitable present in the approaching Holidays.--SALEM +REGISTER. + +This is one of those charming books which well deserves a place in every +family library, and which has already won a place in thousands of +hearts. The Sketches comprised in these beautiful volumes are so full of +grace and tenderness, so pure in their style and so elevated in their +tone, that none can read them without delight and profit. We hazard +little in saying that the touching story of "Grace Linden," which +properly leads the collection, is scarcely surpassed in beauty by any +thing in the works of Maria Edgeworth, or Mary Russell Mitford. There +are a great many other Sketches, in the volumes, that deserve special +praise; but we will not deal in particulars when all are so admirable. + +The authoress of "Alderbrook" is now a self-denying, zealous missionary +of the Cross, in Asia, and, as Mrs. Judson, has written many very +charming things. She is best known, however, under her _nomme de plume_; +and however honored may be the revered name she now bears, that of Fanny +Forester will be cherished with pride and pleasure by her friends and +readers.--So. LIT. GAZETTE. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of True Stories of History and Biography +by Nathaniel Hawthorne + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TRUE STORIES *** + +***** This file should be named 15697.txt or 15697.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/5/6/9/15697/ + +Produced by Internet Archive Children's Library, Joshua +Hutchinson, Josephine Paolucci and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.net/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.net), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.net + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** + |